251.boo 2016 Tucson

User Manual: 2016-tucson

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 642

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications

All information in this Owner’s Manual is current at the time of publication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at
any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be
carried out.
This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.
As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply
to your specific vehicle.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect
the performance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal
or state agencies.

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is
possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely
affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio
manufacturer’s instructions or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.
These titles indicate the following:

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result
in death or serious injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in minor or moderate injury.

NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if
not avoided, could result in vehicle
damage.

INTRODUCTION
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each HYUNDAI we build.
Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with
your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.
This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s controls and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.
This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recommended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. HYUNDAI dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you
can refer to it at any time. The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with important operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
CAUTION
Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet HYUNDAI specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the
specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner’s Manual.
Copyright 2015 HYUNDAI Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored
in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI
Motor America.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS
1. What are HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the
same parts used by HYUNDAI
Motor Company to manufacture
vehicles. They are designed and
tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability for our
customers.

2. Why should you use genuine
parts?
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Damage
caused by using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not
covered under the HYUNDAI New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any
other HYUNDAI warranty.
In addition, any damage to or failure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts
caused by the installation or failure
of an imitation, counterfeit or used
salvage part is not covered by any
HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasing HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts?
Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine
Parts Logo on the package (see
below).
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts exported
to the U.S. are packaged with
labels written only in English.
HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only
sold through authorized HYUNDAI
Dealerships.

Introduction

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

SAFETY MESSAGES

We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. To gain an
overview of the contents of your
Owner’s Manual, use the Table of
Contents in the front of the manual.
The first page of each Chapter
includes a detailed Table of Contents
of the Topics in that Chapter.
To quickly locate information about
your vehicle, use the Index in the
back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in this manual and
the page number where it can be
found.
For your convenience, we have
incorporated tabs on the right-hand
page edges. These tabs are coded
with the Chapter titles to assist you
with navigating through the manual.

Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. This Owner’s
Manual provides you with many safety precautions and operating procedures. This information alerts you to
potential hazards that may hurt you
or others, as well as damage to your
vehicle.
Safety messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
these hazards and what to do to
avoid or reduce the risks.
Warnings and instructions contained
in this manual are for your safety.
Failure to follow safety warnings and
instructions can lead to serious injury
or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,
WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and
the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will
be used.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to
potential physical injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol
to avoid possible injury or
death. The safety alert symbol precedes the signal words
DANGER, WARNING and
CAUTION.

DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious
injury.

WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious
injury.
F6

Introduction

FUEL REQUIREMENTS
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a hazardous
situation which, if not avoided,
could result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE

NOTICE indicates a situation
which, if not avoided, could result
in vehicle damage.

Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher. (Do not
use methanol blended fuels)
NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine
and engine components, never
add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for additional information.

WARNING
• Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off
when refueling.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.

Gasoline containing alcohol or
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alcohol) are being marketed along with or
instead of leaded or unleaded gasoline.
Do not use gasohol containing more
than 10% ethanol, and do not use
gasoline or gasohol containing any
methanol. Either of these fuels may
cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system.
Discontinue using gasohol of any
kind if drivability problems occur.
F7

Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel comprised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufactured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compatible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine performance and damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI
recommends that customers do not
use fuel with an ethanol content
exceeding 10 percent.
NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle’s
engine and fuel system:
• Never use gasohol which contains methanol.
• Never use gasohol containing
more than 10% ethanol.
• Never use leaded fuel or leaded
gasohol.
• Never use "E85" fuel.
Your
New
Vehicle
Limited
Warranty does not cover damage
to the fuel system or any performance problems caused by the use
of "E85" fuel.
F8

Using Fuel Additives (except
Detergent Fuel Additives)
Using fuel additives such as:
- Silicone fuel additive
- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive
- Other metallic-based fuel additives
may result in cylinder misfire, poor
acceleration, engine stalling, damage to the catalyst, or abnormal corrosion, and may cause damage to
the engine resulting in a reduction in
the overall life of the powertrain.
- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) may illuminate.
NOTICE

Damage to the fuel system or performance problem caused by the
use of these fuels or fuel additives
may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful
manganese-based fuel additives
such as MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
HYUNDAI does not recommend the
use of gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on
the cluster may come on.

Detergent Fuel Additives
HYUNDAI recommends that you use
good quality gasolines treated with
detergent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which help prevent deposit formation in the engine.
These gasolines will help the engine
run cleaner and enhance performance
of the Emission Control System. For
more information on TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, please go to the
website (www.toptiergas.com).

Introduction

VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
For customers who do not use TOP
Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, detergent-based fuel additives that you
can purchase separately may be
added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline is not available,
one bottle of additive added to the
fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or 12
months is recommended.
Additives are available from your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer along
with information on how to use them.
Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.

No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emergencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.

WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Items contained in motor vehicles or emitted from them are
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
• Gasoline and its vapors
• Engine exhaust
• Used engine oil
• Interior passenger compartment components and materials
• Component parts which are
subject to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead, lead compounds
and other chemicals known to
the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm.

Introduction

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
• How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

F10

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects

Index

F11

Your vehicle at a glance

Seat Belts ..............................................................2-23

Exterior overview ..................................................1-2
Interior overview....................................................1-4
Instrument panel overview ...................................1-5
Engine compartment .............................................1-6

Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-37

Safety system of your vehicle
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2
Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4
Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5
Front Seats .........................................................................2-6
Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12
Head restraints ................................................................2-15
Seat warmers and air ventilation seats.....................2-19

F12

Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-33
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-36
Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-37
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-38
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-40

Air Bag Advanced Supplemental Restraint System.......2-48
Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-50
How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-53
What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-58
Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-59
Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-64
SRS Care ..........................................................................2-69
Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-70
Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

Windows ................................................................3-38

Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4

Panoramic sunroof ..............................................3-42

Remote Key.........................................................................3-4
Smart Key............................................................................3-8
Immobilizer System.........................................................3-12

Door locks .............................................................3-14
Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle....3-14
Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle .......3-15
Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-17
Child-Protector Rear Door locks ................................3-18

Theft-alarm system.............................................3-19
Steering wheel......................................................3-20
Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-20
Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering..............................3-21
Heated Steering Wheel..................................................3-21
Horn....................................................................................3-22

Mirrors...................................................................3-23
Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-23
Outside Rearview Mirror...............................................3-35

Power Windows ...............................................................3-39
Sunshade...........................................................................3-42
Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-43
Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-43
Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-44
To Reset the Sunroof.....................................................3-45

Exterior features .................................................3-46
Hood ...................................................................................3-46
Fuel Filler Door................................................................3-48

Liftgate ..................................................................3-51
Non-Powered liftgate ....................................................3-51
Power liftgate ..................................................................3-52
Smart Liftgate ..................................................................3-59

Instrument cluster................................................3-63
Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-64
LCD Display Control........................................................3-64
Gauges ...............................................................................3-65

F13

LCD Display ...........................................................3-70

Wipers and washers ..........................................3-118

LCD Modes........................................................................3-70
Trip Computer Mode.......................................................3-71
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode ............................................3-72
LDWS Mode......................................................................3-72
A/V Mode..........................................................................3-72
Information Mode ...........................................................3-73
User Settings Mode........................................................3-75
Warning Messages..........................................................3-81

Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-118
Windshield Washers .....................................................3-119
Rear window wiper and washer switch ..................3-120
Rear View Camera ........................................................3-121
Rear Parking Assist System .......................................3-122
Rear parking assist system precautions .................3-125

Defroster.............................................................3-126

Trip computer .......................................................3-89

Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-126

Overview............................................................................3-89
Trip A/B .............................................................................3-90
Fuel Economy...................................................................3-91
Digital Speedometer .......................................................3-93

Manual climate control system........................3-127

Warning and indicator lights..............................3-94

Automatic climate control system...................3-137

Warning Lights.................................................................3-94
Indicator Lights..............................................................3-102

Light .....................................................................3-107
Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-107
Welcome System ...........................................................3-113
Interior Lights ................................................................3-114

F14

Driver Assist System .........................................3-121

Heating and Air Conditioning.....................................3-128
System Operation .........................................................3-133
System Maintenance....................................................3-135
Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-138
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-139
System Operation .........................................................3-145
System Maintenance....................................................3-147

Windshield defrosting and defogging ............3-149
Manual Climate Control System ................................3-149
Automatic Climate Control System ...........................3-150
Defogging logic..............................................................3-151

Climate control additional features.................3-152

Exterior features ...............................................3-165

Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-152
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation ...............................3-152

Roof rack ........................................................................3-165

Storage compartment........................................3-153
Center Console Storage ..............................................3-153
Glove Box........................................................................3-153
Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-154

Interior features.................................................3-155
Cup Holder ......................................................................3-155
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-156
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-156
Clock.................................................................................3-157
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-159
Plastic bag hook............................................................3-160
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-160
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-161
Cargo security screen..................................................3-161
Luggage tray ..................................................................3-164

F15

Multimedia system
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod® Port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Control........................................4-3
Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN)..................4-4
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
Caring for Disc ...................................................................4-8

System Controllers and Functions..........4-18, 4-71
Audio Head Unit ...................................................4-18,
Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls .................4-20,
Radio Mode ...........................................................4-22,
SiriusXM Radio Mode / XMTM Radio
Mode .......................................................................4-26,
Media Mode ..........................................................4-28,
Audio CD Mode.....................................................4-29,
MP3 CD Mode.......................................................4-31,
USB Mode..............................................................4-34,
iPod® Mode ...........................................................4-37,
AUX Mode..............................................................4-39,
MY Music Mode...................................................4-40,

F16

4-71
4-73
4-75
4-77
4-79
4-80
4-82
4-85
4-88
4-90
4-91

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode ...........................................................4-43, 4-94
Voice Recognition ..............................................4-58, 4-109
Setup.....................................................................4-64, 4-116
Rear View Camera .............................................4-69, 4-121

Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4

All wheel drive (AWD) .........................................5-42
AWD operation.................................................................5-43
Emergency precautions.................................................5-47

Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4

Drive mode integrated control system .............5-49
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ...................5-51

Ignition switch ........................................................5-6

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-52
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-55

Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9

Transmission .........................................................5-14

Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ...........5-59

Automatic Transmission.................................................5-14
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ...............................5-18
Shift-Lock System ..........................................................5-24
Shift-Lock Release .........................................................5-25
Parking...............................................................................5-25
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-26

Lane departure warning system (LDWS) .........5-71

Braking system.....................................................5-28
Power Brakes ...................................................................5-28
Disc Brakes Wear Indicator ..........................................5-29
Parking Brake...................................................................5-29
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-31
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-33
Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-37
Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-38
Downhill Brake Control (DBC) ......................................5-39
Good Braking Practices.................................................5-41

System setting and activation......................................5-59
AEB warning message and system control..............5-61
AEB front radar sensor.................................................5-64
System malfunction........................................................5-65
Limitations of the system .............................................5-67
LDWS Operation ..............................................................5-72
Warning Light and Message.........................................5-73
Limitations of the system .............................................5-73

Cruise control .......................................................5-75
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-75

F17

Special driving conditions...................................5-80
Hazardous driving conditions.......................................5-80
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-80
Smooth cornering ...........................................................5-81
Driving at night ................................................................5-81
Driving in the rain ...........................................................5-82
Driving in flooded areas................................................5-82
Highway driving ...............................................................5-83
Reducing the risk of a rollover ...................................5-83

Winter driving.......................................................5-85
Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-85
Winter Precautions.........................................................5-87

Trailer towing .......................................................5-89
If you decide to pull a trailer?.....................................5-90
Trailer towing equipment ..............................................5-92
Driving with a trailer ......................................................5-93
Maintenance when trailer towing...............................5-97

Vehicle load limit ..................................................5-98
Tire Loading Information Label ...................................5-99

F18

What to do in an emergency
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2
If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing ........6-2
If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

If the engine will not start ..................................6-3
If the Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns
Over Slowly .........................................................................6-3
If the Engine Turns Over Normally but
Doesn't Start ......................................................................6-3

Jump starting ..........................................................6-4
If the engine overheats ........................................6-7
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)..........6-9
Check Tire Pressure .........................................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-10
Low tire pressure indicator ..........................................6-11
Low tire pressure LCD display with position
indicator.............................................................................6-11
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
Malfunction Indicator.....................................................6-12
Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-13

If you have a flat tire..........................................6-15
Towing ...................................................................6-23
Towing service .................................................................6-23
Removable towing hook ................................................6-24
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-25
Tie-down hook ................................................................6-26

Maintenance
Engine compartment .............................................7-3
Maintenance services ...........................................7-5
Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-5
Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-5

Owner maintenance...............................................7-6
Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-7

Scheduled maintenance services.........................7-8
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..7-26
Engine oil ..............................................................7-30
Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-30
Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-31

Engine coolant......................................................7-32
Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-32
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-35

Brake fluid ............................................................7-36
Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-36

Washer fluid .........................................................7-37
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-37

Parking brake .......................................................7-37
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-37

Air cleaner ............................................................7-38
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-38

F19

Climate control air filter .....................................7-40

Fuses......................................................................7-64

Filter Inspection...............................................................7-40

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-65
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-66
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-69

Wiper blades .........................................................7-42
Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-42
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-42

Battery...................................................................7-45
For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-46
Battery Recharging ........................................................7-46
Reset features .................................................................7-47

Tires and wheels ..................................................7-48
Tire Care............................................................................7-48
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-49
Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-50
Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-51
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-52
Tire Replacement ............................................................7-52
Wheel Replacement ........................................................7-53
Tire Traction .....................................................................7-53
Tire Maintenance ............................................................7-54
Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-54
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-58
All Season Tires...............................................................7-61
Summer Tires ...................................................................7-61
Snow Tires ........................................................................7-61
Radial-Ply Tires ...............................................................7-62
Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-62

F20

Light bulbs.............................................................7-77
Headlamp, Parking lamp, Turn signal lamp,
side marker and front fog lamp bulb
replacement ......................................................................7-78
Side repeater lamp replacement .................................7-88
Rear combination light bulb replacement .................7-88
High mounted stop lamp replacement.......................7-91
License plate light bulb replacement .........................7-91
Interior light bulb replacement ....................................7-92

Appearance care ..................................................7-94
Exterior Care ....................................................................7-94
Interior Care .....................................................................7-99

Emission control system ...................................7-101
Crankcase Emission Control System ........................7-101
Evaporative Emission Control System Including
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) .........7-101
Exhaust Emission Control System ............................7-102

California perchlorate notice ...........................7-105

Specifications, Consumer information and
Reporting safety defects
Engine ......................................................................8-2
Dimensions ..............................................................8-2
Gross vehicle weight .............................................8-3
Luggage volume .....................................................8-3
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-4
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-6
Air Conditioning System........................................8-6
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ..........8-7
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number .........................8-9

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................8-10
Vehicle Certification Label .................................8-10
Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-11
Engine Number .....................................................8-11
Refrigerant Label.................................................8-11
Consumer Information.........................................8-12
Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-13

F21

Your vehicle at a glance
1
Your vehicle at a glance

Your vehicle at a glance

EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
■ Front view

1. Panoramic sunroof* ............................3-42
2. Front windshield wiper blades ............7-42
3. Side view mirror ..................................3-35
4. Door locks ..........................................3-14
5. Headlight ............................................7-78
6. Front fog lamp* ..................................3-110
7. Hood ....................................................3-46
8. Tires and wheels ........................7-48 / 8-6
9. Daytime running lamp*............3-112 / 7-78
*: if equipped

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OTLA015001

1-2

■ Rear view

2. Defroster............................................3-126
3. Parking assist system* ......................3-122
4. Fuel filler door ....................................3-48
5. Towing hook ........................................6-23
6. Rear combination lamp ......................7-88
7. Rear window wiper blade ....................7-44
8. High mounted stop lamp ....................7-91
9. Rearview camera ..............................3-121
*: if equipped

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
OTL015002

1-3

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Antenna ................................................4-2

Your vehicle at a glance

INTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-15
2. Side view mirror control switch ..............3-37
3. Central door lock switch ........................3-16
4. Power window switches ........................3-38
5. Power window lock switch......................3-41
6. Fuel filler door release lever ..................3-48
7. Instrument panel illumination control
switch ....................................................3-64
8. Blind spot detection(BSD) system
button*....................................................5-51
9. Lane departure warning system (LDWS)
button*....................................................5-71
10. ESC OFF button ..................................5-35
11. Power liftgate button ............................3-53
12. Fuse panel ..........................................7-65
13. Steering wheel ....................................3-20
14. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-21
15. Seat........................................................2-4
16. Hood release lever ..............................3-46
17. Parking brake ......................................5-29
18. Brake pedal..........................................5-28
19. Accelerator pedal
* : if equipped
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-4

OTLA015003

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

OTLA015005

1-5

1
Your vehicle at a glance

❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Light control/Turn signals..................3-107
2. Steering wheel audio controls*/
Bluetooth® wireless technology
hands-free controls*..............................4-3
3. Instrument cluster ..............................3-63
4. Horn ....................................................3-22
5. Driver’s front air bag ..........................2-48
6. Wiper/Washer ..................................3-118
7. Cruise Control buttons/switch ............5-75
8. Engine Start/Stop button/
Key ignition switch ................................5-6
9. Automatic transmission/
Dual clutch transmission shifter..........5-14
10. Audio/AVN* ......................................4-17
11. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2
12. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator ............................................2-59
13. Climate control system ..................3-137
14. AUX, USB ..........................................4-2
15. Power outlet ....................................3-156
16. Cup holder ......................................3-155
17. Drive mode integrated control
system ..............................................5-49
18. DBC button ......................................5-39
19. AWD LOCK button* ..........................5-43
20. Rear parking assist system* ..........3-122
21. Passenger’s front air bag..................2-48
22. Glove box........................................3-153
* : if equipped

Your vehicle at a glance

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI

1. Engine coolant reservoir ...................7-32
2. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-36
3. Air cleaner.........................................7-38
4. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-30
5. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-31
■ Nu 2.0 GDI

6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-37
7. Fuse box ...........................................7-66
8. Battery ..............................................7-45
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTLE075002/OTLA075001

1-6

Safety system of your vehicle
This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.
It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.
Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

2
Important Safety Precautions..............................2-2

Child Restraint System (CRS).............................2-37

Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2
Restrain All Children .........................................................2-2
Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2
Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2
Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-37
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-38
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-40

Seat Belts ..............................................................2-23
Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23
Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24
Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-26
Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-33
Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-36

Safety system of your vehicle

IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
You will find many safety precautions
and recommendations throughout
this section, and throughout this manual. The safety precautions in this section are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of accidents. Air bags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with air bags,
ALWAYS make sure you and your
passengers wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly.

2-2

Restrain All Children

Driver Distraction

All children under age 13 should ride
in your vehicle properly restrained in
a rear seat, not the front seat. Infants
and small children should be
restrained in an appropriate child
restraint. Larger children should use
a booster seat with the lap/shoulder
belt until they can use the seat belt
properly without a booster seat.

Driver distraction presents a serious
and potentially deadly danger, especially for inexperienced drivers. Safety
should be the first concern when
behind the wheel and drivers need to
be aware of the wide array of potential
distractions, such as drowsiness,
reaching for objects, eating, personal
grooming, other passengers, and
using cellular phones.
Drivers can become distracted when
they take their eyes and attention off
the road or their hands off the wheel
to focus on activities other than driving. To reduce your risk of distraction
or getting into an accident:

Air Bag Hazards
While air bags can save lives, they
can also cause serious or fatal
injuries to occupants who sit too
close to them, or who are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and shorter adults are at the
greatest risk of being injured by an
inflating air bag. Follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum
speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Having a tire blowout or a mechanical
failure can be extremely hazardous. To
reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and
condition frequently, and perform all
regularly scheduled maintenance.

2-3

2
Safety system of your vehicle

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices
(i.e., MP3 players, phones, navigation units, etc.) when your vehicle is
parked or safely stopped.
• ONLY use your mobile device when
allowed by laws and when conditions
permit safe use. NEVER text or
email while driving. Most states have
laws prohibiting drivers from texting.
Some states and cities also prohibit
drivers from using handheld phones.
• NEVER let the use of a mobile
device distract you from driving. You
have a responsibility to your passengers and others on the road to
always drive safely, with your hands
on the wheel as well as your eyes
and attention on the road.

Safety system of your vehicle

SEATS

Front seats
Front seat
(1) Forward and backward
(2) Seatback angle
(3) Seat cushion height (Driver’s seat)
(4) Lumbar support (Driver’s seat)*
(5) Seat warmer*
(6) Air ventilation seat*
(7) Head restraint
Rear seat
(8) Seatback angle and folding
(9) Head restraint
(10) Armrest
(11) Seat warmer*
* : if equipped

OTL035001L

2-4

Safety Precautions

WARNING
Do not use a cushion that
reduces friction between the seat
and the passenger. The passenger’s hips may slide under the
lap portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
Serious or fatal internal injuries
could result because the seat
belt cannot operate properly.

Air bags
You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. Sitting too close to an air bag
greatly increases the risk of injury in
the event the air bag inflates.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• Adjust the driver's seat as far to
the rear as possible while maintaining the ability to maintain
full control of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible.
• Hold the steering wheel by the
rim with hands at the 9 o'clock
and 3 o'clock positions to minimize the risk of injuries to your
hands and arms.
• NEVER place anything or anyone between the steering wheel
and the air bag.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place feet or legs on the
dashboard to minimize the risk
of leg injuries.

Seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before
starting any trip.
At all times, passengers should sit
upright and be properly restrained.
Infants and small children must be
restrained in appropriate child restraint
systems. Children who have outgrown
a booster seat and adults must be
restrained using the seat belts.

2-5

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Adjusting the seats so that you are sitting in a safe, comfortable position
plays an important role in driver and
passenger safety together with the
seat belts and air bags in an accident.

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
that drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and their chest.

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat belt:
• NEVER use one seat belt for
more than one occupant.
• Always position the seatback
upright with the lap portion of
the seat belt snug and low
across the hips.
• NEVER allow children or small
infants to ride in a passenger’s
lap.
• Do not route the seat belt
across your neck, across sharp
edges, or reroute the shoulder
strap away from your body.
• Do not allow the seat belt to
become caught or jammed.

2-6

Front Seats

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when adjusting your seat:
• NEVER attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is moving. The seat could respond
with unexpected movement
and may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
• Do not place anything under
the front seats. Loose objects
in the driver’s foot area could
interfere with the operation of
the foot pedals, causing an
accident.
• Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position
and proper locking of the seatback.
• Do not place a cigarette lighter
on the floor or seat. When you
operate the seat, gas may exit
out of the lighter causing a fire.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Use extreme caution when
picking up small objects
trapped under the seats or
between the seat and the center console. Your hands might
be cut or injured by the edges
of the seat mechanism.

CAUTION
To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while
wearing your seat belt.
Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on your abdomen.
• Do not allow your hands or
fingers to get caught in the
seat mechanisms while the
seat is moving.

Manual adjustment

WARNING
OTL035003
OTL035002

Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment
lever and hold it.
2. Slide the seat to the position you
desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seat is locked in place. Move
forward and rearward without using
the lever. If the seat moves, it is not
locked properly.

Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the
seatback lever.
2. Carefully lean back on the seat
and adjust the seatback to the
position you desire.
3. Release the lever and make sure
the seatback is locked in place.
(The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to
lock.)

NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
Drivers and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

2-7

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protection of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt is not as effective
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.

2-8

Power adjustment
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the outside of the seat cushion. Before
driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so that you can easily control
the steering wheel, foot pedals and
controls on the instrument panel.

WARNING
OTL035004

Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
• Push down on the lever several
times, to lower the seat cushion.
• Pull up on the lever several times,
to raise the seat cushion.

NEVER allow children in the
vehicle unattended. The power
seats are operable when the
engine is turned off.

NOTICE

OTL035005

OTL035006

Forward and rearward adjustment
To move the seat forward or rearward:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle
To recline the seatback:
1. Push the control switch forward or
rearward.
2. Release the switch once the seatback reaches the desired position.

2-9

Safety system of your vehicle

To prevent damage to the seats:
• Always stop adjusting the seats
when the seat has been adjusted as far forward or rearward as
possible.
• Do not adjust the seats longer
than necessary when the engine
is turned off. This may result in
unnecessary battery drain.
• Do not operate two or more
seats at the same time. This may
result in an electrical malfunction.

Safety system of your vehicle

Reclining seatback
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even when buckled up, the
protections of your restraint system
(seat belts and air bags) is greatly
reduced by reclining your seatback.

WARNING
NEVER ride with a reclined seatback when the vehicle is moving.
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious
or fatal injuries in the event of a
collision or sudden stop.
Driver and passengers should
ALWAYS sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

2-10

Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly.
When the seatback is reclined, the
shoulder belt cannot do its job
because it will not be snug against
your chest. Instead, it will be in front
of you. During an accident, you could
be thrown into the seat belt, causing
neck or other injuries.
The more the seatback is reclined,
the greater chance the passenger’s
hips will slide under the lap belt or
the passenger’s neck will strike the
shoulder belt.

OTL035051

Seat cushion height
To change the height of the seat
cushion:
1. Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or push down to
lower the front part of the seat
cushion. Pull the rear portion of the
control switch up to raise or push
down to lower the seat cushion.
2. Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.

Seatback pocket

CAUTION

OTL035008

Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat, if equipped)
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Press the front portion of the
switch to increase support or the
rear portion of the switch to
decrease support.
2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position.

OTL035017

The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front seatbacks.

2-11

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pockets.
In an accident they could come
loose from the pocket and
injure occupants.

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear Seats
Folding the rear seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded to
facilitate carrying long items or to
increase the luggage capacity of the
vehicle.

WARNING
OTL035029

• Never allow passengers to sit
on top of the folded down
seatback while the vehicle is
moving. This is not a proper
seating position and no seat
belts are available for use.
This could result in serious
injury or death in case of an
accident or sudden stop.
• Objects carried on the folded
down seatback should not
extend higher than the top of
the front seatbacks. This
could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.

2-12

OTLE035060

To fold down the rear seatback:
1. Set the front seatback to the
upright position and if necessary,
slide the front seat forward.
2. Lower the rear head restraints to
the lowest position.
OTLE035023

3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in
the pocket between the rear seatback and cushion, and insert the
rear seat belt webbing in the guide
to prevent the seat belt from being
damaged.

WARNING

OTL035025

4. Fold the seatback toward the front
of the vehicle.

5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull
the seatback rearward. Pull the
seatback firmly until it clicks into
place. Make sure the seatback is
locked in place.
When you return the seatback to
its upright position, always be sure
it has locked into position by pushing on the top of the seatback.

WARNING
Do not place objects in the rear
seats, since they cannot be
properly secured and may hit
vehicle occupants in a collision
causing serious injury or death.

2-13

2
Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035024

When returning the rear seatback from a folded to an upright
position, hold the seatback and
return it slowly. Ensure that the
seatback is completely locked
into its upright position by
pushing on the top of the seatback. In an accident or sudden
stop, the unlocked seatback
could allow cargo to move forward with great force and enter
the passenger compartment,
which could result in serious
injury or death.

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING

Armrest

CAUTION
• Be careful when loading

Make sure the engine is off, the
shift lever is in P (Park), and the
parking brake is securely applied
whenever loading or unloading
cargo. Failure to take these steps
may allow the vehicle to move if
the shift lever is inadvertently
moved to another position.

OTLE035021

The armrest is located in the center
of the rear seat. Pull the armrest
down by using the strap from the
seatback to use it.
You will find cup holders on the center armrest.

2-14

cargo through the rear passenger seats to prevent damage to the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from
moving while driving.
• Unsecured cargo in the passenger compartment can
cause damage to the vehicle
or injury to it’s occupants.

Head restraints

•

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or
pull on the head restraints.

2
Safety system of your vehicle

The vehicle’s front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints. The
head restraints provide comfort for
passengers, but more importantly
they are designed to help protect
passengers from whiplash and other
neck and spinal injuries during an
accident, especially in a rear impact
collision.

NOTICE

(Continued)

OLF034072N

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death in an accident,
take the following precautions
when adjusting your head
restraints:
• Always properly adjust the
head restraints for all passengers BEFORE starting the
vehicle.
• NEVER let anyone ride in a
seat with the head restraints
removed.
(Continued)

Adjust the head restraints so
the middle of the head
restraints is at the same height
as the height of the top of the
eyes.
• NEVER adjust the head
restraint position of the driver’s seat when the vehicle is
in motion.
• Adjust the head restraint as
close to the passenger’s head
as possible. Do not use a seat
cushion that holds the body
away from the seatback.
• Make sure the head restraint
locks into position after adjusting it.
2-15

Safety system of your vehicle

Front seat head restraints

OLMB033009

The vehicle's front seats are
equipped with adjustable head
restraints for both safety and comfort.

2-16

OTL035014

OTL035009

Forward and rearward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted forward to 3 different positions by
pulling the headrest forward to the
desired detent. To adjust the headrest to it’s furthest rearwards position, pull it fully forward to the farthest
position and release it.

Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the head restraint:
1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the head restraint:
1. Push and hold the release button
(2) on the head restraint support.
2. Lower the head restraint to the
desired position (3).

3. Press the head restraint release
button (3) while pulling upward on
the head restraint (4).

■ Manual seat

2
Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035010
OLF034015

■ Power seat

NOTICE

If you recline the seatback towards
the front with the head restraint
and seat cushion raised, the head
restraint may come in contact with
the sunvisor or other parts of the
vehicle.
OTL035011

Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (1).
2. Raise the head restraint as far as it
can go.
2-17

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat head restraints

■ Manual seat

OTL035012
■ Power seat

OTL035018
OLMB033016

The rear seats are equipped with
head restraints in all seating positions for passenger safety and comfort.

OTL035013

To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles (2) into
the holes while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.
3. Recline the seatback (4) forward
using the seatback angle lever/
switch (3).
2-18

Seat warmers and air ventilation seats
Front seat warmers (if equipped)
Seat warmers are provided to warm
the seats during cold weather.

OTLA035018

Removal/Reinstallation
To remove the head restraint:
1. Raise the head restraint as far as
it can go.
2. Press the head restraint release
button (1) while pulling the head
restraint up (2).
To reinstall the head restraint:
1. Put the head restraint poles into
the holes (3) while pressing the
release button (1).
2. Adjust the head restraint to the
appropriate height.

The seat warmers can cause a
SERIOUS BURN, even at low
temperatures and especially if
used for long periods of time.
Passengers must be able to feel
if the seat is becoming too warm
so they can turn it off, if needed.
People who cannot detect temperature change or pain to the
skin should use extreme caution, especially the following
types of passengers:
• Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients.
• People with sensitive skin or
who burn easily.
(Continued)

WARNING
NEVER place anything on the
seat that insulates against heat
when the seat warmer is in operation, such as a blanket or seat
cushion. This may cause the
seat warmer to overheat, causing a burn or damage to the seat.

2-19

2
Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING

(Continued)
• Fatigued individuals.
• Intoxicated individuals.
• People taking medication that
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness.

Safety system of your vehicle

• Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
→

HIGH (

→

OFF
OTLE035075
■ Type B

LOW (

)

→

To prevent damage to the seat
warmers and seats:
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol
or gasoline to clean the seats.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on seats equipped with
seat warmers.
• Do not change the seat cover. It
may damage the seat warmer or
air ventilation system.

During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.

■ Type A

)

→

NOTICE

MIDDLE (

)

• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

i Information
OTLE035076

While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or front passenger's seat.

2-20

With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

Front air ventilation seat
(if equipped)
■ Type A

• Each time you push the switch, the
airflow changes as follows:
OTLE035016

OFF

→

HIGH (

→
OTLE035015

)

→

LOW (

)

→

■ Type B

MIDDLE (

)

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the air
ventilation seat:
• Use the air ventilation seat
ONLY when the climate control system is on. Using the
air ventilation seat for prolonged periods of time with
the climate control system off
could cause the air ventilation
seat to malfunction.
• Never use a solvent such as
paint thinner, benzene, alcohol or gasoline to clean the
seats.
(Continued)

• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the air ventilation seat operating, the operation
will turn OFF.
• The air ventilation seats defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
ignition switch is placed to the ON
position.

2-21

2
Safety system of your vehicle

The air ventilation seats are provided
to cool the front seats by blowing air
through small vent holes on the surface of the seat cushions and seatbacks.
When the operation of the air ventilation seat is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
While the engine is running, push the
switch to cool the driver's seat or the
front passenger's seat (if equipped).

Safety system of your vehicle

2-22

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

Each time you push the switch, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
OFF → HIGH (
→

(Continued)
• Avoid spilling liquids on the
surface of the front seats and
seatbacks; this may cause the
air vent holes to become
blocked and not work properly.
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspapers under the seats. They
may block the air intake causing the air vents to not work
properly.
• Do not change the seat covers. It may damage the air ventilation seat.
• If the air vents do not operate,
restart the vehicle. If there is
no change, we recommend
that you have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

) → LOW (

)

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position.

i Information
OTL035022

While the engine is running, push
either of the switches to warm the rear
seat.
During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.

With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in the
seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.

SEAT BELTS
This section describes how to use the
seat belts properly. It also describes
some of the things not to do when
using seat belts.

Always fasten your seat belt and
make sure all passengers have fastened their seat belts before starting
any trip. Air bags are designed to
supplement the seat belt as an additional safety device, but they are not a
substitute. Most states require all
occupants of a vehicle to wear seat
belts.

Seat belts must be used by ALL
passengers whenever the vehicle is moving. Take the following
precautions when adjusting and
wearing seat belts:
• ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.
• NEVER allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If
a child age 13 or older must be
seated in the front seat, move
the seat as far back as possible and properly restrain them
in the seat.
• NEVER allow an infant or child
to be carried on an occupant’s
lap.
• NEVER ride with the seatback
reclined when the vehicle is
moving.
• Do not allow children to share
a seat or seat belt.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back.
• Always wear both the shoulder portion and lap portion of
the lap/shoulder belt.
• Do not use the seat belt if it is
twisted. A twisted seat belt
will not protect you properly
in an accident.
• Do not use a seat belt if the
webbing or hardware is damaged.
• Do not latch the seat belt into
the buckles of other seats.
• NEVER unfasten the seat belt
while driving. This may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
• Make sure there is nothing in
the buckle interfering with the
seat belt latch mechanism.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
(Continued)

2-23

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt Safety Precautions

WARNING

Safety system of your vehicle

(Continued)
• No modifications or additions
should be made by the user
which will either prevent the
seat belt adjusting devices
from operating to remove
slack, or prevent the seat belt
assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.

WARNING
Damaged seat belts and seat
belt assemblies will not operate
properly. Always replace:
• Frayed, contaminated, or damaged webbing
• Damaged hardware
• The entire seat belt assembly
after it has been worn in an
accident, even if damage to
webbing or assembly is not
apparent

Seat Belt Warning Light
Seat belt warning light
(for driver's seat)

OLMB033022

The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will come on according to
the following table when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.

2-24

Conditions
Seat Belt

Vehicle
Speed

Unbuckled
Buckled

Light (Blink)

Chime

None

Below 3 mph
6 seconds
(5 km/h)

None

Unbuckled

↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)

Vehicle
Speed

Unbuckled
Unbuckled

Above 6mph
(10 km/h)

Buckled

6 seconds

Above 6 mph 6 sec. ON / 24 sec. OFF
(10 km/h)
(11 times)
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)

Conditions
Seat Belt

6 seconds
6 seconds

3 mph~
6 mph

Seat belt warning light
(for front passenger's seat)

Buckled →
Unbuckled

Warning
Pattern
Light-Blink
6 seconds
Continuously
6 seconds

Above 6mph
(10 km/h)

Continuously *1

Below 6mph
(10 km/h)

None

6 seconds *1
OTLE035082

↓
Stop *

*1 : The Warning Pattern repeats 11 times with
an interval of 24 seconds. If the driver’s seat
belt is buckled, the light will stop within 6
seconds and chime will stop immediately.
*2 : The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.

The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the following table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.

*1 : The seat belt warning light will go off if the
vehicle speed decreases below 3 mph (5
km/h). If the vehicle speed increases above
3 mph (5 km/h), the warning light will blink
again.

2-25

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Buckled →
Unbuckled

Warning Pattern

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt Restraint System
Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point system with emergency locking
retractor

If there is a sudden stop or impact,
the belt will lock into position. It will
also lock if you try to lean forward too
quickly.
NOTICE

If you are not able to smoothly pull
enough of the seat belt out from
the retractor, firmly pull the seat
belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the
belt out smoothly.

OLMB033025

WARNING
ODH033055

To fasten your seat belt:
Pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the metal tab (1) into the
buckle (2). There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. If you lean
forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt
will extend and move with you.
2-26

Improperly positioned seat belts
may increase the risk of serious
injury in an accident. Take the following precautions when adjusting the seat belt:
• Position the lap portion of the
seat belt as low as possible
across your hips, not on your
waist, so that it fits snugly.
(Continued)

Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the
four different positions for maximum
comfort and safety.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so it lies across your chest
and midway over your shoulder nearest the door, not over your neck.

Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3point system with convertible
locking retractor

■ Front seat

OTL035026

To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button (2).
Release the button to lock the anchor
into position. Try sliding the height
adjuster to make sure that it has
locked into position.

This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency locking
retractor seat belt and an automatic
locking retractor seat belt. Convertible
retractor type seat belts are installed in
the rear seat positions to help accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a convertible retractor is also installed in the
front passenger seat position, NEVER
place any infant/child restraint system
in the front seat of the vehicle.

2-27

2
Safety system of your vehicle

(Continued)
• Position one arm under the
shoulder belt and the other over
the belt, as shown in the illustration.
• Always position the shoulder
belt anchor into the locked
position at the appropriate
height.
• Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.

Safety system of your vehicle

To fasten the rear center seat
belt

2. Insert the small tongue plate (A)
into the primary buckle (B) located
on the right hand (passenger) side
of the center seat. Insert the buckle until an audible "click" is heard,
indicating that the latch is locked.
Make sure the belt is not twisted.

OTLE035112

OTLE035110

OTL035113

OTLE035111

1. Extract the small tongue plate
from the slot on the belt assembly
pocket located in the headliner.

2-28

3. Slip the large tongue plate (C) out
of the pocket (D) located on the
belt assembly.

To release the rear center seatbelt

4. Pull the large tongue plate and
insert it into the seat belt buckle
(E) located on the left hand (driver) side of the center seat. Insert
the buckle until an audible "click"
is heard, indicating that the latch is
locked. Make sure the belt is not
twisted.

i Information
If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firmly pull
the belt out and release it. After
release, you will be able to pull the belt
out smoothly.

OTLE035084

To release your seat belt:
Press the release button (1) in the
locking buckle.
When it is released, the belt should
automatically draw back into the
retractor. If this does not happen,
check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.

OTL035114

1. Press the release button on the
rear center seat belt buckle (E)
located on the left hand (driver)
side of the center seat and
remove the large tongue plate (C).

2-29

Safety system of your vehicle

When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the "CENTER" mark
must be used.

Safety system of your vehicle

Pull up on the seat belt webbing
and allow the webbing to retract
automatically.
3. Slip the large tongue plate (C) into
the pocket (D) located on the belt
assembly.

OTL035115
OTLE035078

4. Insert the small tongue plate (A)
into the slot on the belt assembly
pocket located in the headliner.

OTLE035116

2. To release and retract the rear
center seatbelt assembly, insert a
small tool or key into the primary
buckle release hole (F) located on
the right hand (passenger) side of
the center seat. You can also
insert the large buckle (C) into the
release hole to release the seat
belt assembly.
2-30

Pre-tensioner seat belt

OTL035053

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's Pre-tensioner
Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner
and Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)). The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure the seat belts
fit tightly against the occupant's body
in certain frontal collisions. The Seat
Belt Anchor Pre-tensioner may be
activated in certain crashes where
the frontal collision is severe enough,
together with the air bags.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The purpose of the retractor pretensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions.
(2) Emergency Fastening Device (EFD)
(for the driver’s seat)
The purpose of the EFD is to
make sure that the pelvis belts fit
in tightly against the occupant's
lower body in certain frontal collisions.
If the system senses excessive tension
on the driver or passenger's seat belt
when the pre-tensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pre-tensioner will release some of
the pressure on the affected seat belt.

WARNING
• Always wear your seat belt and
sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

•

•
•

•

loose or twisted. A loose or
twisted seat belt will not protect you properly in an accident.
Do not place anything near the
buckle. This may adversely
affect the buckle and cause it
to function improperly.
Always replace your pre-tensioners after activation or an
accident.
NEVER inspect, service, repair
or replace the pre-tensioners
yourself. This must be done by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Do not hit the seat belt assemblies.

2-31

2
Safety system of your vehicle

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor will
lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter
contact against the occupant's body.

Safety system of your vehicle

NOTICE

WARNING
Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several
minutes after they have been
activated. When the pre-tensioner seat belt mechanism
deploys during a collision, the
pre-tensioners become hot and
can burn you.
OLMB033040/Q

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System
consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in
the illustration above:
(1) SRS air bag warning light
(2) Retractor pre-tensioner
(3) SRS control module
(4) Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)

2-32

The sensor that activates the SRS
air bag is connected with the
pre–tensioner seat belts. The SRS
air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for
approximately 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is in the ON position, and then it should turn off.
If the pre-tensioner is not working
properly, the warning light will illuminate even if the SRS air bag is
not malfunctioning. If the warning
light does not illuminate, stays
illuminated or illuminates when
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
inspect the pre-tensioner seat
belts and SRS air bags as soon as
possible.

NOTICE

The seat belt should always be used
during pregnancy. The best way to
protect your unborn child is to protect
yourself by always wearing the seat
belt.
Pregnant women should always wear
a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the
shoulder belt across your chest, routed between your breasts and away
from your neck. Place the shoulder
belt across the chest, routed away
from the neck. Place the lap belt below
the belt line so that it fits snugly and as
low as possible across the hips, not
across the abdomen.

Seat belt use and children
Infant and small children
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices,
including booster seats. The age at
which seat belts can be used instead
of child restraints differs among
states, so you should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state,
and where you are travelling. Infant
and child restraints must be properly
placed and installed in a rear seat.
For more information refer to the
“Child Restraint Systems” section in
this chapter.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to an unborn
child during an accident, pregnant women should NEVER
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or over the area of
the abdomen where the unborn
child is located.
2-33

2
Safety system of your vehicle

• Both the driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat
belts may be activated in certain
frontal or side collisions or
rollovers.
• The pre-tensioners will not be
activated if the seat belts are not
worn at the time of the collision.
• When the pre-tensioner seat
belts are activated, a loud noise
may be heard and fine dust,
which may appear to be smoke,
may be visible in the passenger
compartment. These are normal
operating conditions and are not
hazardous.
• Although it is non-toxic, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation
and should not be breathed for
prolonged periods. Wash all
exposed skin areas thoroughly
after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were
activated.

Additional Seat Belt Safety
Precautions
Seat belt use during pregnancy

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING
ALWAYS properly restrain infants
and small children in a child
restraint appropriate for the
child’s height and weight.
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death to a child and
other passengers, NEVER hold a
child in your lap or arms when
the vehicle is moving.The violent
forces created during an accident will tear the child from your
arms and throw the child against
the interior of the vehicle.

2-34

Small children are best protected
from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a
child restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before
buying any child restraint system,
make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213. The
restraint must be appropriate for your
child’s height and weight. Check the
label on the child restraint for this
information. Refer to the “Child
Restraint Systems” section in this
chapter.

Larger children
Children under age 13 and who are
too large for a booster seat must
always occupy the rear seat and use
the available lap/shoulder belts. A
seat belt should lie across the upper
thighs and be snug across the shoulder and chest to restrain the child
safely. Check belt fit periodically.
Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when
they are restrained by a proper
restraint system and/or seat belts in
the rear seat. Always have the
LATCH system inspected by your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can damage
the LATCH system and may not
properly secure the child restraint.
If a larger child over age 13 must be
seated in the front seat, the child
must be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the
seat should be placed in the rearmost position.

WARNING
• Always make sure children
are wearing their seat belts
and that they are properly
adjusted before driving.
• NEVER allow the shoulder
belt to contact the child’s
neck or face.
• Do not allow more than one
child to use a single seat belt.

Transporting an injured person

Do not lie down

A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
Consult a physician for specific recommendations.

Sitting in a reclined position when the
vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.
Even when buckled up, the protections of your restraint system (seat
belts and air bags) is greatly reduced
by reclining your seatback.
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
the maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front and
rear seats should be in an upright
position when the car is moving.
A seat belt cannot provide proper
protection if the person is lying down
in the rear seat or if the front or rear
seats are in a reclined position.

One person per belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt.
This could increase the severity of
injuries in case of an accident.

2-35

2
Safety system of your vehicle

If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center
of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need
to be returned to an appropriate
booster seat in the rear seat.

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING
• NEVER ride with a reclined
seatback when the vehicle is
moving.
• Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or fatal injuries in the event
of a collision or sudden stop.
• Drivers and passengers should
always sit well back in their
seats, properly belted, and with
the seatbacks upright.

Care of Seat Belts

When to replace seat belts

Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.

The entire seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no
damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation
should be directed to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.

2-36

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS)
Children Always in the Rear

WARNING

Child restraint systems must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commercially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are generally
designed to be secured in a vehicle
seat by lap belt portion of a
lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH system in the rear seats of the vehicle.

2-37

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Always properly restrain children in the rear seats of the
vehicle.
Children of all ages are safer
when restrained in the rear seat.
A child riding in the front passenger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag
resulting in SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH.

Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must
always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident,
sudden stop or sudden maneuver.
According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seats than in
the front seat. Even with air bags,
children can be seriously injured
or killed. Children too large for a
child restraint must use the seat belts
provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws
which require children to travel in
approved child restraint devices. The
laws governing the age or
height/weight restrictions at which
seat belts can be used instead of
child restraints differs among states,
so you should be aware of the specific requirements in your state, and
where you are travelling.

Safety system of your vehicle

Child restraint system (CRS)
Infants and younger children must be
restrained in an appropriate rear-facing or forward-facing CRS that has
first been properly secured to the
rear seat of the vehicle. Read and
comply with the instructions for
installation and use provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint.

WARNING
An improperly secured child
restraint can increase the risk
of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH
in an accident. Always take the
following precautions when
using a child restraint system:
• NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
• Always properly secure the
child restraint to a rear seat of
the vehicle.
(Continued)

2-38

(Continued)
• Always follow the child
restraint system manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
• Always properly restrain your
child in the child restraint.
• If the vehicle head restraint
prevents proper installation of
a child seat (as described in
the child restraint system
manual), the head restraint of
the respective seating position shall be readjusted or
entirely removed.
• Do not use an infant carrier or
a child safety seat that
"hooks" over a seatback, it
may not provide adequate
protection in an accident.
• After an accident, have a
HYUNDAI dealer check the
child restraint system, seat
belts, tether anchors and
lower anchors.

Selecting a Child Restraint
System (CRS)
When selecting a CRS for your child,
always:
• Make sure the CRS has a label
certifying that it meets applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS 213).
• Select a child restraint based on
your child’s height and weight. The
required label or the instructions
for use typically provide this information.
• Select a child restraint that fits the
vehicle seating position where it
will be used.
• Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation
and use provided with the child
restraint system.

Child restraint system types

Rear-facing child seats

WARNING
NEVER install a child or infant
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH if the child restraint is
struck by an inflating air bag.

OLMB033041

A rear-facing child seat provides
restraint with the seating surface
against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place,
and in an accident, acts to keep the
child positioned in the seat and
reduce the stress to the neck and
spinal cord.
All children under age one must
always ride in a rear-facing infant child
restraint.
Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typically have higher height and weight
limits for the rear-facing position,
allowing you to keep your child rearfacing for a longer period of time.

2-39

2
Safety system of your vehicle

Continue to use a rear-facing child
seat for as long as your child will fit
within the height and weight limits
allowed by the child seat manufacturer. It’s the best way to keep them
safe. Once your child has outgrown
the rear-facing child restraint, your
child is ready for a forward-facing
child restraint with a harness.

There are three main types of child
restraint systems: rear-facing seats,
forward-facing seats, and booster
seats. They are classified according
to the child’s age, height and weight.

Safety system of your vehicle

OTLE035033

Forward-facing child restraints
A forward-facing child seat provides
restraint for the child’s body with a
harness. Keep children in a forwardfacing child seat with a harness until
they reach the top height or weight
limit allowed by your child restraint’s
manufacturer.
Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing child restraint, your child is
ready for a booster seat.

2-40

Booster seats
A booster seat is a restraint designed
to improve the fit of the vehicle’s seat
belt system. A booster seat positions
the seat belt so that it fits properly
over the lap of your child.
Keep your child in a booster seat until
they are big enough to sit in the seat
without a booster and still have the
seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to
fit properly, the lap belt must lie snugly across the upper thighs, not the
stomach. The shoulder belt should lie
snug across the shoulder and chest
and not across the neck or face.
Children under age 13 must always
ride in the rear seats and must always
be properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint
System (CRS)

WARNING
Before installing your child
restraint system always:
• Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
• Read and follow the instructions regarding child restraint
systems in this manual.
Failure to follow all warnings
and instructions could increase
the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING
If the vehicle head restraint prevents proper installation of a
child seat (as described in the
child seat system manual, the
head restraint of the respective
seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed.

CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed
vehicle can become very hot. To
prevent burns, check the seating surface and buckles before
placing your child in the child
restraint.

Lower Anchors and Tether for
Children (LATCH) System
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to
make installation of the child restraint
easier and reduce the possibility of
improperly installing your child
restraint. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child restraint. The
LATCH system eliminates the need
to use seat belts to secure the child
restraint to the rear seats.
Lower anchors are metal bars built
into the vehicle. There are two lower
anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a
child restraint with lower attachments.
To use the LATCH system in your
vehicle, you must have a child
restraint with LATCH attachments.
The child seat manufacturer will provide you with instructions on how to
use the child seat with its attachments
for the LATCH lower anchors.

2-41

2
Safety system of your vehicle

After selecting a proper child seat for
your child, check to make sure it fits
properly in your vehicle. Follow the
instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child
seat. Note these general steps when
installing the seat to your vehicle:
• Properly secure the child restraint
to the vehicle. All child restraints
must be secured to the vehicle with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or
with the LATCH system.
• Make sure the child restraint is
firmly secured. After installing a
child restraint to the vehicle, push
and pull the seat forward and from
side-to-side to verify that it is
securely attached to the seat. A
child restraint secured with a seat
belt should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, some side-toside movement can be expected.
• Secure the child in the child
restraint. Make sure the child is
properly strapped in the child
restraint according to the manufacturer instructions.

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING

OLM039035

LATCH anchors have been provided
in the left and right outboard rear
seating positions. Their locations are
shown in the illustration. There are no
LATCH anchors provided for the center rear seating position.

2-42

Do not attempt to install a child
restraint system using LATCH
anchors in the rear center seating position.There are no LATCH
anchors provided for this seat.
Using the outboard seat anchors
can damage the anchors which
may break or fail in a collision
resulting in serious injury or
death.

Lower Anchor
Position Indicator

Lower Anchor
OTL035036

The lower anchor position indicator
symbols are located on the left and
right rear seat backs to identify the
position of the lower anchors in your
vehicle (see arrows in illustration).
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
To use the lower anchor, push the
upper portion of the lower anchor
cover.

Securing a child restraint with
the LATCH anchors system

Take the following precautions
when using the LATCH system:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• To prevent the child from
reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts, buckle
all unused rear seat belts and
retract the seat belt webbing
behind the child. Children can
be strangled if a shoulder belt
becomes wrapped around
their neck and the seat belt
tightens.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single
anchor. This could cause the
anchor or attachment to come
loose or break.
• Always have the LATCH system inspected by your authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an
accident. An accident can
damage the LATCH system
and may not properly secure
the child restraint.

NOTICE

The recommended maximum
weight for the LATCH system is 65
lbs. (30 kg). When selecting a
proper child restraint, consider
that the maximum total weight of
the child plus the child restraint
should be less than 65 lbs (30 kg).
As a guide, the MAX child restraint
weight should be determined by
the following calculation:
Child Restraint Weight =
65 - (child's total weight in lbs.)

2-43

2
Safety system of your vehicle

To install a LATCH-compatible child
restraint in either of the rear outboard
seating positions:
1. Move the seat belt buckle away
from the lower anchors.
2. Move any other objects away from
the anchors that could prevent a
secure connection between the
child restraint and the lower
anchors.
3. Place the child restraint on the
vehicle seat, then attach the seat
to the lower anchors according to
the instructions provided by the
child restraint manufacturer.
4. Follow the child restraint instructions for properly adjusting and
tightening the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower
anchors.

WARNING

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat
with "Tether Anchor" system

OTL035034

First secure the child restraint with
the LATCH lower anchors or the seat
belt. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether
strap be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether strap to the top tether
strap anchor.
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the back of the rear seats.

2-44

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when installing the tether strap:
• Read and follow all installation
instructions provided with
your child restraint system.
• NEVER attach more than one
child restraint to a single tether anchor. This could cause
the anchor or attachment to
come loose or break.
• Do not attach the tether strap
to anything other than the correct tether anchor. It may not
work properly if attached to
something else.
• Do not use the tether anchors
for adult seat belts or harnesses, or for attaching other items
or equipment to the vehicle.

OTLE035035

To install the tether anchor:
1. Route the child restraint tether strap
over the child restraint seatback.
Route the tether strap under the
head restraint and between the
head restraint posts, or route the
tether strap over the top of the vehicle seatback. Make sure the strap is
not twisted.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the tether strap according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions to firmly
secure the child restraint to the seat.
3. Check that the child restraint is
securely attached to the seat by
pushing and pulling the seat forward
and from side-to-side.

Securing a child restraint with
a lap belt or lap/shoulder belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child restraints must be secured to
a vehicle rear seat with the lap part
of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING
ALWAYS place a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
Placing a rear-facing child
restraint in the front seat can
result in serious injury or death
if the child restraint is struck by
an inflating air bag.

OLMB033044

Automatic locking mode
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emergency conditions (emergency locking
mode), you must manually pull the
seat belt all the way out to shift the
retractor to the “Automatic Locking”
mode to secure a child restraint.
The “Automatic Locking” mode will
help prevent the normal movement
of the child in the vehicle from causing the seat belt to loosen and compromise the child restraint system. To
secure a child restraint system, use
the following procedure.

NOTICE

When using the rear center seat
belt, you should also refer to the
"3-point Rear Center Seat Belt"
section in this chapter.

2-45

2
Safety system of your vehicle

To install a child restraint system on
the rear seats, do the following:
1. Place the child restraint system on
a rear seat and route the lap/
shoulder belt around or through
the child restraint, following the
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Be sure the seat belt webbing is
not twisted.

Safety system of your vehicle

OLMB033045

OLMB033097

OLMB033098

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the distinct "click" sound.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the "Automatic
Locking" (child restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting" sound. This indicates that
the retractor is in the "Automatic
Locking" mode. If no distinct
sound is heard, repeat steps 3
and 4.

i Information
Position the release button so that it is
easy to access in case of an emergency.

2-46

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or
recommends you to use a tether
anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,
refer to the previous pages for more
information.

NOTICE

When the seat belt is allowed to
retract to its fully stowed position,
the retractor will automatically
switch from the "Automatic
Locking" mode to the emergency
lock mode for normal adult usage.

To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.

2
Safety system of your vehicle

5. Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6. Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat
belt is holding it firmly in place. If it
is not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7. Double check that the retractor is
in the "Automatic Locking" mode
by attempting to pull more of the
seat belt out of the retractor. If you
cannot, the retractor is in the
"Automatic Locking" mode.

WARNING
If the retractor is not in the
"Automatic Locking" mode, the
child restraint can move when
your vehicle turns or stops suddenly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child
restraint is not properly anchored
in the car, including manually
pulling the seat belt all the way
out to shift the rectractor to the
"Automatic Locking" mode.

2-47

Safety system of your vehicle

AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

1. Driver’s front air bag
2. Passenger’s front air bag
3. Side air bag
4. Curtain air bag

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OTLE035037

2-48

WARNING
AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,
everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in
a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt
when the air bag inflates.
NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front
passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant
or child causing serious or fatal injuries.
ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the
safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older
must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.
All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked
and the engine is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during
an accident, the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the
occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily
close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.
Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at
least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and
the chest.

2-49

2
Safety system of your vehicle

This vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Air Bag
System for the driver’s seat and front
passenger’s seats.
The front air bags are designed to
supplement the three-point seat
belts. For these air bags to provide
protection, the seat belts must be
worn at all times when driving.
You can be severely injured or killed
in an accident if you are not wearing
a seat belt. Air bags are designed to
supplement seat belts, but do not
replace them. Also, air bags are not
designed to deploy in every collision.
In some accidents, the seat belts are
the only restraint protecting you.

Safety system of your vehicle

Where Are the Air Bags?
Driver's and passenger's front
air bags
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts
at both the driver and passenger
seating positions.
The SRS consists of air bags which
are located in the center of the steering wheel, in the driver’s side lower
crash pad below the steering wheel
column and the passenger’s side
front panel pad above the glove box.
The air bags are labeled with the letters “AIR BAG” embossed on the pad
covers.

■ Driver’s front air bag

OTL035038
■ Passenger’s front air bag

OTL035039

The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle’s driver and front passengers with additional protection than
that offered by the seat belt system
alone. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driver’s and
front passenger’s seat belt usage and
impact severity.
2-50

The seat belt buckle sensors determine if the driver and front passenger’s seat belts are fastened. These
sensors provide the ability to control
the SRS deployment based on
whether or not the seat belts are fastened, and how severe the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation within
two levels. A first stage level is provided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, and
seat belt usage, the SRS Control
Module (SRSCM) controls the air
bag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or
severity of injury in an accident.

WARNING

The side air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The side air bags are not designed to
deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.
OTL035040

OTL035041

Your vehicle is equipped with a side air
bag in each front seat. The purpose of
the air bag is to provide the vehicle’s
driver and the front passenger with
additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone.
2-51

2
Safety system of your vehicle

To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
front air bags, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Move your seat as far back as
possible from front air bags,
while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
• Never lean against the door or
center console.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs on
the dashboard.
• No objects should be placed
over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, and the front
passenger’s panel above the
glove box. Such objects could
cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause
the air bags to deploy.

Side air bags

Safety system of your vehicle

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
side air bag, take the following
precautions:
• Seat belts must be worn at all
times to help keep occupants
positioned properly.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies onto
doors, put their arms on the
doors, stretch their arms out of
the window, or place objects
between the doors and seats.
• Hold the steering wheel at the 9
o’clock and 3 o’clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injuries
to your hands and arms.
• Do not use any accessory
seat covers. This could reduce
or prevent the effectiveness
of the system.
• Do not place any objects over
the air bag or between the air
bag and yourself.
(Continued)

2-52

(Continued)
• Do not place any objects
between the door and the
seat. They may become dangerous projectiles if the side
air bag inflates.
• Do not install any accessories
on the side or near the side air
bags.
• Do not cause impact to the
doors when the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
this may cause the side air
bags to inflate.
• If the seat or seat cover is
damaged, have the vehicle
checked and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Curtain air bags

OTL035042

OTL035043

Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
curtain air bags, take the following precautions:
• All seat occupants must wear
seat belts at all times to help
keep occupants positioned
properly.
• Properly secure child restraints
as far away from the door as
possible.
• Do not allow passengers to
lean their heads or bodies
onto doors, put their arms on
the doors, stretch their arms
out of the window, or place
objects between the doors
and seats.
• Do not open or repair the side
curtain air bags.

How Does the Air Bag System
Operate?

ODH033104L/Q

The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver’s front air bag module
2. Passenger’s front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/
Rollover sensor
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
2-53

Safety system of your vehicle

They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occupants
in certain side impact collisions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy during certain side impact
collisions, depending on the crash
severity, angle, speed and impact.
The side and curtain air bags on
both sides of the vehicle may deploy
if a rollover or possible rollover is
detected.
The curtain air bags are not designed
to deploy in all side impact or rollover
situations.

Safety system of your vehicle

10. Side pressure sensors
11. Driver's and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
12. Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD)
13. Occupant classification system
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the Engine
Start/Stop button is in the ON position to determine if a crash impact is
severe enough to require air bag
deployment or pre-tensioner seat
belt deployment.

2-54

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint
System) air bag warning light on the
instrument panel displays the air bag
symbol depicted in the illustration.
The system checks the air bag electrical system for malfunctions. The
light indicates that there is a potential
malfunction with your air bag system,
which could include your side and
curtain air bags used for rollover protection.

WARNING
If your SRS malfunctions, the air
bag may not inflate properly during an accident increasing the
risk of serious injury or death.
If any of the following conditions occur, your SRS is malfunctioning:
• The light does not turn on for
approximately six seconds
when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
• The light remains illuminated
after approximately six seconds.
• The light comes on while the
vehicle is in motion.
• The light blinks when the
engine is running.
Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer inspect the SRS as soon
as possible if any of these conditions occur.

• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of factors including vehicle
speed, angles of impact and the
density and stiffness of the vehicles
or objects which your vehicle
impacts during a collision. The
determining factors are not limited
to those mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant. It is
virtually impossible for you to see
the air bags inflate during an accident. It is much more likely that you
will simply see the deflated air bags
hanging out of their storage compartments after the collision.
• In addition to inflating in certain
side collisions, vehicles equipped
with a rollover sensor, side and
curtain air bags will inflate if the
sensing system detects a rollover.
When a rollover is detected, side
and curtain air bags will remain
inflated longer to help provide protection from ejection, especially
when used in conjunction with the
seat belts.

• To help provide protection, the air
bags must inflate rapidly. The speed
of air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which to
inflate the air bag between the
occupant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or lifethreatening injuries and is thus a
necessary part of air bag design.
However, the rapid air bag inflation
can also cause injuries which can
include facial abrasions, bruises
and broken bones because the
inflation speed also causes the air
bags to expand with a great deal of
force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the air
bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is positioned
excessively close to the air bag.

2-55

2
Safety system of your vehicle

During a frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s deceleration. If
the deceleration rate (measured in gforce) is high enough the control unit
will inflate the front air bags.
The front air bags help protect the
driver and front passenger by
responding to frontal impacts in
which seat belts alone cannot provide adequate restraint. When needed, the side air bags help provide
protection in the event of a side
impact or rollover.
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
• Air bags inflate in the event of certain frontal or side collisions to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate. Generally,
air bags are designed to inflate
based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two
factors determine whether the sensors produce an electronic deployment/inflation signal.

Safety system of your vehicle

You can take steps to reduce the risk
of being injured by an inflating air
bag. The greatest risk is sitting too
close to the air bag. An air bag needs
about 10 inches (25 cm) of space to
inflate. NHTSA recommends that
drivers allow at least 10 inches
(25 cm) between the center of the
steering wheel and the chest.

2-56

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death from an inflating
air bag, take the following precautions:
• NEVER place a child restraint
in the front passenger seat.
Always properly restrain children under age 13 in the rear
seats of the vehicle.
• Adjust the front passenger's
and driver's seats as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle.
• Hold the steering wheel with
hands at the 9 o'clock and 3
o'clock positions.
• Never place anything or anyone between the air bag and
the seat occupant.
• Do not allow the front passenger to place their feet or legs
on the dashboard.

■ Driver’s front air bag (1)

OTLA035107

When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of
the vehicle, it will automatically
deploy the front air bags.

■ Driver’s front air bag (2)

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

WARNING

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver or the front passenger forward motion, reducing the risk
of head and chest injury.

■ Passenger’s front air bag

OLMB033057

After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating, enabling
the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate
other controls.

2-57

2
Safety system of your vehicle

OTLA035109
OTLA035108

To prevent objects from becoming dangerous projectiles when
the passenger's air bag inflates:
• Do not install or place any
objects (drink holder, CD
holder, stickers, etc.) on the
front passenger’s panel above
the glove box where the passenger’s air bag is located.
• Do not install a container of
liquid air freshener near the
instrument cluster or on the
instrument panel surface.

Safety system of your vehicle

What to Expect After an Air
Bag Inflates
After a frontal or side air bag inflates,
it will deflate very quickly. Air bag
inflation will not prevent the driver
from seeing out of the windshield or
being able to steer. Curtain air bags
may remain partially inflated for
some time after they deploy.

WARNING
After an air bag inflates, take
the following precautions:
• Open your windows and doors
as soon as possible after
impact to reduce prolonged
exposure to the smoke and
powder released by the inflating air bag.
• Do not touch the air bag storage area's internal components immediately after an air
bag has inflated. The parts
that come into contact with an
inflating air bag may be very
hot.
(Continued)
2-58

(Continued)
• Always wash exposed skin
areas thoroughly with lukewarm water and mild soap.
• Always have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer replace the air
bag immediately after deployment. Air bags are designed to
be used only once.

Noise and smoke from inflating
air bag
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and may produce
smoke and powder in the air inside of
the vehicle. This is normal and is a
result of the ignition of the air bag
inflator. After the air bag inflates, you
may feel substantial discomfort in
breathing because of the contact of
your chest with both the seat belt and
the air bag, as well as from breathing
the smoke and powder. The powder
may aggravate asthma for some
people. If you experience breathing
problems after an air bag deployment, seek medical attention immediately.
Though the smoke and powder are
nontoxic, they may cause irritation to
the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and seek
medical attention if the symptoms
persist.

Occupant Classification
System (OCS)
■ Type A

OTLA035086

Your vehicle is equipped with an
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) in the front passenger’s seat.

• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat cushion.
• Electronic system to determine
whether the passenger air bag
systems should be activated or
deactivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicating the front passenger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag indicator light is interconnected with
the OCS.
The OCS is designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated front
passenger and determine if the passenger's front air bag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
The purpose is to help reduce the
risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger
seat occupants, such as children, by
requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the
type specified in the regulations is on
the seat, the occupant classification
sensor can detect it and cause the
air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and
wearing the seat belt properly,
should not cause the passenger air
bag to be automatically turned OFF.
For small adults it may be turned
OFF, however, if the occupant does
not sit in the seat properly (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting
on the edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could
cause the sensor to turn the air bag
OFF.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF" indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1-4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.

2-59

2
Safety system of your vehicle

OTLA035102
■ Type B

Main components of the
Occupant Classification System

Safety system of your vehicle

Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated properly
and wearing the seat belt properly for
the most effective protection by the
air bag and the seat belt.
The OCS may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can affect the classification system.
These include:
• Failing to sit in an upright position.
• Leaning against the door or center
console.
• Sitting towards the sides of the
front of the seat.
• Putting their legs on the dashboard
or resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
• Wearing the seat belt improperly.
• Reclining the seatback.
• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
• Putting an additional thick cushion
on the seat.
• Putting electrical devices (e.g.
notebook, satellite radio) on the
seat with inverter charging.
2-60

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System
Indicator/Warning light
Condition detected by the
occupant classification system

Devices

“PASSENGER
Front passenger
SRS
AIR BAG OFF”
warning light
air bag
indicator light

1. Adult *1

Off

Activated

2. Infant * or child restraint
system with 12 months old *3 *4

Off

Deactivated

3. Unoccupied

Off

Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system

Off

Activated

*1 The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2 Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize
him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.
*3 Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*4 The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months
to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is
a normal condition.

WARNING
Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger’s seat when it is unoccupied by a
passenger adversely affects the OCS. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

• NEVER ride with the seat-

the front seat or seatback
pocket, or hang any items
on the front passenger
seat.

back reclined when the
vehicle is moving.

OLMB033103

OVQ036013NB

• NEVER place your feet or

• NEVER place your feet on

legs on the dashboard.

the front passenger seatback.

OLMB033100

OLMB033101

OLMB033102

• NEVER sit with your hips

• NEVER lean on the door or

shifted towards the front
of the seat.

center console or sit on
one side of the front passenger seat.

OLMB033104

(continued)
2-61

2
Safety system of your vehicle

• NEVER put a heavy load in

Safety system of your vehicle

(continued)
• Do not put an electronic
device (ex. Laptop computer,
after market DMB, navigation,
satellite audio, video game
machine, MP3, AC inverter,
etc.) in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat.
• Do not place a sitting mat on
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place any items under
the front passenger seat.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occupant classification system. If
they puncture the seat cushion.
• Avoid spilling liquids on the
front seat; this may cause the
OCS not to work properly.
Keep the front seat dry at all
times.

2-62

WARNING

B990A01O

Proper seated position for OCS
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is on when an adult is seated in the front passenger seat, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag. If
the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is still on, ask the passenger to move to the rear seat.

Never allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front passenger
seat when the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated. During a collision, the
air bag will not inflate if the indicator is illuminated. Have your
passenger reposition themselves in the seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions himself
properly and the vehicle is
restarted, have the passenger
move to the rear seat because
the air bag will not inflate.

NOTICE

WARNING
• NEVER place a rear-facing or

1JBH3051

front-facing child restraint in
the front passenger’s seat of
the vehicle.
• An inflating frontal air bag
could forcefully strike a child
resulting in serious injury or
death.
• Always properly restrain children in an appropriate child
restraint in the rear seat of the
vehicle.

Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the OCS, never install a child
restraint in the front passenger’s seat.
An inflating air bag can forcefully
strike a child or child restraint resulting in serious or fatal injury.

2-63

2
Safety system of your vehicle

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the ignition
switch is in the ON position or
after the engine is started. If the
front passenger seat is occupied,
the OCS will then classify the front
passenger after several more seconds.

Do Not Install a Child Restraint
in the Front Passenger’s Seat

Safety system of your vehicle

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off
in a Collision?
Air bags are not designed to inflate in
every collision. There are certain
types of accidents in which the air bag
would not be expected to provide
additional protection. These include
rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact accidents, as
well as low speed impacts. Damage
to the vehicle indicates a collision
energy absorption, and is not an indicator of whether or not an air bag
should have inflated.

2-64

Air bag collision sensors

WARNING
To reduce the risk of an air bag
deploying unexpectedly and
causing serious injury or death:
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where air
bags or sensors are installed.
• Do not perform maintenance
on or around the air bag sensors. If the location or angle of
the sensors is altered, the air
bags may deploy when they
should not or may not deploy
when they should.
• Do not install bumper guards
or replace the bumper with a
non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.
This may adversely affect the
collision and air bag deployment performance.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF or ACC position when the vehicle is being
towed to prevent inadvertent
air bag deployment.
• Have all air bag repairs conducted by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

2
Safety system of your vehicle

1. SRS control module
2. Front impact sensor
3. Side pressure sensor (front)
4. Side impact sensor (rear)

OTL035044/OTL035045/OTL035046/OTL035047/OTL035048

2-65

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

OTL035071

OTL035070

Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the severity, speed, or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OTL035074

Side and curtain air bags
Side and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate when an impact is
detected by side collision sensors
depending on the severity, speed, or
angles of impact resulting from a
side impact collision.

2-66

Although the driver’s and front passenger’s air bags are designed to
inflate only in frontal collisions, they
also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors
detect a sufficient impact. Side and
curtain air bags are designed to
inflate only in side impact collisions
or rollover situations, but they may
inflate in other collisions if the side
impact sensors detect a sufficient
impact.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads, the air bags may deploy. Drive
carefully on unimproved roads or on
surfaces not designed for vehicle
traffic to prevent unintended air bag
deployment.

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air
bags may not deploy. The air bags
are designed not to deploy in such
cases because they may not provide
benefits beyond the protection of the
seat belts.

OTL035067

Front air bags are not designed to
inflate in rear collisions, because
occupants are moved backward by
the force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not provide
any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side
impact collisions, because occupants
move in the direction of the collision,
and thus in side impacts, front air bag
deployment would not provide additional occupant protection.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate depending on the severity, vehicle speed and angles of
impact.

2-67

Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035066

OTL035065

Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035069

OTL035064

OTL035068

In an angled collision, the force of
impact may direct the occupants in a
direction where the air bags would
not be able to provide any additional
benefit, and thus the sensors may
not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehicle
causing it to "ride" under a vehicle
with a higher ground clearance. Air
bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration
forces that are detected by sensors
may be significantly reduced by such
"underride" collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in
rollover accidents because air bag
deployment could not provide protection to the occupants.
However, side and curtain air bags
may inflate when the vehicle is rolled
over by a side impact collision.

2-68

SRS Care

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle
collides with objects such as utility
poles or trees, where the point of
impact is concentrated and the collision energy is absorbed by the vehicle structure.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, take the following precautions:
• Do not attempt to modify or
disconnect the SRS components or wiring, including the
addition of any kind of badges
to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure.
• Do not place objects over or
near the air bag modules on
the steering wheel, instrument
panel, or the front passenger’s panel above the glove
box.
• Clean the air bag pad covers
with a soft cloth moistened
with plain water. Solvents or
cleaners could adversely
affect the air bag covers and
proper deployment of the system.
• Always have inflated air bags
replaced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)
2-69

2
Safety system of your vehicle

OTL035063

The SRS is virtually maintenancefree and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illuminate when the ignition switch or the
engine Start/Stop button is in the ON
position or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel, the
front passenger’s panel, front seats
and roof rails must be performed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Improper handling of the SRS system
may result in serious personal injury.

Safety system of your vehicle

(Continued)
• If components of the air bag
system must be discarded, or if
the vehicle must be scrapped,
certain safety precautions
must be observed. Consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
the necessary information.
Failure to follow these precautions could increase the risk of
personal injury.

2-70

Additional Safety Precautions
Passengers should not move out of
or change seats while the vehicle is
moving. A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash or
emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or be ejected
from the vehicle.
Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
seat belt can reduce the protection
provided by the seat belt and increase
the chance of serious injury in a crash
Do not modify the front seats.
Modification of the front seats could
interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing
components or side air bags.
Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
Do not cause impact to the doors.
Impact to the doors when the ignition
switch or the engine Start/Stop button
is in the ON position may cause the air
bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate
disabilities. If you require modification to your vehicle to accommodate
a disability, contact the HYUNDAI
Customer Connect Center at 1-877378-8727.

Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag equipped vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle’s frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle’s air bag system.

Air Bag Warning Labels

2
Safety system of your vehicle
OTLA035103/OTL035049/OTLE035059

Air bag warning labels, required by the U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), are attached to
alert the driver and passengers of potential risks of the air bag system. Be sure to read all of the information about the
air bags that are installed on your vehicle in this Owners Manual.

2-71

Convenient features of your vehicle
Accessing your vehicle .........................................3-4

Panoramic sunroof ..............................................3-42

Sunshade...........................................................................3-42
Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-43
Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-43
Closing the Sunroof........................................................3-44
To Reset the Sunroof.....................................................3-45

Windows ................................................................3-38
Power Windows ...............................................................3-39

LCD Display ...........................................................3-70

Wipers and washers ..........................................3-118

Driver Assist System .........................................3-121
Rear View Camera ........................................................3-121
Rear Parking Assist System .......................................3-122
Rear parking assist system precautions .................3-125

Defroster.............................................................3-126

Trip computer .......................................................3-89

Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-126

Manual climate control system........................3-127

Warning and indicator lights..............................3-94

Automatic climate control system...................3-137

Warning Lights.................................................................3-94
Indicator Lights..............................................................3-102

Climate control additional features.................3-152
Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-152
Sunroof Inside Air Recirculation ...............................3-152

Interior features.................................................3-155

Exterior features ...............................................3-165
Roof rack ........................................................................3-165

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cup Holder ......................................................................3-155
Sunvisor...........................................................................3-156
Power Outlet ..................................................................3-156
Clock.................................................................................3-157
Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-159
Plastic bag hook............................................................3-160
Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-160
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................3-161
Cargo security screen..................................................3-161
Luggage tray ..................................................................3-164

Convenient features of your vehicle

ACCESSING YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Key (if equipped)

OTL045001

Your HYUNDAI uses a remote key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
the driver and passenger doors or
the rear liftgate.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Liftgate Unlock
4. Panic (if equipped)

3-4

Locking Your Vehicle
To lock your vehicle:
1. Make sure all doors, the engine
hood and the liftgate are closed.
2. Press the Door Lock button (1) on
the remote key to lock all doors.
3. If the Door Lock button (1) is
pressed once more within four
seconds, the horn will beep once
and the hazard warning lights will
blink.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.

WARNING
Do not leave the keys in your
vehicle with unsupervised children. Unattended children
could place the key in the ignition switch and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.

Liftgate unlocking

Panic button (if equipped)

To unlock your vehicle:
1. Press the Door Unlock button (2)
on the remote key. The driver's
door will unlock. The hazard
warning lights will blink two times.
2. If you press the Door Unlock button (2) again within four seconds,
then all the doors will unlock.

To unlock the liftgate:
1. Press the Liftgate (tailgate) Unlock
button (3) on the remote key for
more than one second.
2. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
Once the liftgate is opened and then
closed, the liftgate will automatically
lock after 30 seconds.

Press the Panic button (4) for more
than one second. The horn sounds
and hazard warning lights flash for
about 30 seconds.
To cancel the panic mode, press any
button on the remote key.

i Information
After unlocking the doors, the doors
will automatically relock after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Start-up
For more information, refer to the “Key
Ignition Switch” section in chapter 5.

i Information
• After unlocking the liftgate, the liftgate will lock automatically.
• The word "HOLD" is written on the
button to inform you that you must
press and hold the button for more
than one second.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the remote
key:
• Keep the remote key away from
water or any liquid and fire. If the
inside of the remote key gets
damp (due to drinks or moisture), or is heated, internal circuit which may not be covered
under warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
remote key.
• Protect the remote key from
extreme temperatures.

3-5

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Unlocking Your Vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mechanical key

Remote key precautions

OTL045002

If the remote key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.
To unfold the mechanical key, press
the release button on the remote.
To return the key to its stored position, press the release button and
fold the key back into the remote.

3-6

The remote key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The key is in the ignition switch.
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The remote key battery is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The remote key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the remote key.
When the remote key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the remote key contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the remote key is in close proximity to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phone's normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
When possible, avoid placing the
remote key and your mobile phone in
the same location such as a pants or
jacket pocket in order to avoid interference between the two devices.

i Information

NOTICE

Keep the remote key away from
electromagnetic materials that
block electromagnetic waves to
the key surface.

If the remote key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.

If you suspect your remote key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your remote key is not working correctly contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery according
to your local law(s) and regulation.

OLM042302

Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
remote key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery. Make sure the
battery position is correct.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
remote key.

3-7

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.

Battery replacement

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Key (if equipped)

Locking Your Vehicle

i Information
The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the outside door handle.

OLF044003/Q

OTL045003

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,
which you can use to lock or unlock
the driver and passenger doors or
the liftgate.
1. Door Lock
2. Door Unlock
3. Liftgate Unlock
4. Panic

To lock your vehicle:
1. Make sure all doors, the engine
hood and the liftgate are closed.
2. Make sure you have the smart key
in your possession.
3. Press either the button on the door
handle of the Door Lock button (1)
or the button on the smart key. The
chime will sound once and the
hazard warning lights will blink.
4. Make sure the doors are locked by
checking the position of the door
lock button inside the vehicle.

3-8

Even though you press the outside
door handle button, the doors will not
lock and the chime will sound for three
seconds if any of the following occur:
• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.
• The Engine Start/Stop button is in
ACC or ON position.
• Any door except the liftgate is open.

WARNING
Do not leave the Smart Key in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children. Unattended children
could press the Engine Start/
Stop button and may operate
power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle
move, which could result in
serious injury or death.

Unlocking Your Vehicle

i Information

To open the liftgate:
1. Make sure you have the smart key
in your possession.
2. Press either the liftgate handle
button or press and hold the
Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the
smart key for more than one second. The hazard warning lights will
blink two times.
3. Once the liftgate is opened and
then closed, the liftgate will lock
automatically.

i Information
The liftgate handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within
28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate
handle.

3-9

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045003

To unlock your vehicle:
1. Make sure you have the smart key
in your possession.
2. Press either the button on the
door handle of the Door Unlock
button (2) or the smart key. The
driver's door will unlock and the
hazard warning lights will blink two
times.
3. If you press the driver door outside door handle button or Door
Unlock button on the smart key
again within four seconds, then all
the doors will unlock.

• The door handle button will only
operate when the smart key is within 28-40 inches (0.7~1m) from the
outside door handle.
• Either the driver or front passenger
door can be opened with the door
handle button when the smart key is
within this range.
• If you press the front passenger outside door handle, while carrying the
Smart Key, all doors will unlock.
• After unlocking the doors, the doors
will lock automatically after 30 seconds unless a door is opened.

Opening the Liftgate

Convenient features of your vehicle

Panic button
Press the Panic button (4) and hold
for more than one second. The horn
sounds and hazard warning lights
blink for about 30 seconds. To cancel
the panic mode, press any button on
the Smart Key.

Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key.
For more information, refer to the
"Engine Start/Stop Button" section in chapter 5.

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the smart key:
• Keep the smart key in a cool, dry
place to avoid damage or malfunction. Exposure to moisture
or high temperature may cause
the internal circuit of the smart
key to malfunction which may
not be covered under warranty.
• Avoid dropping or throwing the
smart key.
• Protect the smart key from
extreme temperatures.

Mechanical key
If the Smart Key does not operate
normally, you can lock or unlock the
door by using the mechanical key.

OTL045004

To remove the mechanical key from
the smart key fob, press and hold the
release button (1) and pull the
mechanical key out.
To unlock the vehicle using the
mechanical key, insert the mechanical key into the key hole on the driver door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
3-10

Smart key precautions

A maximum of two Smart Keys can
be registered to a single vehicle. If
you happen to lose your smart key,
you should immediately take the
vehicle and remaining keys to your
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow
the vehicle, if necessary.

The smart key will not work if any of
the following occur:
• The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station
or an airport which can interfere
with normal operation of the transmitter.
• The smart key is near a mobile two
way radio system or a cellular
phone.
• Another vehicle’s smart key is being
operated close to your vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you have
a problem with the smart key, contact
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity
to your mobile phone, the signal
could be blocked by your mobile
phone's normal operational signals.
This is especially important when the
phone is active such as making and
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
When possible, avoid placing the
remote key and your mobile phone in
the same location such as a pants or
jacket pocket in order to avoid interference between the two devices.

CAUTION
Keep the smart key away from
electromagnetic materials that
blocks electromagnetic waves
to the key surface.

3-11

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Loss of a smart key

Convenient features of your vehicle

i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.

3-12

Battery replacement
If the Smart Key is not working properly, try replacing the battery with a
new one.

If you suspect your smart key might
have sustained some damage, or
you feel your smart key is not working correctly, contact an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
and regulation(s).

OLF044008

Battery Type: CR2032
To replace the battery:
1. Pry open the rear cover of the
smart key.
2. Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery.
3. Reinstall the rear cover of the
smart key.

Immobilizer System

WARNING
In order to prevent theft of your
vehicle, do not leave spare keys
anywhere in your vehicle. Your
immobilizer password is a customer unique password and
should be kept confidential.
NOTICE

i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
3. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the device.

The transponder in your key is an
important part of the immobilizer
system. It is designed to give
years of trouble-free service, however you should avoid exposure to
moisture, static electricity and
rough handling. Immobilizer system malfunction could occur.

3-13

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly
coded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the immobilizer system indicator should come on briefly,
then go off. If the indicator starts to
blink, the system does not recognize
the coding of the key.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, then turn the ignition switch to the ON position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e., key
chain) is near the key. The engine
may not start because the metal may
interrupt the transponder signal from
transmitting normally.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of the key, it is
recommended that you contact your
HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle inoperable.

Convenient features of your vehicle

DOOR LOCKS
Operating Door Locks from
Outside the Vehicle
Mechanical key
■ Type A

Remote key

i Information
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.

■ Type B

OTL045001
OTL045005

If you lock the driver’s door with turning the key toward the front of the
vehicle, all vehicle doors will lock. If
you unlock the driver’s door with
turning the key toward the rear of the
vehicle, the driver’s door will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

3-14

To lock the doors, press the Door
Lock button (1) on the remote key.
Press the Door Unlock button (2) on
the remote key, the driver’s door will
unlock. If you press the Door Unlock
button on the remote key again within four seconds, then all the doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

Smart key

Lock / Unlock

Door Door
Unlock Lock

i Information

OLF044003

To lock the doors, press the button on
the outside door handle while carrying the Smart Key with you or press
the Door Lock button on the Smart
Key.

• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked multiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operating temporarily in order to protect
the circuit and prevent damage to
system components.

Operating Door Locks from
Inside the Vehicle
With the door lock button

Lock
Unlock

OTL045007

• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” position. The red mark (2) on the door
lock button will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not be visible.
• To open a door, pull the door handle (3) outward.

3-15

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045003

Press the button on the driver’s outside door handle while carrying the
Smart Key with you or press the
Door Unlock button on the Smart
Key, the driver’s door will unlock. If
you press the button on the front
passenger’s outside door, all doors
will unlock.
Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that doors
are closed securely.

Convenient features of your vehicle

• If the inner door handle of the driver door or front passenger door is
pulled when the door lock button is
in the lock position, the button is
unlocked and the door will open.
• The front doors cannot be locked if
the key is in the ignition switch and
any front door is open.
• The doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
door is open.

With the central door lock
switch
■ Driver’s door

■ Passenger’s door

3-16

The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while
the vehicle is in motion. If the
doors are unlocked, the risk of
being thrown from the vehicle in
a crash is increased.

WARNING

i Information
If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle try
one or more of the following techniques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
mechanical key to unlock the door
from outside.

WARNING

OTLA045008/OTLA045312

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all
vehicle doors will lock.
When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all
vehicle doors will unlock.
If the key is in the ignition switch and
any door is opened, the doors will not
lock even though the lock button (1) of
the central door lock switch is pressed.
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
any door is opened, the doors will
not lock even though the lock button
(1) of the central door lock switch is
pressed.

Do not leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle. An
enclosed vehicle can become
extremely hot, causing death or
serious injury to unattended
children or animals who cannot
escape the vehicle. Children
might operate features of the
vehicle that could injure them,
or they could encounter other
harm, possibly from someone
gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

All doors will be automatically
unlocked when an impact causes the
air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock system
All doors will be automatically locked
when vehicle speed exceeds 9 mph
(15 km/h).
All of the doors will be automatically
unlocked after the engine is turned off.

Shift lever auto door lock
All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the shift lever out of P
(Park) with the engine running.
You can activate or deactivate the
Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from
the User Settings Mode on the LCD
display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.

CAUTION
Opening a door when something
is approaching may cause damage or injury. Be careful when
opening doors and watch for
vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles
or pedestrians approaching the
vehicle in the path of the door.

3-17

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Always secure your vehicle.
Leaving your vehicle unlocked
increases the potential risk to
you or others from someone
hiding in your vehicle.
To secure your vehicle, while
depressing the brake, move the
shift lever to the P (Park) position, engage the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position, close
all windows, lock all doors, and
always take the key with you.

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features
Impact sensing door unlock
system

Convenient features of your vehicle

Child-Protector Rear Door locks

To lock the child safety lock, insert a
screwdriver into the hole and turn it
to the lock position.
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock the
child safety lock.

WARNING

OTL045009

The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock (1)
position, the rear door will not open if
the inner door handle (2) is pulled.

3-18

If children accidently open the
rear doors while the vehicle is
in motion, they could fall out of
the vehicle. The rear door safety
locks should always be used
whenever children are in the
vehicle.

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the liftgate, or the
hood without using the remote key or
smart key will cause the alarm to
activate.
The Theft Alarm System will not set if
the hood, the liftgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the hood, the liftgate, or
the doors are fully closed.
Do not attempt to alter this system or
add other devices to it.

i Information
• Do not lock the doors until all passengers have left the vehicle. If the
remaining passenger leaves the
vehicle when the system is armed,
the alarm will be activated.
• If the vehicle is not disarmed with the
remote key or smart key, open the
doors by using the mechanical key
and place the ignition switch in the
ON position (for remote key) or start
the engine (for smart key) by directly pressing the ignition switch with
the smart key.
• If the system is disarmed by unlocking the vehicle, but neither a door or
the liftgate is opened within 30 seconds, the doors will relock and the
system will rearm automatically.

3-19

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

This system helps to protect your
vehicle and valuables. The horn will
sound and the hazard warning lights
will blink continuously if any of the
following occurs:
- A door is opened without using the
remote key or smart key.
- The liftgate is opened without
using the remote key or smart key.
- The engine hood is opened.
The alarm continues for 30 seconds,
then the system resets. To turn off
the alarm, unlock the doors with the
remote key or smart key.
The Theft Alarm System automatically sets 30 seconds after you lock the
doors and the liftgate. For the system
to activate, you must lock the doors
and the liftgate from outside the vehicle with the remote key or smart key
or by pressing the button on the outside of the door handle with the smart
key in your possession.
The hazard warning lights will blink
and the chime will sound once to
indicate the system is armed.

Convenient features of your vehicle

STEERING WHEEL
Electric Power Steering (EPS)
The system assists you with steering
the vehicle. If the engine is turned off
or if the power steering system
becomes inoperative, you may still
steer the vehicle, but it will require
increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the system
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

3-20

CAUTION
If the Electric Power Steering
System does not operate normally, the warning light ( ) will
illuminate on the instrument
cluster. You may steer the vehicle, but it will require increased
steering efforts. Take your vehicle to an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer and have the system
checked as soon as possible.

i Information
The following symptoms may occur
during normal vehicle operation:
• The steering effort may be high
immediately after placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
This happens as the system performs the EPS system diagnostics.
When the diagnostics are completed, the steering wheel will return to
its normal condition.
• A click noise may be heard from the
EPS relay after the ignition switch is
in the ON or OFF position.
• Motor noise may be heard when the
vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed.
• If the outside ambient temperature
is low, when you operate the steering wheel a noise from the electric
power steering may occur. As the
temperature increases, the noise will
dissappear. This is a normal condition.

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering

WARNING
NEVER adjust the steering
wheel while driving. This may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.

i Information
Sometimes the lock release lever may
not engage completely. This may
occur when the gears of the locking
mechanism do not completely mesh. If
this occurs, pull down on the lockrelease lever, readjust the steering
wheel again, and then pull back up on
the release lever to lock the steering
wheel in place.
OTL045010

To adjust the steering wheel angle
and height:
1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired angle (2) and height (3).
3. Pull up the lock-release lever to
lock the steering wheel in place.

3-21

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

When adjusting the steering wheel to
a comfortable position, adjust the
steering wheel so that it points
toward your chest, not toward your
face. Make sure you can see the
instrument panel warning lights and
gauges. After adjusting, push the
steering wheel both up and down to
be certain it is locked in position.
Always adjust the position of the
steering wheel before driving.

Convenient features of your vehicle

To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button again. The indicator
on the button will turn off.
The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after approximately
30 minutes.

Heated Steering Wheel
(if equipped)
■ Type A

Horn

NOTICE

OTLA045325
■ Type B

Do not install any cover or accessory on the steering wheel. The
cover or accessory could cause
damage to the heated steering
wheel system.

OTL045012

To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
NOTICE
OTLA045326

When the ignition switch is in the ON
position or when the engine is running,
press the heated steering wheel button to warm the steering wheel. The
indicator on the button will illuminate.
3-22

Do not strike the horn severely to
operate it, or hit it with your fist.
Do not press on the horn with a
sharp-pointed object.

MIRRORS
Inside Rearview Mirror
Before you start driving, adjust the
rearview mirror to center on the view
through the rear window.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.

Day/night rearview mirror
(if equipped)

Night

NOTICE

When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner. Do
not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as this may cause the
liquid cleaner to enter the mirror
housing.

Day
OTL045013

Make this adjustment before you
start driving and while the day/night
lever is in the day position.

To prevent serious injury during
an accident or deployment of
the air bag, do not modify the
rearview mirror and do not
install a wide mirror.

3-23

Convenient features of your vehicle

Make sure your line of sight is
not obstructed. Do not place
objects in the rear seat, cargo
area, or behind the rear headrests which could interfere with
your vision through the rear
window.

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

Pull the day/night lever toward you to
reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicles behind you during night
driving.
Remember that you lose some
rearview clarity in the night position.

Electric chromic mirror with
homelink system (if equipped)

Indicator light

Glare detection sensor

Homelink buttons
OHD046305N

OHD046025N

To operate the electric rearview
mirror
Press the I button (1) to turn the
automatic- dimming function on. The
mirror indicator light will illuminate.
Press the O button (2) to turn the
automatic- dimming function off. The
mirror indicator light will turn off.

3-24

HomeLink® Wireless Control System
Your new mirror comes with an integrated
HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver, which allows you to program the mirror to activate your
garage door(s), estate gate, home
lighting, etc. The mirror actually
learns the codes from your various
existing transmitters.

WARNING
• When

Programming
Your vehicle may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the ACC position for programming and/or operation
of HomeLink. It is also recommended
that a new battery be replaced in the
hand-held transmitter of the device
being programmed to HomeLink for
quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency.
Follow these steps to train your
HomeLink mirror:

3-25

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

programming
the
HomeLink® Wireless Control
System, you may be operating
a garage door or gate operator.
Make sure that people and
objects are out of the way of
the moving door or gate to prevent potential harm or damage.
• Do not use HomeLink with
any garage door opener that
lacks the safety stop and
reverse feature as required by
federal safety standards. (This
includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot
detect an object, signaling the
door to stop and reverse,
does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases risk
of serious injury or death. For
more information, call 1-800355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.

Retain the original transmitter for
future programming procedures (i.e.,
new vehicle purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed HomeLink buttons be erased for security purposes
(follow step 1 in the “Programming”
portion of this text).

Convenient features of your vehicle

Flashing

NOTICE

OHD046306N

1. When programming the buttons for
the first time, press and hold the
left and center buttons ( ,
)
simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator light
begins to flash. (This procedure
erases the factory-set default
codes. Do not perform this step to
program additional hand-held
transmitters.)

3-26

For non rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 3.
For rolling code garage door
openers, follow steps 2 - 6.
For Canadian Programming,
please follow the Canadian
Programming section.
For help with determining whether
your garage is non-rolling code or
rolling code, please refer to the
garage door openers owner’s
manual or contact HomeLink customer service at 1-800-355-3515.

Flashing

es
ch
3in
1

Transmitter

OHD046307N

2. Press and hold the button on the
HomeLink system you wish to train
and the button on the transmitter
while the transmitter is approximately 1 to 3 inches away from the
mirror. Do not release the buttons
until step 3 has been completed.
3. The HomeLink indicator light will
flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
When the indicator light flashes
rapidly, both buttons may be
released. (The rapid flashing light
indicates successful programming
of the new frequency signal.)

NOTICE

Some gate operators and garage
door openers may require you to
replace step #3 with the "cycling"
procedure noted in the "Canadian
Programming" section of this document.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press and release the programmed HomeLink button up to
three times. The rolling code
equipped device should now recognize the HomeLink signal and
activate when the HomeLink button is pressed. The remaining two
buttons may now be programmed
if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the "Programming"
portion of this text.

3-27

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped devices)
with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing
the "Programming" portion of this
text. (A second person may make the
following training procedures quicker
& easier.)
4. Locate the "learn" or "smart" button on the device’s motor head
unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by product
brand. If there is difficulty locating
the "learn" or "smart" button, reference the device’s owner’s manual
or contact HomeLink at 1-800355-3515 or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
5. Press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button on the device’s
motor head unit. You have 30 seconds to complete step number 6.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating HomeLink
To operate, simply press the programmed
HomeLink
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, security system, entry door lock, estate
gate, or home or office lighting). For
convenience, the hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used
at any time. The HomeLink Wireless
Controls System (once programmed)
or the original hand-held transmitter
may be used to activate the device
(e.g. garage door, entry door lock,
etc.). In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or on
the internet at www.homelink.com.

3-28

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink® system,
compass and Blue Link®
(for U.S.A)

Flashing

OHD046306N

Erasing programmed HomeLink
buttons
To erase the three programmed buttons (individual buttons cannot be
erased):
• Press and hold the left and center
buttons simultaneously, until the
indicator light begins to flash
(approximately 20 seconds).
Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
HomeLink is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time.

Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink®
Wireless Control System. During
nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the compass indicates the direction the vehicle is pointed. The HomeLink®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS®) Mirror
(if equipped)
The NVS® Mirror automatically
reduces glare by monitoring light levels in the front and the rear of the
vehicle. Any object that obstructs
either light sensor will degrade the
automatic dimming control feature.

(1) Telematics button
(2) Telematics button
(3) Telematics button
(4) Compass control button &
Dimming ON/OFF button
(5) Status indicator LED
(6) Channel 1 button
(7) Channel 2 button
(8) Channel 3 button
(9) Compass display
(10) Rear light sensor

For more information regarding
NVS® mirrors and other applications, please refer to the Gentex
website:
www.gentex.com

1. Pressing and holding the
button
for 3 seconds turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2. Pressing and holding the
button
for 3 seconds again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning on.
The mirror defaults to the ON position each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-Nav™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

3-29

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045310

Your mirror will automatically dim upon
detecting glare from the vehicles traveling behind you. The auto-dimming
function can be controlled by pressing
the Dimming ON/OFF button:

Convenient features of your vehicle

Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the
button
within 1 second to turn the display
feature OFF.
2. Press and release the
button
again within 1 second to turn the
display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic north and true north. To compensate for this difference you will
need to adjust the Zone setting based
on where you live.

B520C05NF

3-30

There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle magnets, such as installing a ski rack or
a CB antenna. Body repair work on
the vehicle can also cause changes
to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In
these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly
correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the compass:
1. Press and hold the
button for
more than 9 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared a "C"
will appear in the display.
2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink® Wireless Control
System can replace up to three handheld radio-frequency (RF) transmitters with a single built-in device. This
innovative feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most current
transmitters to operate devices such
as gate operators, garage door openers, entry door locks, security systems, even home lighting. Both standard and rolling code-equipped transmitters can be programmed by following the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink® programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink® buttons be erased for
security purposes.

3-31

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the
button for 6
seconds, the current Zone
Number will appear on the display.
3. Pressing and holding the
button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display
will set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will start displaying a compass heading again.

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING
Before programming HomeLink®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure people and
objects are out of the way of the
device to prevent potential harm
or damage. Do not use the
HomeLink® with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this
includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April
1, 1982). A garage door that cannot detect an object - signaling
the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U.S. federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without
these features increases the risk
of serious injury or death.

3-32

Programming HomeLink®
Please note the following:
• When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the
vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink® for quicker
training and accurate transmission
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be placed in the
ACC (or "Accessories") position for
programming and/or operation of
HomeLink®.
• In the event that there are still programming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com
or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming
Flashing

ODH044413N

To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons
( , ), HomeLink® Channel 1
and Channel 3, until the indicator
light begins to flash (after 10 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer
than 20 seconds.

i Information

Flashing

ODH044414N

2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)
away from the HomeLink® button
you wish to program while keeping
the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink® and handheld transmitter buttons until the
HomeLink® indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapid blinking
light. Now you may release both
the HomeLink® and hand-held
transmitter buttons.

3-33

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Some devices may require you to
replace this Programming step 3 with
procedures noted in the "Gate
Operator/Canadian Programming"
chapter. If the HomeLink® indicator
light does not change to a rapidly
blinking light after performing these
steps, contact HomeLink® at
www.homelink.com.

4. Firmly press, hold for 5 seconds and
release
the
programmed
HomeLink® button up to two separate times to activate the door. If the
door does not activate, press and
hold the just-trained HomeLink® button and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate
when the HomeLink® button is
pressed and released.
• If the indicator light blinks rapidly
for 2 seconds and then turns to a
constant light, continue with
"Programming" steps 5-7 to complete the programming of a rolling
code equipped device (most commonly a garage door opener).
5. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the motor-head unit.

Convenient features of your vehicle

6. Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button. (The
name and color of the button vary
by manufacturer). There are 30
seconds to initiate step 7.
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly
press, hold for 2 seconds and
release
the
programmed
HomeLink® button. Repeat the
"press/hold/release" sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete
the
programming
process.
HomeLink® should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 3 in the Programming portion
of this document) while you press
and re-press ("cycle") your handheld
transmitter every two seconds until
the frequency signal has been
learned. The indicator light will flash
slowly and then rapidly after several
seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink® button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink®
button
To program a device to HomeLink®
using a HomeLink® button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink® button. DO NOT
release the button.
2.The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the HomeLink® button, proceed
with "Programming" step 2.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink® at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.

3-34

NVS® is a registered trademark and
Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls,
Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4
IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following
three conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
3. The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry
Canada rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.

Side View Mirrors

OTL045018

Be sure to adjust mirror angles
before driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand side view
mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted
remotely with the remote switch. The
side view mirrors can be folded to
prevent damage during an automatic
car wash or when passing through a
narrow street.
The right hand side view is convex.
Objects seen in the mirror are closer
than they appear.

3-35

Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing HomeLink® buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink® buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 10
seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 20 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be programmed at any time following the
appropriate
steps
in
the
Programming chapters above.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Use the rear view mirror inside the
vehicle or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following
vehicles when changing lanes.

Blind Spot Mirror (if equipped)

• Always check the road condi-

WARNING
Do not adjust or fold the left and
right side view mirrors while
driving. This may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.

OTLA045311

CAUTION

3-36

tion while driving for unexpected situations even though
the vehicle is equipped with a
blind spot mirror.
• The blind spot mirror is a
device made for convenience.
Do not solely rely on the mirror but always pay attention to
traffic around you.
NOTICE

Do not clean the mirror with harsh
abrasives, fuel or other petroleum
based cleaning products.

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the
surface of the glass.
• If the mirror is jammed with
ice, do not adjust the mirror by
force. Use an approved de-icer
spray. (Do not use radiator
anti-freeze.) Wipe the mirror
using a sponge or soft cloth
with warm water. Or move the
vehicle to a warm area and
allow the ice to melt.

WARNING

OLF044478N

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a
supplemental mirror that minimizes
the driver's blind spot zone by
expanding the field of view on the
rear side of the vehicle. The blind
spot mirror is equipped on the driver's left side view mirror.

Side View Mirror Adjustment

NOTICE

Folding the side view mirrors

• The mirrors stop moving when
they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch
is pressed. Do not press the
switch longer than necessary,
the motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the side
view mirror by hand or the motor
may be damaged.

OTL045019

To fold either the left or right hand
side view mirror, grasp the housing
of the mirror and then fold it toward
the rear of the vehicle.

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045313

Adjusting the left and right side view
mirrors:
1. Press either the L (driver's side) or
R (passenger's side) button (1) to
select the rearview mirror you
would like to adjust.
2. Use the mirror adjustment control
(2) to position the selected mirror
up, down, left or right.
3. After adjustment, put the button
into neutral (center) position to
prevent inadvertent adjustment.

Convenient features of your vehicle

WINDOWS
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window
(7) Power window lock switch

OTLA045023

3-38

Power Windows

WARNING
To avoid serious injury or death,
do not extend your head, arms
or body outside the windows
while driving.

• In cold and wet climates, power windows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
• While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) opened (or partially
opened), your vehicle may demonstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is normal and can
be reduced or eliminated by taking
the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear
windows down, partially lower both
front windows approximately one
inch. If you experience the noise
with the sunroof open, slightly close
the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

OTL045024

To open:
Press the window switch down to the
first detent position (5). Release the
switch when you want the window to
stop.
To close:
Pull the window switch up to the first
detent position (5). Release the window switch when you want the window to stop.

3-39

Convenient features of your vehicle

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to be able to raise or lower
the windows. Each door has a Power
Window switch to control that door’s
window. The driver has a Power
Window Lock switch which can block
the operation of passenger windows.
The power windows will operate for
approximately 30 seconds after the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC
or LOCK/OFF position. However, if
the front doors are opened, the
Power Windows cannot be operated
even within the 30 second period.

i Information

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto up/down window
(if equipped)

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power window switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press down and release the switch.

WARNING

To reset the power windows
If the power windows do not operate
normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows:
1. Place the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Close the window and continue
pulling up on the power window
switch for at least one second.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have the
system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-40

i Information
The automatic reverse feature is only
active when the “Auto Up” feature is
used by fully pulling up the switch to
the second detent.

OLF044032

If a window senses any obstacle while
it is closing automatically, it will stop
and lower approximately 12 inches (30
cm) to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).
If the power window switch is pulled
up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by
the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal
will not operate.

Make sure body parts or other
objects are safely out of the way
before closing the windows to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm)
in diameter caught between the
window glass and the upper window channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse window
and the window will not stop and
reverse direction.

Power window lock switch

WARNING

OTLA045025

The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passenger doors by pressing the power window lock switch.
When the power window lock switch
is pressed:
• The rear passenger control will not
be able to operate the rear passenger power window
• Note that the front passenger control is still able to operate the front
passenger window, and that the
driver master control can still operate all the power windows.

• To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
• Never try to operate the main
switch on the driver’s door and
the individual door window
switch in opposite directions at
the same time. If this is done, the
window will stop and cannot be
opened or closed.

3-41

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock switch in the LOCK position. Serious injury or death can
result from unintentional window operation by a child.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING

Sunshade

• Make sure heads, other body

OTL045026

The ignition switch must be in the ON
position before you can open or
close the sunroof.

i Information
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freezing
conditions.

WARNING
Never adjust the sunroof or sunshade while driving. This could
result in loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.

3-42

parts or objects are out of the
way before using the sunroof.
• Do not leave the engine running and the key in your vehicle with unsupervised children.
Unattended children could
operate the sunroof, which
could result in serious injury.
• Make sure the sunroof is
closed fully when leaving your
vehicle.
If the sunroof is left open, rain
or snow may wet the interior of
the vehicle. Also, leaving the
sunroof open when the vehicle
is unattended may invite theft.
NOTICE

To prevent damage to the sunroof
and the motor, do not continue to
press the sunroof control lever
after the sunroof is in the fully
open, closed or tilt position(s).

OTL045027

• To open the sunshade, pull the
sunroof control lever backward (1)
to the first detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed, push the
sunroof control lever forward (2).

Sliding the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed

When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.

Tilting the Sunroof
When the sunshade is closed

i Information

OTL045028

If you push the sunroof control lever
backward past the first detent, the
sunshade will slide all the way open
and then the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.

OTL045029

If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide open
then the sunroof glass will tilt open.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.

When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt
closed.

3-43

Convenient features of your vehicle

Only the front glass of the panoramic
sunroof opens and closes.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic reverse

Closing the Sunroof

WARNING
• Make sure heads, body parts

OTL045030

To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the first detent position.

To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever forward to the second detent position.
The sunroof glass will close, then the
sunshade will close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, push the sunroof control lever
either forward or backward momentarily.
3-44

ODH043039

If the sunroof senses any obstacle
while it is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction then stop to allow
the object to be cleared.

or other objects are safely out
of the way before closing the
sunroof to avoid injuries or
vehicle damage.
Small objects that can get
caught between the sunroof
glass and the front glass
channel may not be detected
by the automatic reverse system. In this case, the sunroof
glass will not detect the object
and reverse direction.
• To avoid serious injury or
death, do not extend your
head, arms or body outside
the sunroof while driving.
• In the event of an accident or
collision, the sunroof glass
may break. Seatbelts must be
worn by ALL passengers
whenever the vehicle is moving. ALWAYS properly restrain
children under age 13 in the
rear seats.

NOTICE

3. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward (to close the sunshade) for about 10 seconds until
the sunroof moves slightly, then
release the control lever.
4. Push and hold the sunroof control
lever forward until the sunroof
operates as follows:

To Reset the Sunroof

i Information
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.

Sunshade Open → Glass Tilt Open
→ Glass Slide Open → Glass Slide
Close → Sunshade Close
OTL045031

The sunroof may need to be reset if
the following conditions occur:
- The battery is discharged or disconnected or the sunroof fuse has
been replaced or disconnected
- The sunroof control lever is not
operating correctly
To reset the sunroof, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the engine on and close the
sunroof glass and sunshade completely.
2. Release the control lever.

Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
For more information, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information
If you do not reset the sunroof, it may
not work properly.

3-45

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

• Periodically remove any dirt that
may accumulate on the sunroof
guide rail or between the sunroof and roof panel.
• Do not try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
motor could be damaged.

Convenient features of your vehicle

EXTERIOR FEATURES
Hood
Opening the hood

OTLA045032

1. Park the vehicle and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the release lever to unlatch
the hood. The hood should pop
open slightly.

3-46

OTL045033

OTL045245

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push up the secondary latch (1) inside of the hood
center and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod and hold
the hood open with the support
rod (1).

WARNING
Grasp the support rod in the area
wrapped in rubber. The rubber
will help prevent you from being
burned by hot metal when the
engine is hot.

Closing the hood

WARNING
• Before closing the hood,
ensure all obstructions are
removed from around hood
opening.
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed.
Doing so could result in an
accident. The hood could also
fall and become damaged.

3-47

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in the engine compartment must be correctly
installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other combustible material must be
removed from the engine compartment.
2. Return the support rod to its clip to
prevent it from rattling.
3. Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
Then double check to be sure the
hood is secure.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fuel Filler Door
Opening the fuel filler door

i Information
If the fuel filler door does not open
because ice has formed around it, tap
lightly or push on the door to break
the ice and release the door. Do not
pry on the door. If necessary, spray
around the door with an approved deicer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm
place and allow the ice to melt.
OTL045035

OTLA045034

The fuel filler door must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pulling up
the fuel filler door release lever.
1. Turn the engine off. Locate the fuel
filler door release lever on the floor
on the left side of the driver seat.
2. Pull up on the release lever.

3-48

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) outward
to access the fuel tank cap.
4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),
turn it counterclockwise. You may
hear a hissing noise as the pressure inside the tank equalizes.
5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

Closing the fuel filler door
1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it
clockwise until it "clicks" one time.
2. Close the fuel filler door until it is
latched securely.

WARNING

3-49

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. Failure to follow
these guidelines may result in
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
• Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station.
• Before refueling, note the
location of the Emergency
Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,
at the gas station.
• Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate the
potential build-up of static
electricity by touching a metal
part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler
neck, nozzle, or other gas
source, with your bare hand.
• Do not use cellular phones
while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellular phones can
potentially ignite fuel vapors
and cause a fire.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refueling. You can generate a buildup of static electricity by
touching, rubbing or sliding
against any item or fabric
capable of producing static
electricity. Static electricity
discharge can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. If you
must re-enter the vehicle, you
should once again eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle,
away from the fuel filler neck,
nozzle or other gasoline
source, with your bare hand.
• When using an approved
portable fuel container, be
sure to place the container on
the ground prior to refueling.
Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire.
(Continued)

Convenient features of your vehicle

(Continued)
Once refueling has begun,
contact between your bare
hand and the vehicle should
be maintained until the filling
is complete.
• Use only approved portable
plastic fuel containers designed
to carry and store gasoline.
• When refueling, always move
the shift lever to the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch to the LOCK/OFF position. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire.
• Do not use matches or a
lighter and do not smoke or
leave a lit cigarette in your
vehicle while at a gas station,
especially during refueling.
• Do not over-fill or top-off your
vehicle tank, which can cause
gasoline spillage.
(Continued)

3-50

(Continued)
• If a fire breaks out during refueling, leave the vicinity of the
vehicle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas
station and then contact the
local fire department. Follow
any safety instructions they
provide.
• If pressurized fuel sprays out,
it can cover your clothes or
skin and thus subject you to
the risk of fire and burns.
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before completely removing the cap.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event
of an accident.

i Information
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel Requirements"
suggested in the Introduction chapter.
NOTICE

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any type
of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint.
• If the fuel filler cap requires
replacement, use only a genuine
HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent
specified for your vehicle. An
incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction
of the fuel system or emission
control system.

LIFTGATE
Non-Powered liftgate
Opening the liftgate

Closing the liftgate

NOTICE

In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing conditions.

WARNING

OTL045036

• The liftgate is locked or unlocked
when all doors are locked or
unlocked with the key, transmitter,
smart key or central door lock
switch.
• If unlocked, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the handle
switch and pulling up on the handle.
• Only the liftgate is unlocked if the
liftgate unlock button on the transmitter or smart key is pressed for
about 1 second, or the liftgate
handle button is pressed when the
smart key is detected.

CAUTION

OTL045037

To close the liftgate, lower and push
down the liftgate firmly. Make sure
that the liftgate is securely latched.

Make certain that you close the
liftgate before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur
to the liftgate lift cylinders and
attached hardware if the liftgate
is not closed prior to driving.

3-51

Convenient features of your vehicle

The liftgate swings upward.
Make sure no objects or people
are near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the liftgate.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Emergency liftgate safety
release

WARNING

Power liftgate (if equipped)
Power liftgate button

• For emergencies, be fully

OTL045038

Your vehicle is equipped with the
emergency liftgate safety release
lever located on the bottom of the liftgate. To unlock and open the liftgate
manually from inside the luggage
compartment, perform the following
steps:
1. Remove the cover.
2. Push the release lever to the right.
3. Push up the liftgate.

3-52

aware of the location of the
emergency liftgate safety
release lever in this vehicle
and how to open the liftgate if
you are accidentally locked in
the luggage compartment.
• No one should be allowed to
occupy the luggage compartment of the vehicle at any time.
The luggage compartment is a
very dangerous location in the
event of a crash.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies
only.
Use
extreme caution, especially
while the vehicle is in motion.

OTL045039

When the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift lever is in Park
(P), the power liftgate can be opened
by using the console button on the
dash.
Before using the power liftgate, make
sure the power liftgate option is
selected in the User Setting Modes
in the cluster LCD display.
For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.

WARNING
Never leave children unattended
in your vehicle. Children might
operate the power liftgate.
Doing so could result in injury
to themselves or others, and
could damage the vehicle.

Do not close or open the power
liftgate manually.This may cause
damage to the power liftgate. If it
is necessary to close or open
the power liftgate manually
when the battery is discharged
or disconnected, do not apply
excessive force.

WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the liftgate
before operating the power liftgate. Wait until the liftgate is
opened fully and stopped before
loading or unloading cargo or
passengers from the vehicle.
OTL045041

(1) Power liftgate handle switch
(2) Power liftgate inner switch
NOTICE

The power liftgate operates only
when the automatic shift lever is
in P (Park).
3-53

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045040

CAUTION

Convenient features of your vehicle

Opening the liftgate

Closing the liftgate

Power liftgate non-opening conditions
The power liftgate will not open or
close automatically, when the vehicle
is moving more than 2 mph (3 km/h).

WARNING

OTL045040

OTL045041

The power liftgate will open automatically by doing one of the following:
• Press and hold the liftgate unlock
button on the smart key
• Press the liftgate outside handle
button while having the smart key
with you
In order to suddenly stop the movement of the liftgate while it is operating, quickly press the power liftgate
inner button.

1. Press the power liftgate inner button for approximately 1 second.
2. The liftgate will close and lock
automatically.
In order to suddenly stop the movement of the liftgate while it is operating, quickly press the power liftgate
inner button.

3-54

The chime will sound continuously if you drive over 2 mph (3
km/h) with the liftgate opened.
Stop your vehicle immediately
at a safe place and check if your
liftgate is opened.

CAUTION

• The power liftgate can be operated when the engine is not running. However, the power liftgate
operation consumes a large
amount of electic power.
To prevent the battery from
being discharged, do not operate it excessively (e.g. more than
5 times repeatedly).
• To prevent the battery from
being discharged, do not leave
the power liftgate in the open
position for a long lime.
• Do not modify or repair any part
of the power liftgate by yourself.
This must be done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle, do not operate the power
liftgate. This could cause the
power liftgate to operate
improperly.
• In cold and wet climates, the
power liftgate may not work
properly due to freezing conditions.

3-55

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating the power liftgate
more than 5 times continuously
could cause damage to the operating motor. In this case, the
power liftgate system enters into
thermal protection mode to prevent the motor from overheating.
In thermal protection mode the
power liftgate will not operate. If
any of the power liftgate buttons
are pressed to try to open the
liftgate, the chime will sound 3
times but the liftgate will remain
closed.
Allow the power liftgate system
to cool for about 1 minute before
operating the system again.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic reversal

OTL045042

During power opening and closing if
the power liftgate is blocked by an
object or part of the body, the power
liftgate will detect the resistance.
• If resistance is detected while
opening or closing the power liftgate, the liftgate will stop and move
in the opposite direction.

3-56

However, in some instances the
automatic reversal system may not
detect the object if it is too soft or is
very thin, or if the liftgate is almost
fully closed near the latched position.
Caution should be taken to prevent
any objects from obstructing the liftgate opeining.
If the automatic reversal feature
operates more than 2 times while
attempting to open or close the liftgate, the power liftgate may stop at
that position. If this occurs, carefully
close the liftgate manually, and then
try to operate the power liftgate automatically again.

WARNING
Never intentionally place any
object or part of your body in
the path of the power liftgate to
make sure the automatic reversal operates.

CAUTION
Do not put heavy objects on the
power liftgate before you operate the power liftgate feature.
Additional weight may damage
the operation of the system.

How to reset the power liftgate

NOTICE

When operating the power liftgate,
the gear shift lever must be in the
(P) park position in order to operate normally.

Power liftgate opening height
user setting

WARNING
Exhaust fumes
If you drive with the liftgate
open, you will draw dangerous
exhaust fumes into your vehicle
which can cause serious injury
or death to vehicle occupants. If
you must drive with the liftgate
open, keep the air vents and all
windows open so that additional outside air comes into the
vehicle.

OTL045041

Follow the instructions below to set
the fully open height of the power liftgate:
1. Position the liftgate manually to
the height you prefer.
2. Press the power liftgate inner button for more than 3 seconds.
3. Close the liftgate manually after
hearing the buzzer sound.
The liftgate will open to the manually
adjusted height that was set.

3-57

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the power liftgate
fuse has been replaced or removed,
reset the power liftgate by performing
the following procedure:
1. Put the shift lever in park (P).
2. Press the power liftgate inner button and the power liftgate outer
handle button simultaneously for
more than 3 seconds. The chime
will sound.
3. Close the liftgate manually.
If the power liftgate does not work
properly after the above procedure,
have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

Emergency liftgate safety
release

WARNING

Rear cargo area

• For emergencies, be fully

Occupants should never ride in
the rear cargo area where no
restraints are available. To avoid
injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained.

OTL045038

3-58

Smart Liftgate (if equipped)

On vehicles equipped with a smart
key, the liftgate can be opened with
hands-free activation using the
Smart Liftgate system.

The hands-free smart liftgate system
can be opened automatically when
the following conditions are met:
• The Smart Liftgate option is
enabled in the User Settings in the
cluster LCD display
• The Smart Liftgate is activated and
ready 15 seconds after all the
doors are closed and locked
• The Smart Liftgate will open when
the smart key is detected in the
area behind the vehicle for 3 seconds

NOTICE

• The Smart Liftgate will NOT
operate when:
- Any door is open, or all doors
are closed but not locked
- The smart key is detected within 15 seconds from when the
doors were closed and locked
- For vehicles equipped with illuminated exterior front door
handles, if the smart key is
detected within 15 seconds
from when the doors were
closed and locked or if the
smart key is within 60 inches
(1.5m) from the front door handles
- The smart key is in the vehicle.

3-59

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045043

How to use the Smart Liftgate

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Setting
To activate the Smart Liftgate, go to
User Settings Mode and select
Smart Liftgate on the LCD display.

NOTICE

Do not approach the detecting
area if you do not want the liftgate
to open. If you have unintentionally entered the detecting area and
the hazard warning lights and
chime starts to operate, move
away from the area behind the
vehicle with the smart key. The liftgate will remain closed.

❈ For more details, refer to "LCD
Display" in this chapter.

OTL045044

2. Detect and Alert
The Smart Liftgate detecting area
extends approximately 20-40 in (50100 cm) behind the vehicle. If you
are positioned in the detecting area
and are carrying the smart key, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound for about 3 seconds to alert you that the smart liftgate will open.

3-60

WARNING
• Make certain that you close
•

3. Automatic opening
After the hazard warning lights blink
and the chime sounds 2 times, the
power liftgate will open.

•

OLF044006

1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Liftgate open
4. Panic
If you press any button on the smart
key during the Detect and Alert
stage, the Smart Liftgate function will
be deactivated.
Make sure to be aware of how to
deactivate the Smart Liftgate function for emergency situations.

3-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

•
OTL045045

the liftgate before driving your
vehicle.
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the liftgate
before opening or closing the
liftgate.
Make sure objects in the rear
cargo area do not come out
when opening the liftgate,
especially if the vehicle is
parked on a grade or incline.
If you keep your vehicle
parked and locked on your
driveway, you may want to
temporarily deactivate the
Smart
Liftgate
system.
Otherwise, standing at the
rear of the vehicle with the
smart key may cause the liftgate to open unintentionally.
The key should be kept out of
reach of children. Children
may inadvertently open the
Smart Liftgate while playing
around the rear area of the
vehicle.

How to deactivate the Smart
Liftgate function using the
smart key

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

• If you press the door unlock button (2), the Smart Liftgate function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open
any door for 30 seconds, the
Smart Liftgate function will be
activated again.
• If you press the liftgate open
button (3) for more than 1 second, the liftgate opens.
• The Smart Liftgate function will
still be activated if you press the
door lock button (1) or liftgate
open button (3) on the smart key
as long as the Smart Liftgate is
not already in the Detect and
Alert stage.
• In case you have deactivated the
Smart Liftgate function by
pressing the smart key button
and opened a door, the Smart
Liftgate function can be activated again by closing and locking
all doors.

3-62

Detecting area

NOTICE

OTLA045046

• The Smart Liftgate detecting area
extends approximately 20-40 in
(50-100 cm) behind the vehicle. If
you are positioned in the detecting
area and are carrying the smart
key, the hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound for
about 3 seconds to alert you that
the smart liftgate will open.
• The alert stops once the smart key
is moved outside of the detecting
area within the 3 second period.

• The Smart Liftgate function may
not operate properly if any of the
following instances occur:
- The smart key is close to a
radio transmitter such as a
radio station or an airport
which can interfere with normal
operation of the transmitter.
- The smart key is near a mobile
two way radio system or a cellular phone.
- Another vehicle's smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
• The Smart Liftgate detecting
area may change when:
- The vehicle is parked on an
incline or slope
- One side of the vehicle is
raised or lowered relative to
the opposite side

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
■ Type A

3
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
■ Type B

4. Fuel gauge
5. Warning and indicator lights
6. LCD display (including Trip computer)
The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTLA045100/OTLA045101

3-63

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Tachometer

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting instrument cluster
illumination

LCD Display Control

■ Type A

■ Type B
OTL045150L
■ Type B
OTLE045112

OTLA045070

When the vehicle’s parking lights or
headlights are on, press the illumination control button to adjust the
brightness of the instrument panel
illumination.
When pressing the illumination control button, the interior switch illumination intensity is also adjusted.

3-64

OTL045151L

• The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination is displayed.
• If the brightness reaches the maximum or minimum level, a chime
will sound.

The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1)
: MODE button for changing
modes
(2) ▲, ▼ : MOVE switch for changing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
For more information on LCD
Modes, refer to "LCD Display" in
the next pages of this chapter.

Tachometer

Gauges
Speedometer

Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h).

The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revolutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the correct shift points and to prevent lugging and/or over-revving the engine.

OTL045107

This gauge indicates the temperature of the engine coolant when the
ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop
button is ON.

NOTICE

Do not operate the engine within
the tachometer’s RED ZONE. This
may cause severe engine damage.

3-65

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLE045107
OTLE045103

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fuel Gauge

NOTICE

i Information

If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the "H" position, it indicates overheating that may damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehicle
overheats, refer to "If the Engine
Overheats" in chapter 6.

WARNING
Never remove the radiator cap or
reservoir cap when the engine is
hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could severely
burn. Wait until the engine is cool
before adding coolant to the
reservoir.

3-66

OTL045106

This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.

• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a
low fuel warning light, which will
illuminate when the fuel tank is
nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge
pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel
warning light may come on earlier
than usual due to the movement of
fuel in the tank.

WARNING

Odometer
■ Type A

Outside temperature gauge
■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.You
must stop and obtain additional
fuel as soon as possible after
the warning light comes on or
when the gauge indicator comes
close to the "E (Empty)" level.

Avoid driving with an extremely
low fuel level. Running out of fuel
could cause the engine to misfire,
damaging the catalytic converter.

OTLE045140/OTLE045141

OTLA045130/OTLA045131

The odometer indicates the total distance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.

This gauge indicates the current outside air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)

3-67

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)
Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.

Automatic transmission shift
indicator / Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission shift indicator
(If equipped)
■ Type A

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTL045134/OTL045135
OTL045132/OTL045133

This indicator displays which automatic transmission shift lever is selected.
• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
• Sports Mode
- Auto Transmission : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
- Ecoshift Dual Clutch Transmission:
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7

3-68

Shift indicator pop-up
(if equipped)

The pop-up displays the current gear
position selected for 2 seconds
(P/R/N/D).

Icy Road Warning Light
■ Type A

■ Type B

i Information
If the icy road warning light appears
while driving, you should drive more
attentively and safely refraining from
over-speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden braking or sharp turning, etc.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLE045132/OTLE045133

This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy.
When the following conditions occur,
the warning light (including Outside
Temperature Gauge) blinks 10 times
and then illuminates, and also warning chime sounds 3 times.
- The temperature on the Outside
Temperature Gauge is below
approximately 39°F (4°C).

3-69

Convenient features of your vehicle

LCD DISPLAY
LCD Modes
Modes

Symbol

Description
This mode displays information related to driving such as tripmeter, fuel
economy, etc.
For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Trip Computer

Turn By Turn (TBT)
(if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the navigation.

This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
LDWS
(If equipped)

For more information, refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
in chapter 5.

A/V

Information

User Settings

This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

This mode displays information such as tire pressure, service intervals, warning
messages related to the Blind Spot Detection system, etc.

In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

For more information on controlling the LCD Modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in the previous pages of
this chapter.

3-70

Edit, settings after engaging
parking brake

Quick Guide Help

Trip Computer Mode

Press and hold the OK button in the
User Settings Mode, the explanation
about the selected item is displayed.

■ Type A

■ Type B

This warning message appears if
you try to adjust the User Settings
while driving.
For safety, change the User Settings
after parking the vehicle and moving
the shift lever to P (Park) position.

The trip computer mode displays
information related to vehicle driving
parameters including range, fuel
economy, trip meter information and
vehicle speed.
For more information, refer to
"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

3-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045187/OTLA045188
OTL045292L

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode

LDWS Mode

■ Type A

■ Type B

A/V Mode
■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OLF044172/OLF044173

OTLA045175/OTLA045176

OLF044175/OLF044176

This mode displays the state of the
navigation.

This mode displays the state of the
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS).

This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.

For more information, refer to
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.

3-72

Information Mode
Service Interval
■ Type A

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

3
OLF044457N/OLF044456N

Service required
If you exceed the specified service
interval, a message indicating,
"Service required" will be displayed
each time you turn ON the vehicle.
To reset the service interval, press the
OK button for more than 1 second.

Service in OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service in OFF" message is displayed.

For the setting of the service interval, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.

3-73

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045181/OTLA045182

Service in
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time
you set the ignition switch or Engine
Start/Stop button to the ON position.

OTLA045296/OTLA045297

Convenient features of your vehicle

i Information
If any of the following conditions
occur, the mileage and number of days
to service may be incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.

3-74

Warning Message
If one of followings occurs, warning
messages will be displayed on the
information mode for several seconds.
- Malfunction of below systems
• Low washer fluid
• Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
• Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System
• Service reminder and so on.

User Settings Mode
In this mode, you can change setting of the instrument cluster, doors, lamps, and so on.

Driving Assist
Items

To activate or deactivate the AEB system.

For more details, refer to "Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.

Convenient features of your vehicle

AEB
(Autonomous Emergency
Braking, if equipped)

Explanation

To adjust the initial warning alert time for the Forward Collision Warning / Autonomous
FCW
Emergency Braking system. The option settings are Late, Normal, or Early.
(Forward Collision Warning,
if equipped)
For more information, refer to "Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB)" in chapter 5.
RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert,
if equipped)

To activate or deactivate the RCTA system.
For more information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in chapter 5.

3-75

Convenient features of your vehicle

Door / Liftgate
Items

Explanation
• Disable : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.

Auto Lock

• Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds 9.3mph
(15km/h).
• Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
• Disable : The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Driver Door (Key out) : Driver door will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is
removed from the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to
the OFF position.

Auto Unlock

• Driver Door (Shift P) : Driver door will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift
lever is shifted to the P (Park) position.
• Doors(Key out) : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition switch or the Engine Star/Stop button is set to the OFF position.
• Doors(Shift P) : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
(Continued)

3-76

(Continued)
Items

Two Press Unlock

Explanation
• OFF : The two press unlock function will be deactivated. Therefore, all doors will unlock if the door
is unlocked.
• ON : The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked. When the door is unlocked again within
4 seconds, all doors will unlock.

Door Lock Sound

• On : After locking the door by pressing the lock button on the transmitter, if you press the lock button again within 4 seconds, the warning sound will operate once to indicate that all doors are
locked.

Power liftgate
(if equipped)

• Off: The Power Liftgate operation will be deactivated.

Smart liftgate
(if equipped)

• Off: The Smart Liftgate function will be deactivated.

• On : The Power Liftgate operation will be activated
• On : The Smart Liftgate function will be activated

3-77

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

• Off : The Door Lock Sound feedback operation will be deactivated.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Lights
Items

Explanation

One Touch Turn Signal

• Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashes : The turn signal indicator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

Headlamp Delay

• On: The headlamp delay function will be activated.
• Off: The headlamp delay function will be deactivated.
For more information, refer to "Light" in this chapter.

Welcome Light
(if equipped)

• On: The welcome light function will be activated.
• Off: The welcome light function will be deactivated.
For more information, refer to "Welcome System" in this chapter.

3-78

Sound
Items

Explanation

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) • Off : The BSD sound function will be deactivated.
Sound (if equipped)
• On : The BSD sound function will be activated.
Welcome Sound
(if equipped)

• Off : The welcome sound function will be deactivated.
• On : The welcome sound function will be activated.

Items

Explanation

Service Interval

In this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period
(months).
• Off : The service interval function will be deactivated.
• On :You can set the service interval (mileage and months).

3-79

Convenient features of your vehicle

Service Interval

Convenient features of your vehicle

Other Features
Items

Fuel Economy Auto Reset

Explanation
• Off : The average fuel economy will not reset automatically whenever refueling.
• After Ignition : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when driving.
• After Refueling : The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.

For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Steering position
Wiper/Lights Display

If this item checked, LCD display shows a selected wiper/light mode whenever you changed its mode.

Auto Rear Wiper

• Off : The Auto Rear Wiper function will be deactivated.
• ON : If you move the shift lever from D to R when the front wiper operates, the rear wiper will operate automatically. Then, if you move the shift lever from R to D, the rear wiper will stop.

Fuel Economy Unit

Choose the fuel economy unit. (US gallon, UK gallon)

Temperature Unit

Choose the temperature unit. (°C,°F)

Tire Pressure Unit

Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar)

Gear Position Pop-up
Language

3-80

If this item checked, the steering position will be displayed on the LCD.

If this item checked, the gear position will be displayed on the LCD when you move the shift lever.
Choose the language.

Warning Messages
(if equipped)
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine

Shift to "P"

Press START button again

This warning message is displayed if
you try to start the engine with the
shift lever not in the P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position.

i Information
You can start the engine with the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position. But,
for your safety, we recommend that
you start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.

OTL045145L

• This message is displayed if you
were unable to start the vehicle
when the Start/Stop button was
pressed.
• If this occurs, attempt to start the
engine by pressing the Start/Stop
button again.
• If the warning message appears
each time you press the Start/Stop
button, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

3-81

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045146L

OTL045144L

• This message is displayed if you
try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).

Convenient features of your vehicle

Press brake pedal to start engine

Press START button with key

Low Key Battery

OTL045142L

OTL045140L

OTL045141L

• This warning message is displayed
if the Engine Start/Stop button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• In order to start the vehicle, press
the brake pedal to start the engine.

• This warning message is displayed
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is shown.
• At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks.

This warning message is displayed if
the battery of the smart key is discharged when the Engine Start/Stop
button changes to the OFF position.

3-82

Key not detected

Key not in vehicle

Align steering wheel

OTL045138L

OTL045156L/OTL045157L

• This warning message is displayed
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop button.
• When attempting to start the vehicle, always have the smart key with
you.

• This warning message is displayed
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• In order to align the steering wheel,
turn the wheel in the direction
shown while the engine is running
to straighten the steering wheel.

3-83

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045139L

This warning message is displayed if
the smart key is not detected when
you press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Steering wheel aligning is completed

OTL045158L

If the steering wheel aligning is completed after "Align steering wheel"
warning message is displayed, this
message is displayed for 2 seconds.

3-84

Door / Hood / liftgate Open

Sunroof Open

OTL045148

OTL045149

This warning message is displayed
indicating which door, or the hood, or
the liftgate is open.

This warning message is displayed
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.

Heated Steering Wheel On

Heated Steering Wheel Off

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse

OTL045167L

OTL045147L

• This warning message is displayed
if you turn off the heated steering
wheel.

For more details, refer to "Heated
Steering Wheel" in this chapter.

• This warning message is displayed
if the brake switch fuse is disconnected.
• If this message is displayed,
replace the fuse with a new one
before starting the vehicle. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.

3-85

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045166L

• This warning message is displayed
if you turn on the heated steering
wheel.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"

Low Tire Pressure

Low Washer Fluid

OTL045155L

OTL045504L

OTL045159L

• This warning message is displayed
if the fuse switch under the steering wheel is OFF.
• If this message is displayed, turn
the fuse switch on.

This warning message is displayed if
the tire pressure is low. The corresponding tire on the vehicle will be
illuminated.

• This warning message is displayed
on the service reminder mode if
the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty.
• If this warning message is displayed, have the washer fluid
reservoir refilled.

For more information, refer to
"Fuses" in chapter 7.

3-86

For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Low Fuel

Engine has overheated

Check headlight
■ Type A

OTL045160L

OTL045161L

This warning message is displayed if
the fuel tank is almost out of fuel.
When this message is displayed, the
vehicle range is approximately 30
miles.
When this message is displayed, the
low fuel level warning light in the
cluster will come on.
It is recommended to look for the
nearest fueling station and refuel as
soon as possible.

This warning message is displayed
when the engine coolant temperature is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheated
and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to "Overheating" in chapter 6.
OTL045304L

This warning message is displayed if
the headlamps are not operating
properly. The headlamp bulb may
need to be replaced. If the vehicle is
equipped with LED headlamps, have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-87

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045164L
■ Type B

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

When replacing the bulb, use the
same wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
"BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8.

Check AEB system
(if equipped)

For more details, refer to
"Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) System" in chapter 5.

OTL045168L

• This warning message is displayed
if there is a problem with the
Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system.
• In some cases, the AEB sensor or
the cover located in the lower front
grille may be dirty or obscured with
dirt or snow. Check the sensor and
cover and clean them by using a
soft cloth.
• If the warning message persists,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-88

TRIP COMPUTER
Overview
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related
to driving.

i Information

FUEL ECONOMY

• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy

To change the trip mode, toggle the
UP/DOWN arrow switch "▲ , ▼" on
the steering wheel.
For more information, refer to
"LCD Display Control" in this
chapter

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.

Trip Modes

TRIP A

• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]

TRIP B

• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]

Digital Speedometer

3-89

Convenient features of your vehicle

Trip A/B

Tripmeter (1)

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

■ Type A

• The tripmeter is the total driving
distance since the last tripmeter
reset.
- Distance range:
0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK button on the steering wheel
for more than 1 second when the
tripmeter is displayed.

• The average vehicle speed is calculated by the total driving distance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0~160 MPH or 0~240
km/h
• To reset the average vehicle
speed, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.

OTLA045187
■ Type B

i Information

OTLA045188

i Information
If you press and hold the OK button
when viewing the tripmeter, the
mileage, the average vehicle speed,
and the timer will be reset simultaneously.
3-90

• The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance has
been less than 0.19 miles (300
meters) since the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button was
turned to ON.
• The average vehicle speed will continue to be calculated and will start
to decrease if the vehicle is stopped
while the engine is still running (for
example, when the vehicle is in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

Range

Range (1)

• The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK button on the steering wheel for
more than 1 second when the
elapsed time is displayed.

■ Type A, C

• The range is the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel in the fuel
tank.
- Distance range: 1 ~ 9999 mi. or
1 ~ 9999 km
• If the estimated distance is below
1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as the range.

i Information
The elapsed time will continue to be
counted while the engine is still running (for example, when the vehicle is
in traffic or stopped at a stop light.)

OTLE045264
■ Type B, D

OTLE045265

i Information
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been interrupted, the range function may not
operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of fuel are added to the
vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehicle.
3-91

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Elapsed Time (3)

Convenient features of your vehicle

Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calculated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range:
0.0 ~ 99.9 MPG or L/100km or
km/L
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automatically.

Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK button on the
steering wheel for more than 1 second when the average fuel economy
is displayed.
For more information on the OK
button, refer to the "LCD Display
Control" in this chapter.

3-92

Automatic reset
To reset the average fuel economy
automatically whenever refueling,
select the "After refueling" mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to "LCD Display").
Under "After refueling" mode, the
average fuel economy will be cleared
to zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).

i Information
The vehicle must be driven for a minimum of 0.19 mile [0.3 km] since the
last ignition key cycle before the average fuel economy will be recalculated.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)
This mode displays the instantaneous fuel economy while driving
when the vehicle speed is greater
than 6.2 mph [10 kph].
- Fuel economy range:
0 ~ 50 MPG or 0 ~ 30 L/100km

Digital Speedometer
■ Type A

Driving Info Display

i Information

■ Type A

If "Sunroof Open" warning message
is displayed in the cluster, the Driving
Information message may not be displayed.

OTLE045266

This message shows the speed of
the vehicle (in mph.).

At the end of each driving cycle, the
Driving Info message is displayed.
This display shows the trip distance,
the average fuel economy, and the
remaining vehicle range.
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
ignition, and then goes off automatically. The information is calculated
for each ignition cycle.
If the estimated remaining vehicle
range is below 1 mile (1.6 km), the
range will display as "- - -" and a
"Low Fuel" warning message will be
displayed.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045193/OTLA045194

3-93

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning Lights

Supplemental Restraint
System Warning Light

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.

i Information
Make sure that all warning lights are
OFF after starting the engine. If any
light is still ON, this indicates a situation that needs attention.

3-94

For more information, refer to the
"Seat Belts" in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light

Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dualdiagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure is
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

3-95

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds.
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.

If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low:
1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2. With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
information, refer to "Brake
Fluid" in chapter 7). After adding
brake fluid, check all brake components for fluid leaks. If a brake fluid
leak is found, or if the warning light
remains on, or if the brakes do not
operate properly, do not drive the
vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-96

Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate
at the same time while driving:
When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

WARNING
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light

Brake force Distribution (EBD)
System Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on or
both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Lights are on, the
speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter
may not work. Also, the EPS Warning
Light may illuminate and the steering
effort may increase or decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Electronic Power
Steering (EPS)
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-97

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information - Electronic

Convenient features of your vehicle

Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-98

NOTICE

- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may cause
damage to the emission control
systems which could affect drivability and/or fuel economy.
NOTICE

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible
which could result in loss of
engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Charging System
Warning Light
If this warning light comes on while
the engine is running, the battery is
not being charged. Immediately turn
off all electrical accessories. Try not
to use electrically operated controls,
such as the power windows. Keep the
engine running; starting the engine
will quickly discharge the battery.

If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the electrical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light

If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more information, refer to "Engine Oil" in
chapter 7). If the level is low, add
oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil and restarting the engine
or if oil is not available, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical concern that needs to be repaired before
you can continue driving. In this
case, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

- Engine Oil Pressure Warning light
To prevent severe engine damage,
after the Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light is illuminated and as
soon as it is safe to do so, turn the
engine off and check the oil level.
If the oil level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level and start the
engine again. If the light stays on
with the engine running, turn the
engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Low Fuel Level
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Add fuel as soon as possible.

NOTICE

- Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below "E" can cause the
engine to misfire and damage the
catalytic converter.

3-99

Convenient features of your vehicle

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of each underinflated tire
is displayed on the LCD display).
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains ON
after blinking for approximately 60
seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON
and OFF in 3 second intervals:
When there is a malfunction with the
TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
For more information, refer to
"Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

WARNING
Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.

3-100

Autonomous
Emergency Braking
(AEB) Warning light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When the AEB system is turned off.
• When the radar sensor or cover is
blocked with dirt or snow. Check
the sensor and cover and clean
them by using a soft cloth.
• When there is a malfunction with
AEB. In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

All Wheel Drive (AWD)
Warning Light
(if equipped)

Master Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:
This warning light illuminates if one
of the exterior bulbs (headlamp, taillamp, foglamp, etc.) is not operating
properly. One of the bulbs may need
to be replaced. If the vehicle is
equipped with LED headlamps, have
the vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light illuminates
• When there is a malfunction in
operation in any of the following
systems:
- Low washer fluid
- Blind Spot Detection (BSD) malfunction (if equipped)
- Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) malfunction (if equipped)
- Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
- Service reminder and so on.
To identify the details of the warning,
look at the LCD display.

i Information
When replacing the bulb, use the same
wattage bulb.
For more information, refer to
"BULB WATTAGE" in chapter 8.

3-101

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AWD system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Headlight Warning
Light

Convenient features of your vehicle

Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.

3-102

Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light

Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
the Engine Start/Stop button to the
ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC system by pressing the ESC OFF button.

This indicator light illuminates for
up to 30 seconds:
When the vehicle detects the smart
key in the vehicle with the Engine
Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON
position.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.

For more information, refer to
"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"
in chapter 5.

This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you cannot start the
engine.

This indicator light illuminates for
2 seconds and goes off:
If the smart key is in the vehicle and
the Engine Start/Stop button is ON,
but the vehicle cannot detect the
smart key.
In this case, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Beam Indicator
Light

This indicator light blinks:
When you operate the turn signal
indicator.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.

If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system.
- The turn signal indicator light illuminates but does not blink
- The turn signal indicator light
blinks rapidly
- The turn signal indicator light
does not illuminate at all
If either of these conditions occur,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery voltage of the
smart key is low.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start the
engine if you press the ignition
switch or the Engine Start/Stop button with the smart key. (For more
information, refer to "Starting
the Engine" in chapter 5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator
Light

3-103

Convenient features of your vehicle

Light ON Indicator
Light

Cruise Indicator Light
(if equipped)

Cruise SET Indicator
Light

This indicator light illuminates:
When the tail lights or headlights are
on.

This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control system is
enabled.

This indicator light illuminates:
When the cruise control speed is set.

Front Fog Indicator
Light (if equipped)

For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.

This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.

3-104

For more information, refer to
"Cruise Control System" in chapter 5.

ECO Mode Indicator
Light

This indicator light illuminates:
When you select "SPORT" mode as
drive mode.

This indicator light illuminates :
When you select "ECO" mode as
drive mode.

For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" in chapter 5.

For more information, refer to
"LCD Display" in this chapter.

Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [White] When system operating
conditions are not satisfied or
when the sensor does not detect
the lane line.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane departure warning system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.
For more information, refer to
“Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 5.

3-105

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

SPORT Mode Indicator
Light

Convenient features of your vehicle

All Wheel Drive (AWD)
LOCK Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you select AWD Lock mode
by pressing the AWD LOCK button.
- The AWD LOCK mode is to transfer a portion of the drive torque to
the rear wheels for increased
traction on wet pavement, snow
covered roads or when driving off
road.

CAUTION
AWD Lock Mode
Do not use the AWD lock mode
on dry paved roads. Doing so
can cause abnormal noise or
vibration, and may damage the
AWD system.

3-106

Downhill Brake Control
(DBC) Indicator Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you turn the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you activate the DBC system by pressing the DBC button.
This warning light blinks:
• When the DBC is operating.
This warning light illuminates yellow:
• When there is a malfunction with
the DBC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected
by
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
For more details, refer to
"Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
System" in chapter 5.

LIGHT
Exterior Lights
Lighting control
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

DRL OFF position
AUTO light position
Parking lamp position
Headlamp position

OTLA045077

AUTO light position
The parking lamp and headlamp will
be turned ON or OFF automatically
depending on the amount of light
outside the vehicle.
Even with the AUTO light feature in
operation, it is recommended to
manually turn ON the lamps when
driving at night or in a fog, or when
you enter dark areas, such as tunnels and parking facilities.

3-107

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045251

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

• Do not cover or spill anything on
the sensor (1) located in front of
the instrument panel.
• Do not clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner may
leave a light film which could
interfere with sensor operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work
properly.

OTLA045253

OTLA045317

Parking lamp position (
)
The parking lamp, license plate lamp
and instrument panel lamp are turned
ON.

Headlamp position ( )
The headlamp, parking lamp, license
plate lamp and instrument panel lamp
are turned ON.

i Information
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position to turn on the headlamp.

3-108

High beam operation

WARNING
Do not use high beam when there
are other vehicles approaching
you. Using high beam could
obstruct the other driver’s vision.

OTLA045255

To turn on the high beam headlamp,
push the lever away from you. The
lever will return to its original position.
The high beam indicator will light
when the headlamp high beams are
switched on.
To turn off the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you. The low
beams will turn on.

To flash the high beam headlamp,
pull the lever towards you, then
release the lever. The high beams
will remain ON as long as you hold
the lever towards you.

3-109

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045254

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change
signals

OTLA045257

To signal a turn, push down on the
lever for a left turn or up for a right
turn in position (A). To signal a lane
change, move the turn signal lever
slightly and hold it in position (B). The
lever will return to the original position when released or when the turn
is completed.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.

3-110

One touch turn signal function
To activate the One Touch Turn
Signal function, move the turn signal
lever slightly and then release it. The
turn signal indicators will blink 3, 5,
or 7 times, depending on the User
Settings on the LCD display.
You can activate or deactivate the
One Touch Turn Signal function or
choose the number of blinking (3, 5,
or 7) from the User Settings Mode
(Light) on the LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.

Front fog lamp (if equipped)

OTLE045157

Fog lamps are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc. Use
the switch next to the headlamp switch
to turn the fog lamps ON and OFF.
1. Turn on the parking lamp.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog lamp position.
3. To turn off the front fog lamp, turn
the light switch to the front fog
lamp position again or turn off the
parking lamp.

NOTICE

When in operation, the fog lamps
consume large amounts of vehicle
electrical power. Only use the fog
lamps when visibility is poor.

Headlamp delay function

The purpose of this feature is to prevent the battery from being discharged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lamp when the
key is removed (remote key) or when
the driver turns the engine off (smart
key) and opens the driver-side door.
With this feature, the parking lamps
will turn off automatically if the driver
parks on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lamps on
when the engine is turned off, perform
the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and
ON again using the light switch on
the steering column.

If the key is removed from the ignition
switch or placed in the ACC position or
the LOCK/OFF position with the headlamps ON, the headlamps (and/or
parking lamps) remain on for about 5
minutes. However, if the driver’s door
is opened and closed, the headlights
are turned off after 15 seconds.
However, with the engine off if the driver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlamps (and/or parking lamps) are
turned off after 15 seconds.
The headlamps (and/or parking lamps)
can be turned off by pressing the lock
button on the remote key or smart key
twice or turning the light switch to the
OFF or AUTO position. However, if you
turn the light switch to the AUTO position when it is dark outside, the headlamps will not be turned off.

3-111

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Battery saver function

Convenient features of your vehicle

You can activate or deactivate the
Headlamp Delay function from the
User Settings Mode (Light) on the
LCD display.
For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.

3-112

NOTICE

If the driver gets out of the vehicle
through other doors (except driver’s door), the battery saver function does not operate and the
headlamp delay function does not
turn off automatically. Therefore, It
causes the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure
to turn off the headlamp switch
before getting out of the vehicle.

Daytime running light (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
can make it easier for others to see
the front of your vehicle during the
day, especially after dawn and before
sunset.
The DRL will turn off when:
1. The light switch is not in the AUTO
position.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. The engine is turned off.

Welcome System (if equipped)
Welcome light

Interior lamp
When the interior lamp switch is in
the DOOR position and all doors (and
tailgate) are closed and locked, the
room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the room lamp will turn off
immediately.

For more information, refer to the
"LCD Display" section in this
chapter.

3-113

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045076

Door handle lamp (if equipped)
When all the doors (and tailgate) are
closed and locked, the door handle
lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
• When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
• When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.

Headlamp and Parking lamp
When the headlamp (lamp switch in
the headlamp or AUTO position) is on
and all doors (and tailgate) are locked
and closed, the parking lamp and
headlamp will come on for 15 seconds
if/or any of the below is performed.
• When the door unlock button is
pressed on the remote key or
smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button on the remote key or
smart key the parking lamp and
headlamp will turn off immediately.
You can activate or deactivate the
Welcome Light from the User Settings
Mode (Light) on the LCD display.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior Lights

WARNING
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.The interior lights may obscure your view
and cause an accident.
NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the engine
is turned off or the battery will discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

Front lamps

The interior lamps will automatically
go off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off and the
doors closed. If a door is opened, the
lamp will go off 40 minutes after the
engine is turned off. If the doors are
locked by the remote key or smart
key and the vehicle enters the armed
stage of the theft alarm system, the
lamps will go off five seconds later.

■ Type A

OTL045079
■ Type B

OTL045080

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)

3-114

Front
Front
Front
Front

Map Lamp
Room Lamp
Door Lamp
Room Lamp

Front map lamp
• Press the map lamp cover (1) to
turn ON the map lamp. Re-press
the map lamp cover to turn OFF
the map lamp.
Front Room Lamp
•

:
(Type A) Press the button to turn
OFF the map lamp for the front/rear
seats.

Rear lamps
■ Type A

•

:
The map lamp for the front/rear
seats is automatically turned ON
for approximately 30 seconds,
when a door is opened.
The map lamp for the front/rear
seats is automatically turned ON
for approximately 15 seconds,
when the remote key (smart key)
unlocks the doors. The map lamp
fades out, when the ignition switch
is pressed to the ON position in 15
seconds. The map lamp remains
ON up to 20 minutes, when a door
is opened with the ignition switch in
the either the ACC or OFF position.

3
OTL045081
■ Type B

OTL045082

Rear Room Lamp Switch (

Press this switch to turn the room
lamp on and off.

3-115

Convenient features of your vehicle

•

:
(Type A) Press the button to turn
ON the map lamp for the front/rear
seats.
(Type B) Press the button to turn
ON the map lamp for the front/rear
seats. Re-press the button to turn
OFF the map lamp.

Front Door Lamp

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

Liftgate room lamp

Glove box lamp

Do not leave the lamp switches on
for an extended period of time
when the engine is turned off.

OTL045083

OTLA045084

The liftgate room lamp comes on
when the tailgate is opened.

The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
If the glove box is not closed, the
lamp will turn off after 20 minutes.

NOTICE

The liftgate lamp comes on as
long as the liftgate is open. To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the liftgate
securely after using the liftgate.

3-116

NOTICE

To prevent possible battery discharge, securely close the glove
box after use.

Vanity mirror lamp

CAUTION
Vanity mirror lamp
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvisor.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045085

The vanity mirror lamp is located in
the headliner just behind the sun
visor. Push the switch to turn the vanity light on or off.
•
: The lamp will turn on if this
button is pressed.
•
: The lamp will turn off if this
button is pressed.

3-117

Convenient features of your vehicle

WIPERS AND WASHERS
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· INT – Intermittent wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Intermittent control wipe time
adjustment
OTLE045161

C : Wash with brief wipes
D : Rear wiper/washer control
· HI – High wiper speed
· LO – Low wiper speed
· OFF – Off

Windshield Wipers
Operates as follows when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is
held in this position.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation.
INT : Wiper operates intermittently at
the same wiping intervals. To
vary the speed setting, move
the speed control lever.
LO : The wiper operates continuously at a low speed.
HI : The wiper operates continuously
at a higher speed.

i Information
E :Wash with brief wipes (rear)
OTLA045318

3-118

If there is heavy accumulation of snow
or ice on the windshield, defrost the
windshield for about 10 minutes, or
until the snow and/or ice is removed
before using the windshield wipers to
ensure proper operation.
If you do not remove the snow and/or
ice before using the wiper and washer,
it may damage the wiper and washer
system.

If equipped with the Headlamp
Washer, washer fluid will be sprayed
on the headlamp at the same time you
operate the windshield washer when:
1. The ignition switch is in the ON
position.
2. The light switch is in the headlamp
position.

Windshield Washers

OTLE045164

In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and
wiper operation will continue until you
release the lever. If the washer does
not work, you may need to add washer fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

When the outside temperature is
below freezing, ALWAYS warm
the windshield using the
defroster to prevent the washer
fluid from freezing on the windshield and obscuring your vision
which could result in an accident and serious injury or death.

• To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers or windshield, do not
operate the wipers when the
windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the wiper
arms and other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• To prevent possible damage to
the wipers and washer system,
use anti-freezing washer fluids
in the winter season or cold
weather.

3-119

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear window wiper and washer
switch

OTLE045166

OTLE045165

The rear window wiper and washer
switch is located at the end of the
wiper and washer switch lever. Turn
the switch to the desired position to
operate the rear wiper and washer.
HI – High wiper speed
LO – Low wiper speed
OFF – Off

3-120

Push the lever away from you to
spray rear washer fluid and to run the
rear wipers 1~3 cycles. The spray
and wiper operation will continue
until you release the lever.

DRIVER ASSIST SYSTEM
This is a supplemental system that
provides a view of the area behind
the vehicle through the A/V display
while the vehicle is in the R (Reverse)
position.

Rear View Camera

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the Rear
View Camera when backingup.
• ALWAYS look around your
vehicle to make sure there are
no objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any
direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven
close to objects, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children.
NOTICE

OTL045052

Always keep the camera lens
clean. The camera may not work
normally if the lens is covered
with dirt or snow.

The Rear View Camera will activate
when the engine is running and the
shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

3-121

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045053

The Rear View Camera is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the middle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear Parking Assist System
(if equipped)

WARNING
• ALWAYS look around your vehi-

Sensor
OTLE045334

The Rear Parking Assist System
assists the driver during reverse
movement of the vehicle by chiming
if any object is sensed within approximately 50 in (120 cm) behind the
vehicle.
This system is a supplemental system that senses objects within the
range and location of the sensors, it
cannot detect objects in other areas
where sensors are not installed.

3-122

cle to make sure there are not
any objects or obstacles before
moving the vehicle in any direction to prevent a collision.
• Always pay close attention
when the vehicle is driven close
to objects, particularly pedestrians, and especially children.
• Be aware that some objects
may not be visible on the
screen or be detected by the
sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effectiveness of the sensor.

Operation of the Rear Parking
Assist System
Operating condition
• This system will activate when
backing up with the ignition switch
in the ON position. However, if the
vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph
(5km/h), the system may not detect
objects.
• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h), the system will not warn
you even though objects are
detected.
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first.

Types of warning sound and indicator
Types of warning sound
When an object is 24 to 47 in
(60 to 120 cm) from the rear
bumper, the warning sound
beeps intermittently.

When an object is within 12 in
(30 cm) from the rear bumper,
the warning sound beeps
continuously.

• The indicator may differ from the
illustration as objects or sensors
status. If the indicator blinks,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• If the audible warning does not
sound or if the buzzer sounds
intermittently when shifting into R
(Reverse) position, this may indicate a malfunction with the
Parking Assist System. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.

To turn off the Rear Parking
Assist System

OTLA045012

Push the button to turn off the Rear
Parking Assist System. The indicator
light on the button will turn on.

3-123

Convenient features of your vehicle

When an object is 12 to 24 in
(30 to 60 cm) from the rear
bumper, the warning sound
beeps more frequently.

Indicator

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Non-operational conditions of
Parking Assist System
The Rear Parking Assist System
may not operate normally when:
• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with dirt or
debris such as snow or ice, or the
sensor cover is blocked.

3-124

There is a possibility of the Rear
Parking Assist System malfunction
when:
• Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
• Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motorcycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
• Heavy rain or water spray is present.
• Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones are present near the sensor.
• The sensor is covered with snow.
• Any non-factory equipment or accessories have been installed, or if the
vehicle bumper height or sensor
installation has been modified.

Detecting range may decrease when:
• Outside air temperature is extremely hot or cold.
• Undetectable objects smaller than
40 inches (1 m) and narrower than
6 inches (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
• Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
• Objects, which tend to absorb sensor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.

Rear parking assist system
precautions

WARNING

Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or damage to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a Rear
Parking Assist System. Always
drive safely and cautiously.

Convenient features of your vehicle

• The rear parking assist system
may not operate consistently in
some circumstances depending on
the speed of the vehicle and the
shapes of the objects detected.
• The rear parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified or damaged. Any
non-factory installed equipment or
accessories may also interfere with
the sensor performance.
• The sensor may not recognize
objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)
from the sensor, or it may sense an
incorrect distance. Use caution.
• When the sensor is blocked with
snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the rear
parking assist system may be inoperative until the snow or ice melts,
or the debris is removed. Use a
soft cloth to wipe debris away from
the sensor.
• Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high
pressure washer. Doing so may
cause the sensors to fail to operate
normally.

3-125

Convenient features of your vehicle

DEFROSTER
NOTICE

The rear window defroster is comprised of conductors bonded to
the inside surface of the rear window. Never use sharp instruments
or window cleaners that contain
abrasives to clean the window.
Damage to the rear window
defroster may result.
If you want to defrost and defog
the front windshield, refer to the
"Windshield
Defrosting
and
Defogging" section in this chapter.

• To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located on the climate control instrument panel display. The indicator on the rear window defroster button illuminates
when the defroster is ON.
• To turn off the defroster, press the
rear window defroster button again.

Rear Window Defroster
■ Manual climate control system

i Information
OTL045205
■ Automatic climate control system

• If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
• The rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately
20 minutes or when the ignition
switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.

Outside rearview mirror defroster
OTLA045517

The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the interior and exterior of the rear
window, while the engine is running.

3-126

If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Fan speed control knob
2. Temperature control knob
3. Mode selection buttons
4. Front windshield defroster button
5. Rear window defroster button
6. Air intake control button
7. A/C (Air conditioning) button

OTL045207

3-127

Convenient features of your vehicle

Heating and Air Conditioning
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling :
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air or recirculated
air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.

*
OTLE045173

* : if equipped

3-128

Mode selection
Face-Level (B, D, F)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.

Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters, and side vents.

OTL045208

The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Four
symbols are used to represent Face,
Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and
Front Defrost air position

Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield, side
window defrosters, and side vents.

Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window
defrosters.
In this mode the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.

3-129

Convenient features of your vehicle

Front Air Defrost (A, D)
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E, F)

Convenient features of your vehicle

MAX A/C-Level (B, D)

Instrument panel vents

OTL045209

The MAX A/C mode is used to cool
the inside of the vehicle faster. Air
flow is directed toward the upper
body and face.
In this mode, the air conditioning and
the recirculated air position will be
selected automatically.

3-130

Temperature control

OTL045086

The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.

OTL045210

The temperature will
turning the knob to the
The temperature will
turning the knob to the

increase by
right.
decrease by
left.

Air intake control

i Information
Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045211

This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

Recirculated air position
The indicator light on the
button illuminates when
the recirculated air position is selected.
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger compartment will be drawn
through the climate control system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.
Outside (fresh) air position
The indicator light on the
button will turn off when
the outside (fresh) air
position is selected.
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

3-131

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

Fan speed control

Air conditioning

• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, that may cause
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. Set the air
intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position as much as
possible while driving.
• Continued use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
(without the air conditioning
selected) may allow humidity
to increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause serious injury or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.

3-132

OTL045212

OTL045213

Turn the knob to the right to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
knob to the left to decrease fan
speed and airflow.
Setting the fan speed control knob to
the “0” position turns off the fan.

Press the A/C button to turn the system on (indicator light will illuminate)
and off.

System Operation
Ventilation

Heating
1. Select the Floor Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5. If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system on.
If the windshield fogs up, select the
Floor & Defrost
mode or press
the Front Defrost
mode.

Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, switch the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position. The indicator
light on the button will turn OFF.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
rotate the temperature control knob
to the left-most position (MAX AC).
Then set the fan speed control knob
to the highest speed.

3-133

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Select the Face Level
mode.
2. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.

Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the car through the
ventilation system, temporarily set
the air intake control to the recirculated air position. Return the control to the fresh air position when
the dust or odor has dissipated.
This will help keep the driver alert
and comfortable.
• To prevent the inside of the windshield from fogging, set the air
intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired
position, turn on the air conditioning
system, and adjust the temperature
control to desired temperature.

Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic
when outside temperatures are
high. Air conditioning system
operation can cause engine overheating. Continue to use the blower fan, but turn the air conditioning system off if the engine temperature gauge indicates engine
overheating.

3-134

Air conditioning system operation
tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• After sufficient cooling has been
achieved, switch back from the
recirculated air to the fresh outside
air position.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system with the windows and sunroof closed.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month for a few minutes to
ensure maximum system performance.

• If you operate the air conditioner
excessively,
the
difference
between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, set the mode selection button to the
position and set the
fan speed control knob to the lowest speed setting.

Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant

System Maintenance
Climate control air filter

Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Evaporator
core

Heater core
1LDA5047

This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent climate
control filter inspections and changes
are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.

Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

3-135

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Outside air

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air Conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example

The symbols and specifications on
the label refer to the following:
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubricant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of the air conditioning refrigerant label.

ODH043365

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

3-136

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
■ Type A

1. Driver’s temperature control knob
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. SYNC button
5. OFF button
6. Fan speed control button
7. Mode selection button
■ Type B

8. Air conditioning button
9. Front windshield defrost button
10. Rear window defrost button
11. Air intake control button
12. Climate control information screen

OTLE045267R/OTLE045266R

3-137

Convenient features of your vehicle

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Heating and Air
Conditioning

OTL045216

OTL045215

The Automatic Climate Control
System is controlled by setting the
desired temperature.
1. Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically by the temperature setting you select.

3-138

2. Turn the temperature control knob
to the desired temperature. If the
temperature is set to the lowest
setting (Lo), the air conditioning
system will operate continuously.

To turn the automatic operation off,
select any button of the following:
- Mode selection button
- Front windshield defroster button
(Press the button one more time
to deselect the front windshield
defroster function. The 'AUTO'
sign will illuminate on the information display once again.)
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be controlled manually while other functions
operate automatically.
For your convenience and to improve
the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the
temperature to 73°F (23°C).

Manual Heating and Air
Conditioning

NOTICE

A solar compensation sensor is
located inside the vehicle on the
center of the dash near the front
windshield. In order to ensure
optimum control of the heating
and cooling system, never block
the sensor or place anything near
the sensor while the climate control system is operating.

3-139

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045246

The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected.
When pressing any button except the
AUTO button while using automatic
operation, the functions not selected
will be controlled automatically.
1. Start the engine.
2. Set the mode to the desired position.
To improve the effectiveness of
heating and cooling:
- Heating:
- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4. Set the air intake control to the
outside (fresh) air position.
5. Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6. If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
7. Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection
■ Type A

OTL045291R
■ Type B

*
OTL045249

* : if equipped

3-140

OTLE045217

The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.

The air flow outlet direction is cycled
as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.

■ Type A

Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.

3
OTLE045218R

Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F)

■ Type B

Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.

OTLE045263R

Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.

3-141

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.

Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F)

Convenient features of your vehicle

Temperature control

■ Front

■ Driver’s side

■ Passenger’s side

OTL045086
■ Rear (if equipped)

OTL045220
OTL045219

OTL045087

Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened ( )
or closed ( ) separately using the
thumbwheel.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivered from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
3-142

Turn the knob to the right to increase
the temperature. Turn the knob to the
left to decrease the temperature.
The temperature will increase or
decrease by 1°F/0.5°C for each button press. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously.

Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
• Press the "SYNC" button to operate the driver and passenger side
temperature equally.
The passenger side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side temperature.
• Turn the left temperature control
knob. The driver and passenger
side temperature will be adjusted
equally.

Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually
Press the "SYNC" button again to
operate the driver and passenger
side temperature individually. The
button indicator will turn off.

Both the temperature unit on the
cluster LCD display and climate control screen will change.

Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air
from the passenger
compartment will be
drawn through the heating system and heated
or cooled according to
the function selected.

■ Type A

OTLE045283
■ Type B

Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh)
air position selected, air
enters the vehicle from
outside and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.

i Information
OTLE045256R

This button is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position.

Prolonged use of the air conditioning
with the recirculated air position
selected will result in excessively dry
air in the passenger compartment.

3-143

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
To change the temperature unit from
°F to °C or °C to °F:
- On the instrument cluster, go to
User Settings Mode ➝ Other
Features ➝ Temperature Unit.
- Press the AUTO button for 3 seconds while pressing the OFF button.
(Automatic climate control system)

Air intake control

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

Fan speed control

i Information

■ Type A

For better sound quality, fan speed
may automatically slow down for a
couple of minutes when you activate
voice recognition or hands free.

3-144

OTLE045284R
■ Type B

OTLE045222R

The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pushing the fan
speed control button.
Pressing the OFF button turns off the
fan.

Air conditioning

OFF mode

■ Type A

System Operation
Ventilation

■ Type A

OTLE045286R
■ Type B

OTLE045285R
■ Type B

OTLE045223R

OTLE045224R

Push the A/C button to manually turn
the system on (indicator light will illuminate) and off.

Push the OFF button of the front to
turn off the air climate control system. You can still operate the mode
and air intake buttons as long as the
ignition switch is in the ON position.

3-145

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

3-146

Air conditioning
All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning
Systems are filled with environmentally friendly R-134a refrigerant.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the air conditioning button.
3. Set the mode to the Face Level
mode.
4. Set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. However,
prolonged operation of the recirculated air position will excessively
dry the air. In this case, switch the
air intake control to the outside
(fresh) air position.
5. Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
When maximum cooling is desired,
rotate the temperature control knob
until the temperature display indicates Lo. Then set the fan speed
control button to the highest speed.

NOTICE

• If you operate the air conditioner
excessively,
the
difference
between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up,
causing loss of visibility. In this
case, toggle the mode selection
button to the
position and set
the fan speed control knob to the
lowest speed setting.

System Maintenance
Climate control air filter
Outside air
Recirculated
air

Blower
Climate control
air filter

Evaporator
core

Heater core
1LDA5047

This filter is installed behind the glove
box. It filters the dust or other pollutants that enter the vehicle through the
heating and air conditioning system.
Have the climate control air filter
replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer according to the maintenance
schedule. If the car is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent climate
control air filter inspections and
changes are required.
If the air flow rate suddenly decreases, the system should be checked at
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
3-147

Convenient features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative influence on the air
conditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
NOTICE

It is important that the correct
type and amount of oil and refrigerant is used. Otherwise, damage
to the compressor and abnormal
system operation may occur.

WARNING
Because the refrigerant is at very high
pressure, the air conditioning
system
should only be serviced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, otherwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
The air conditioning system should
be serviced by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Air Conditioning refrigerant label
■ Example

ODH043365

The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

3-148

WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
WARNING
Windshield heating

NOTICE

If the engine temperature is still
cold after starting, then a brief
engine warm up period may be
required for the vented air flow to
become warm or hot.

Manual Climate Control System
To defog inside windshield

OTL045225

1. Select any fan speed except “0”
position.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Select the
or
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air will be selected automatically. Additionally, the air
conditioning will automatically operate if the mode is selected to the
position.
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, press the corresponding button manually.

3-149

Convenient features of your vehicle

Do not use the
or
position during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility could cause an accident resulting in serious injury
or death. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the
position and fan
speed control knob or button to
a lower speed.

• For maximum windshield defrosting, set the temperature control
knob to the highest temperature
setting and the fan control knob to
the highest fan speed. Select the
front defrost button on the climate
control display. After the engine
warm-up period, warm air will be
directed to the front windshield.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set the
mode to the floor-defrost position.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability
of fogging up the inside of the windshield.

Convenient features of your vehicle

To defrost outside windshield

Automatic Climate Control
System
To defog inside windshield

To defrost outside windshield

■ Type A
■ Type A

■ Type B

OTL045226

OTL045228

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot position.
3. Select the
position.
4. The outside (fresh) air and air conditioning will be selected automatically.

1. Set the fan speed to the highest
(extreme right) position.
2. Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.

3-150

OTL045227

1. Select desired fan speed.
2. Select desired temperature.
3. Press the defroster button (
).
4. The outside (fresh) air position will
be selected automatically.
If the outside (fresh) air position is
not selected automatically, adjust the
corresponding button manually.
If the
position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.

Defogging logic

Manual climate control system

Automatic climate control system

To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to
certain conditions such as
or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.

OTL045230

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The climate control information
screen will blink 3 times in 0.5 second intervals. This indicates that the
defogging logic is cancelled.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the defogging logic
will be enabled as the default logic.

If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the defogging logic
will be enabled as the default logic.

3-151

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045229

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
position.
2. Press the defroster button (
).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times in 0.5 second intervals. This indicates that the defogging logic is cancelled.

Convenient features of your vehicle

CLIMATE CONTROL ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Automatic Ventilation
When the ignition is ON or when the
engine is running and the outside
temperature is below 59°F (15°C),
the automatic ventilation feature will
activate if the recirculated air intake
position is selected for more than 5
minutes while A/C is off and floor
mode is selected. In this condition
the air intake position will automatically switch to the outside (fresh) air
intake position.

To cancel or reset the Automatic
Ventilation
When the air conditioning system is
on, select Face Level
mode and
while pressing the A/C button, press
the recirculated air position button
five times within three seconds.

3-152

Sunroof Inside Air
Recirculation
When the heater or air conditioning
system is on with the sunroof
opened, the outside (fresh) air position will be automatically selected. At
this time, if you press the recirculated
air position button, the recirculated
air position will be selected but will
change back to the outside (fresh) air
position after 3 minutes.
When the sunroof is closed, the air
intake position will return to the original position that was selected.

STORAGE COMPARTMENT
WARNING

Center Console Storage

Glove Box

Never store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended periods.

ALWAYS keep the storage compartment covers closed securely while driving. Items inside
your vehicle are moving as fast
as the vehicle. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if you are
involved in an accident the
items may fly out of the compartment and may cause an
injury if they strike the driver or
passenger.
NOTICE

OTL045089

To open :
Press the button (1).

OTL045090

To open the glove box, pull the handle
and the glove box will automatically
open. Close the glove box after use.

WARNING
ALWAYS close the glove box
door after use.
An open glove box door can
cause serious injury to the passenger in an accident, even if the
passenger is wearing a seat belt.

To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
3-153

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

To close:
Push back into position.
Make sure the sunglass holder is
closed while driving.

Sunglass Holder
■ Type A

WARNING
• Do not keep objects except

OTL045275
■ Type B

OTL045091

To open:
Press the cover and the holder will
slowly open. Place your sunglasses
in the compartment door with the
lenses facing out.

3-154

sunglasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can
be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or
an accident, possibly injuring
the passengers in the vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not attempt to force sunglasses into the sunglass
holder. If the sunglasses
become jammed and you try
to open it forcibly, personal
injury may occur.

INTERIOR FEATURES
Cup Holder

Rear

■ Front

Pull the armrest down to use the cup
holders.

WARNING
• Avoid abrupt acceleration or

■ Rear

OTLE045096

Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sunlight and do not leave
them in a hot vehicle. Doing so
may cause the can or bottle to
overheat and explode.
NOTICE

• Keep your drinks sealed while
driving to prevent spilling your
drink. If liquid spills, it may get
into the vehicle’s electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts.
• When cleaning spilled liquids, do
not dry the cup holder at high
temperature. This may damage
the cup holder.

Cups or small beverages cups may
be placed in the cup holders.

3-155

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

OTLA045094

braking while driving your
vehicle when the cup holder is
in use to prevent spilling your
drink. If hot liquid spills, you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could cause loss
of vehicle control resulting in
an accident.
• Do not place uncovered or
unsecured cups, bottles,
cans, etc., in the cup holder
containing hot liquid while the
vehicle is in motion. Injuries
may result in the event of sudden stop or collision.

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunvisor

Power Outlet

NOTICE

Close the vanity mirror cover
securely and return the sunvisor
to its original position after use.

■ Front

WARNING
For your safety, do not block
your view when using the sunvisor.
OTL045098
OTLA045097

To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor, for a side window, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the side
(2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor forward or backward (4) as needed. Use the ticket
holder (5) to hold tickets.

3-156

NOTICE

• Do not put several tickets in the
ticket holder at one time. This
could cause damage to the ticket holder.
• Avoid putting a plastic card
such as a credit card in the ticket holder located in the outside
of the sunvisor.This could cause
damage to the plastic card.

■ Rear (if equipped)

OTL045516

The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or
other devices designed to operate
with vehicle electrical systems. The
devices should draw less than 180 W
with the engine running.

WARNING
Avoid electrical shocks. Do not
place your fingers or foreign
objects (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet or touch the power outlet
with a wet hand.

To prevent damage to the Power
Outlets :
• Use the power outlet only when
the engine is running and
remove the accessory plug after
use. Using the accessory plug
for prolonged periods of time
with the engine off could cause
the battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 180 W
in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power outlet.
(Continued)

Clock

WARNING
Do not adjust the clock while
driving, you may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

NOTICE

(Continued)
• Close the cover when not in use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices may
cause excessive audio static
and malfunctions in other electronic systems or devices used
in your vehicle.
• Push the plug in as far as it will
go. If good contact is not made,
the plug may overheat and the
fuse may blow.
• Plug in battery equipped electrical/electronic devices with
reverse current protection. The
current from the battery may
flow into the vehicle’s electrical/electronic system and cause
system malfunction.

3-157

Convenient features of your vehicle

With Audio system

The ignition switch must be in the
ACC position or the ON position.

With Navigation system

To adjust the time, AM/PM, and date:

OTL045260

Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
To set the time:

Press the SETUP CLOCK button (1)
over 2 seconds to select the time
screen. Then, the number flashes on
the LCD display. Rotate the volume
knob (2) to the right to adjust the
time. Re-press the volume knob (2)
to save it.
Repeat the above procedure to
adjust time, AM/PM and date. It proceeds in the following order.
“Hour → Minute → AM/PM → Year →
Month → Date”

OTL045261

The driver can adjust the time in the
AVN (Audio, Video, and Navigation)
system.
For more information, refer to the
CAR MULTI MEDIA SYSTEM.

3-158

GPS Time check
The clock is automatically updated
through the navigation system.

WARNING

■ Rear

Do not hang other objects
except clothes. In an accident it
may cause vehicle damage or
personal injury.

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

GPS Time non-check
The clock can be manually adjusted.
1. Select the "System Settings" on
the "INFO/Setup" screen.
2. Select the "Clock Settings".
3. Select "Time Settings" on the
screen
4. Select the "Time Format" to the 12
hour or 24 hour format.
For more information, please refer to
the manual that was separately supplied with your vehicle.

Clothes Hanger

OTL045099
■ Door post

OTL045270

To hang items, pull the hanger down.
These hangers are not designed to
hold large or heavy items.

3-159

Convenient features of your vehicle

Plastic bag hook

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

WARNING

OTL045273

OTL045231

To hang a plastic bag, open the tailgate and find a hook attached on
rear seat back.

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors
to attach the front floor mats to the
vehicle. The anchors on the front
floor carpet keep the floor mats from
sliding forward.

WARNING
Do not hang other objects
except a plastic bag. In an accident it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury.

3-160

The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat
to the vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle’s floor mat anchor(s)
before driving the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that
cannot be firmly attached to
the vehicle’s floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top
of one another (e.g. all-weather rubber mat on top of a carpeted floor mat). Only a single
floor mat should be installed
in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver’s side
floor mat anchors that are
designed to securely hold the
floor mat in place. To avoid any
interference with pedal operation, HYUNDAI recommends
that the HYUNDAI floor mat
designed for use in your vehicle
be installed.

Luggage net (holder)

CAUTION

Cargo security screen
(if equipped)

To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.

OTLA045321

To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the four
holders located in the cargo area to
attach the luggage net.
If your vehicle did not come with a
luggage net, contact your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer to inquire and
obtain one.

To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the luggage net when the strap has visible signs of wear or damage.

OTLA045322

Use the cargo security screen to
cover items stored in the cargo area.

3-161

Convenient features of your vehicle

WARNING

Convenient features of your vehicle

To use the cargo security screen

When the cargo security screen is
not in use:
1. Pull the cargo security screen
backward and up to release it from
the guides.
2. The cargo security screen will
automatically slide back in.

To remove the cargo security
screen

NOTICE

OTLA045323

1. Pull the cargo security screen
towards the rear of the vehicle by
the handle (1).
2. Pull the cargo screen out all the
way and then slowly allow the
screen to retract back into the
mechanism.

3-162

The cargo security screen may
not automatically slide back in if
the cargo security screen is not
fully pulled out. Pull the cargo
screen out all the way and then
slowly allow the screen to retract
back into the mechanism.

OTLA045324

1. Push one side of the cargo screen
inward to compress the spring
mechanism and release the
screen from the vehicle.
2. While the mechanism is compressed, pull out the cargo security screen.

To remove the cargo security
screen from the luggage tray

3. Open the luggage tray and keep the
cargo security screen in the tray.

OTLE055153

2. Push in the guide pin.
OTLE055152

1. Pull up the screen board.

3-163

Convenient features of your vehicle

OTL045236

Convenient features of your vehicle

CAUTION

Luggage tray (if equipped)

Since the cargo security screen
may be damaged or malformed,
do not put luggage on it when it
is used.

WARNING
OTLE055154

3. While pushing the guide pin, pull
out the cargo security screen.

3-164

• Do not place objects on the
cargo security screen. Such
objects may be thrown about
inside the vehicle and possibly injure vehicle occupants
during an accident or when
braking.
• Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
designed for luggage only.
• Maintain the balance of the
vehicle and locate the weight
as forward as possible.

OTL045274

You can place a first aid kit, a reflector triangle, tools, etc. in the box for
easy access.
• Grasp the handle on the top of the
cover and lift it.

EXTERIOR FEATURES
Roof rack (if equipped)

NOTICE

WARNING

OTL045502L

If the vehicle has a roof rack, you can
load cargo on top of your vehicle.
NOTICE

If the vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof or a panorama roof, be
sure not to position cargo onto
the roof rack in such a way that it
could interfere with sunroof or a
panorama roof operation.

• The following specification is
the maximum weight that can
be loaded onto the roof rack.
Distribute the load as evenly
as possible onto the roof rack
and secure the load firmly.
Loading cargo or luggage in
excess of the specified weight
limit on the roof rack may
damage your vehicle.
ROOF
RACK

220 lbs. (100 kg)
EVENLY DISTRIBUTED

(Continued)

(Continued)
• The vehicle center of gravity will
be higher when items are
loaded onto the roof rack.
Avoid sudden starts, braking,
sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers
or high speeds that may result
in loss of vehicle control or
rollover resulting in an accident.
• Always drive slowly and turn
corners carefully when carrying items on the roof rack.
Severe wind updrafts, caused
by passing vehicles or natural
causes, can cause sudden
upward pressure on items
loaded on the roof rack. This
is especially true when carrying large, flat items such as
wood panels or mattresses.
This could cause the items to
fall off the roof rack and cause
damage to your vehicle or
others around you.
• To prevent damage or loss of
cargo while driving, check frequently before or while driving
to make sure the items on the
roof rack are securely fastened.
3-165

3
Convenient features of your vehicle

• When carrying cargo on the roof
rack, take the necessary precautions to make sure the cargo
does not damage the roof of the
vehicle.
• When carrying large objects on
the roof rack, make sure they do
not exceed the overall roof
length or width.

Multimedia System
Multimedia System.................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod® Port ...............................................4-2
Antenna ...............................................................................4-2
Steering Wheel Audio Control........................................4-3
Audio / Video / Navigation System (AVN)..................4-4
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4
How Vehicle Audio Works ...............................................4-5
Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7
Caring for Disc ...................................................................4-8

4-71
4-73
4-75
4-77
4-79
4-80
4-82
4-85
4-88
4-90
4-91
4-94

Voice Recognition ..............................................4-58, 4-109
Setup.....................................................................4-64, 4-116
Rear View Camera .............................................4-69, 4-121

Multimedia System

MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
NOTICE

AUX, USB and iPod® Port

• If you install an aftermarket HID
head lamp, your vehicle’s audio
and electronic device may malfunction.
• Use caution to keep chemicals
such as perfumes, cosmetics,
sun screen lotions, hand sanitizers, or air fresheners from contacting any interior components.
These chemicals may cause
damage or discoloration to the
interior materials.

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTLA045092

You can use the AUX port to connect
audio devices and the USB port to
plug in a USB device or iPod®.

i Information
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
❈ iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

4-2

Antenna

OLMB043298

Roof antenna (Type A)
The roof antenna receives both AM
and FM broadcast signals. Rotate
the roof antenna in a counterclockwise direction to remove it. Rotate it
in a clockwise direction to reinstall it.

Shark fin antenna (Type B)
The shark fin antenna receives
transmitted data. (for example: GPS
and XM signals)

Steering Wheel Audio Control

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)
• Move the VOLUME lever up to
increase volume.
• Move the VOLUME lever down to
decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET (

) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down and held for 0.8 second
or more, it will function in the following modes;

RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION UP/DOWN button.
MEDIA mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/
DOWN button.

MODE (3)

OTLA045238

NOTICE

Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously.

RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button. It will SEEK until you
release the button.

i Information
Detailed information for audio control
buttons are described in the following
pages in this chapter.

MEDIA mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET lever is moved
up or down, it will function in the following modes;

4-3

4
Multimedia System

Press the MODE button to select
Radio, XM, Disc, or AUX.

Multimedia System

Audio / Video / Navigation
System (AVN)

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Hands-Free

Detailed information for the AVN system is described in a separately supplied manual.

OTL045240
■ Type A

OTL045241
■ Type B

OTL045262

4-4

You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.
(1) Call / Answer button
(2) Call end button
(3) Microphone
Detailed
information
for
the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the following pages in this chapter or in the
manual supplied separately.

This can be due to factors, such as
the distance from the radio station,
closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings,
bridges or other large obstructions in
the area.

How Vehicle Audio Works
FM reception

AM reception

JBM002

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located
around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then processed by
the radio and sent to your vehicle
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has
reached your vehicle, the precise
engineering of your audio system
ensures the best possible quality
reproduction. However, in some
cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear.

AM broadcasts can be received at
greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio
waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long distance, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than
travelling straight. In addition, they
curve around obstructions resulting
in better signal coverage.

4-5

Multimedia System

JBM001

Multimedia System

FM radio station

JBM003

JBM004

JBM005

FM broadcasts are transmitted at
high frequencies and do not bend to
follow the earth's surface. Because
of this, FM broadcasts generally
begin to fade within short distances
from the station. Also, FM signals are
easily affected by buildings, mountains, and obstructions. This can lead
to undesirable or unpleasant listening conditions which might lead you
to believe a problem exists with your
radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio
trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves
away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will
begin to fade. When this occurs, we
suggest that you select another
stronger station.
• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or
large obstructions between the
transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the
treble level may lessen this effect
until the disturbance clears.

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful
signal near the same frequency
may begin to play. This is because
your radio is designed to lock onto
the clearest signal. If this occurs,
select another station with a
stronger signal.
• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several
directions can cause distortion or
fluttering. This can be caused by a
direct and reflected signal from the
same station, or by signals from two
stations with close frequencies. If
this occurs, select another station
until the condition has passed.

4-6

Features of Your Vehicle
Satellite radio reception
You may experience difficulties in
receiving XM™ satellite radio signals
in the following situations.

• If you are driving on a mountain
road where is the signal blocked by
mountains.
• If you are driving in an area with tall
trees that block the signal (30 ft.
/10m or more), for example on an
road that goes through a dense forest.

i Information
There may also be additional unforeseen circumstances leading to reception problems with the XM™ satellite
radio signal.
Advisory Messages, such as ‘CH
Unavailable’ may occur when starting
XM™ Radio.

4
Multimedia System

SATELLITE1

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a
covered parking area.
• If you are driving beneath the top
level of a multi-level freeway.
• If you are driving under a bridge.
• If you are driving next to a tall vehicle (such as a truck or a bus) that
blocks the signal.
• If you are driving in a valley where
the surrounding hills or peaks block
the signal from the satellite.

SATELLITE2

• The signal can become weak in
some areas that are not covered by
the XM™ repeater network.

4-7

Multimedia System

Caring for CDs
• If the temperature inside the car is
too high, open the car windows to
ventilate before using the system.
• It is illegal to copy and use
MP3/WMA files without permission.
Use CDs that are created only by
lawful means.
• Do not apply volatile agents, such
as benzene and thinner, normal
cleaners and magnetic sprays
made for analog disc onto CDs.
• To prevent the disc surface from
getting damaged, hold CDs by the
edges or the center hole only.
• Clean the disc surface with a piece
of soft cloth before playback (wipe it
from the center to the outside
edge).
• Do not damage the disc surface or
attach pieces of sticky tape or
paper.
• Make certain only CDs are inserted
into the CD player (Do not insert
more than one CD at a time).
• Keep CDs in their cases after use to
protect them from scratches or dirt.

4-8

• Depending on the type of CDR/CD-RW CDs, certain CDs may
not operate normally according to
the manufacturing companies. In
such circumstances, continued use
may cause malfunctions to your
audio system.

i Information - Playing an
Incompatible Copy Protected
Audio CD
Some copy protected CDs, which do
not comply with international audio
CD standards (Red Book), may not
play on your car audio. Please note
that inabilities to properly play a copy
protected CD may indicate that the
CD is defective, not the CD player.

Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio
When a cellular phone is used inside
the vehicle, noise may be produced
from the audio system. This does not
mean that something is wrong with
the audio equipment. In such a case,
try to operate mobile devices as far
from the audio equipment as possible.

CAUTION
When using a communication
system such as a cellular phone
or a radio set inside the vehicle, a
separate external antenna must
be fitted. When a cellular phone
or a radio set is used with an
internal antenna alone, it may
interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect
safe operation of the vehicle.

WARNING
Do not use a cellular phone
while driving. Stop at a safe
location to use a cellular phone
or set up the hands-free calling
feature.

NOTE:
Order of playing files (folders) :
1. Song playing order :
to
sequentially.
2. Folder playing order :
❋ If no song file is contained in the
folder, that folder is not displayed.

WARNING
• Do not stare at the screen

4-9

4
Multimedia System

while driving. Staring at the
screen for prolonged periods
of time could lead to traffic
accidents.
• Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in
accidents, fire, or electric
shock.
• Using the phone while driving
may lead to a lack of attention of
traffic conditions and increase
the likelihood of accidents. Use
the phone feature after parking
your vehicle, or set up handsfree calling feature.
• Use caution not to spill water
or liquids near the audio
device. Doing so may lead to a
product malfunction or introduce an electrical short circuit.

Multimedia System

CAUTION
• Operating the device while
driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external surroundings.
First park the vehicle before
operating the device.
• Adjust the volume to levels
that allow the driver to hear
sounds from outside of the
vehicle. Driving with the audio
volume at a level where external sounds cannot be heard
may lead to an accident.
• Pay attention to the volume
setting when turning the
device on. A sudden output of
extreme volume upon turning
the device on could lead to
hearing impairment. (Adjust
the volume to a suitable level
before turning off the device.)

4-10

NOTICE

• Do not place beverages close to
the audio system. Spilling beverages may lead to system malfunction.
• If your audio system is not working properly, have your vehicle
audio system inspected by an
authorized Hyundai dealer.
• Placing the audio system within
an electromagnetic environment
may result in noise interference.
• Use caution to keep chemicals
such as perfumes, cosmetics,
sun screen lotions, hand sanitizers, or air fresheners from contacting any interior components.
Doing so may cause damage or
discoloration.

i Information - Using CDs
• This device has been manufactured
to be compatible with software
bearing the following logo marks.
• Do not clean discs with chemical
solutions, such as record sprays,
antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids,
benzene, or thinners.
• After using a disc, put the disc back
in its original case to prevent disc
scratches.
• Hold discs by their edges or within
the center hole to prevent damages
to disc surfaces.
• Do not introduce foreign substances
into the disc insert/eject slot.
Introducing foreign substances
could damage the device interior.
• Do not insert two discs simultaneously.
• When using CD-R/CD-RW discs,
differences in disc reading and playing times may occur depending on
the disc manufacturer, production
method and the recording method
as used by the user.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Do not use abnormally shaped discs
(8cm, heart-shaped, octagon-shaped)
as such discs could lead to malfunctions.
• If the disc is straddled on the disc
slot without removal for 10 seconds,
the disc will automatically be reinserted into the disc player.
• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)

i Information - Using the USB
device
• Connect the USB device after turning on the engine. The USB device
may become damaged if it is already
connected when the ignition is
turned on.The USB device may not
operate properly if the car ignition
is turned on or off with the USB
device connected.
• Heed caution to static electricity
when connecting/disconnecting USB
devices.
• Encoded MP3 Players will not be
recognized when connected as an
external device.
• When connecting an external USB
device, the device may not properly
recognize the USB is in some states.
• Only products formatted with
byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be
recognized.
• This device recognizes USB devices
formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file formats. This device does not recognize
files in NTFS file format.
(Continued)

4-11

4
Multimedia System

(Continued)
• Clean fingerprints and dust off the
disc surface (coated side) with a soft
cloth.
• The use of CD-R/CD-RW discs
attached with labels may result in
disc slot jams or difficulties in disc
removal. Such discs may also result
in noise while playing.
• Some CD-R/CD-RW discs may not
properly operate depending on the
disc manufacturer, production
method and the record method as
used by the user. If problems persist,
trying using a different CD as continued use may result in malfunctions.
• The performance of this product
may differ depending on the CDRW Drive Software.
• Copy-protected CDs such as S-type
CDs may not function in the device.
DATA discs cannot be played.
(However, such discs may still operate but will do so abnormally.)
(Continued)

Multimedia System

(Continued)
• Some USB devices may not be supported due to compatibility issues.
• Avoid contact between the USB connector with bodily parts or foreign
objects.
• Repeated connecting/disconnecting
of USB devices within short periods
of time may result in product malfunction.
• A strange noise may occur when disconnecting the USB.
• Make sure to connect/disconnect
external USB devices with the audio
power turned off.
• The amount of time required to recognize the USB device may differ
depending on the type, size or file
formats stored in the USB. Such differences in time are not indications
of malfunctions.
• The device only supports USB
devices used to play music files.
• USB images and videos are not supported.
(Continued)

4-12

(Continued)
• Do not use the USB I/F to charge
batteries or USB accessories that
generate heat. Such acts may lead to
worsened performance or damage
to the device.
• The device may not recognize the
USB device if separately purchased
USB hubs and extension cables are
being used. Connect the USB directly with the multimedia terminal of
the vehicle.
• When using mass storage USB
devices with separate logical drives,
only files saved to the root drive can
be played.
• Files may not properly operate if
application programs are installed
to the USBs.
• The device may not operate normally if MP3 Players, cellular phones,
digital cameras, or other electronic
devices (USB devices not recognized
as portable disk drives) are connected with the device.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Charging through the USB may not
work for some mobile devices.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using formats such
as HDD Type, CF, or SD Memory.
• The device will not support files
locked by DRM (Digital Rights
Management.)
• USB memory sticks used by connecting an Adaptor (SD Type or CF
Type) may not be properly recognized.
• The device may not operate properly when using USB HDDs or USBs
subject to connection failures
caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. istick type)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Avoid use of USB memory products that can
also be used as key
chains or mobile phone
accessories. Use of such products
may cause damage to the USB jack.
• Connecting an MP3 device or phone
through various channels, such as
AUX/BT or Audio/ USB mode may
result in pop noises or abnormal
operation.

i Information - Using the
iPod®

4-13

4
Multimedia System

device
• iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
• In order to use the iPod® while operating the keys, you must use a dedicated iPod® cable. (the cable that is
supplied when purchasing iPod®
/iPhone® products)
• If the iPod® is connected to the vehicle while it is playing, a high pitch
sound could occur for approximately 1-2 seconds immediately after
connecting. If possible, connect the
iPod to the vehicle with the iPod®
stopped/ paused.
• During ACC ON state, connecting
the iPod® through the iPod® cable
will charge the iPod® through the
car audio system.
• When connecting with the iPod®
cable, make sure to fully insert the
jack to prevent communication
interference.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When the EQ features of an external device, such as the iPod®, and
the audio system are both active, EQ
effects could overlap and cause
sound deterioration and distortion.
Whenever possible, turn off the EQ
feature within the external device
upon use by connecting with the
audio system.
• Noise may occur when an iPod® or
AUX device is connected. When
such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage.
• When the iPod® or AUX device
power is connected to the power
jack, playing the external device
may result in noise. In such cases,
disconnect the power connection
before use.
• Skipping or improper operation
may occur depending on the characteristics of your iPod® /Phone®
device.
(Continued)

Multimedia System

(Continued)
• If your iPhone® is connected to both
the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
and USB, the sound may not be
properly played. In your iPhone®,
select the Dock connector or
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to
change the sound output (source).
• iPod mode cannot be operated when
the iPod® cannot be recognized due
to versions that do not support communication protocols.
• For fifth generation iPod® Nano
devices, the iPod® may not be recognized when the battery level is low.
Please charge the iPod® for use.
• Search/play orders shown within
the iPod® device may differ with the
orders shown within the audio system.
• If the iPod® malfunctions due to an
iPod® device defect, reset the iPod®
and try again. (To learn more, refer to
your iPod® manual)
(Continued)

4-14

(Continued)
• Some iPod®s may not sync with the
System depending on its version. If
the Media is removed before the
Media is recognized, then the system may not properly restore the
previously operated mode. (iPad®
charging is not supported.)

i Information - Using the AUX
device
• If an external device connector is
connected with the AUX terminal,
then AUX mode will automatically
operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will
be restored.
• AUX mode can be used only when
an external audio player (camcorder, in-car DVD player, etc.) has
been connected.
• The AUX volume can be controlled
separately from other audio modes.
• Connecting a connector jack to the
AUX terminal without an external
device will convert the system to
AUX mode, but only output noise.
When an external device is not
being used, also remove the connector jack.
• When the external device power is
connected to the power jack, playing the external device may output
noise. In such cases, disconnect the
power connection before use.
• Fully insert the AUX cable to the
AUX jack upon use.

i Information - Precautions for

the Bluetooth® handsfree

safe driving
• Bluetooth® Handsfree is a feature
that enables drivers to practice safe
driving. Connecting the head unit
with a Bluetooth® phone allows the
user to conveniently make and
receive calls and use contacts.
Before using Bluetooth®, carefully
read the contents of this user’s manual.
• Excessive use or operations while
driving may lead to negligent driving practices and result in accidents.
Refrain from excessive operations
while driving.
• Viewing the screen for prolonged
periods of time is dangerous and
may lead to accidents. When driving, view the screen only for short
periods of time.

What is

Bluetooth®

• Bluetooth® refers to a short-distance wireless networking technology which uses a 2.4GHz ~ 2.48GHz
frequency to connect various
devices within a certain distance.
• Supported within PCs, external
devices, Bluetooth® phones, PDAs,
various electronic devices, and automotive environments, Bluetooth®
allows data to be transmitted at high
speeds without having to use a connector cable.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree refers to a
device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with
Bluetooth® mobile phones through
the audio system.
• Bluetooth® Handsfree may not be supported in some mobile phones. To learn
more about mobile device compatibility,
visit www. hyundaiusa.com.

i Information - When connect•

•

•
•

•

ing a Bluetooth® phone
Before connecting the head unit
with the mobile phone, check to see
that the mobile phone supports
Bluetooth® features.
Even if the phone supports
Bluetooth®, the phone will not be
found during device searches if the
phone has been set to hidden state
or the Bluetooth® power is turned
off. Disable the hidden state or turn
on the Bluetooth® power prior to
searching/connecting with the Head
unit.
Bluetooth® phone is automatically
connected when the ignition on.
If you do not want automatic connection with your Bluetooth®
device, turn off the Bluetooth® feature within your mobile phone.
The Handsfree call volume and
quality may differ depending on the
mobile phone.
(Continued)

4-15

4
Multimedia System

i Information - Before using

Multimedia System

(Continued)
• Park the vehicle when connecting
the head unit with the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth® connection may become
intermittently disconnected in some
mobile phones. Follow these steps to
try again.
1.Within the mobile phone, turn the
Bluetooth® function off/on and try
again.
2.Turn the mobile phone power
Off/On and try again.
3.Completely remove the mobile
phone battery, reboot, and then
again.
4.Reboot the Audio System and try
again.
5.Delete all paired devices, pair and
try again.
• Handsfree call quality and volume
may differ depending on the model
of your mobile phone.

4-16

i Information - Using the voice
recognition
• When using the voice recognition
feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are supported.
• Be aware that during the operation
of the voice recognition system,
pressing any key other than the
key terminate voice recognition
mode.
• For superior voice recognition performance, position the microphone
used for voice recognition above the
head of the driver’s seat and maintain a proper position when saying
commands.
• Within the following situations,
voice recognition may not function
properly due to external sound.
- When the windows and sunroof
are open
- When the wind of the cooling /
heating device is strong
- When entering and passing
through tunnels
(Continued)

(Continued)
- When driving on rugged and
uneven roads
- During severe rain (heavy rains,
windstorms)
• Phone related voice commands can
be used only when a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device is connected.
• When making calls by stating a
name, the corresponding contact
must be downloaded and stored
within the audio system.
• After downloading the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone book, it
takes some times to convert the
phone book data into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not properly operate.
• Pronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a normal
conversation.

The Bluetooth and Voice Recognition Manual is provided in two versions due to software version differences.
Before reading the manual, check the following.
Press the
key in FM Radio screen.
1. If you can find "FM <89.1>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-18 page)

4
Multimedia System

2. If you can find "FM <87.5~107.9>" on the screen,
(Go to 4-71 page)

4-17

Multimedia System

System Controllers and Functions
Audio Head Unit
Name
CLOCK

PHONE

POWER/
VOL knob
SEEK
TRACK

Name

Description
Ejects the disc.

4-18

RADIO

• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1,
XM2, XM3.

MEDIA

• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio.

Description
• Shortly press the key : display time screen
• Press and hold the key : move to the time
setting mode.
Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
•
•

Power : Press to turn power on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control volume.

• When pressed shortly
- Radio mode : plays previous/next frequency.
- Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) modes :
changes the track, Song(file)
• When pressed and held
- Radio mode : continuously changes the
frequency. Upon release, plays the current
frequency.
- Media(CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) modes :
rewinds or fast forwards the track or file
- During a Handsfree call, controls the call
volume.

Name
DISP
SCAN

Description
Turns the monitor display on/off.
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable broad
casts for 5 seconds each
• SiriusXM RADIO Mode : previews all receiv
able broadcasts for 10 seconds each.
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.

SETUP

Converts to Setup mode.

CAT
FOLDER

• SiriusXM RADIO : Category Search
• MP3 CD/USB mode : Search Folder

Multimedia System

TUNE
knob

• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frquencies.
• SiriusXM RADIO mode : turn to change
broadcast channels.
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/ channels/files.

4-19

Multimedia System

Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls
Name

MODE

VOL+

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

4-20

VOL-

Description
• When pressed shortly
- Starts voice recognition
- When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the
prompt and converts to voice command waiting
state
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Ends voice recognition
• Each time this key is pressed, the mode is hanged
in order of FM1 ➟ FM2 ➟ AM ➟ XM1 ➟ XM2 ➟
XM3 ➟ CD ➟ USB or iPod ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟
BT Audio
• If the media is not connected or a disc is not
inserted, corresponding modes will be disabled.
Used to control volume.
• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast frequencies and
channels saved to presets.
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My Music / BT Audio)
modes : changes the track, file or chap ter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches broadcast frequencies and channels
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some
mobile phones.

Description

Name

Ends phone call

4-21

4
Multimedia System

• When pressed shortly
- When pressed in the phone screen, displays
call history screen
- When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call
- When pressed in the incoming call screen,
answers the call
- When pressed during call waiting, switches to
waiting call (Call Waiting)
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- When pressed in the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the
last call
- When pressed during a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Handsfree call, switches call back
to mobile phone (Private)
- When pressed while calling on the mobile
phone, switches call back to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Handsfree (Operates only
when Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree is connected)

Multimedia System

Radio Mode
Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display
Displays the current operating mode
(FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, etc.)
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays the current preset number
P1 ~ P6 .

Switching to Radio Mode
Pressing the RADIO key will change
the operating mode in order of FM1➟
➟FM2➟AM➟XM1➟XM2➟XM3
If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
RADIO key will display the Radio
Pop-up Mode screen.

4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Turn the
TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.

4-22

Searching Radio Frequencies
Using Seek
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
play the previous/next frequency.

Using TUNE

Using Radio Mode
Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.

Turn the
TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.

Auto Store
Press the A.Store button to automatically save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.

i Information
While Auto Store is operating, pressing the [Cancel] button again will cancel Auto Store and restore the previous frequency.

Press the P1 ~ P6 buttons to play
the desired preset.

i Information
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the P1 ~ P6 preset buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current frequency to the selected preset.

Press the SCAN key to preview frequencies
with superior reception for 5 seconds
each.
Press and hold the SCAN key (over
0.8 seconds) to preview presets for 5
seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previous
frequency will be restored.
While Scan is operating, pressing
the SCAN key will cancel the scan
operation.

4-23

Multimedia System

Scan

Multimedia System

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
information
Satellite Radio channels:
Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a
3-month trial subscription to the
Sirius Select package. You’ll get over
140 channels, including commercialfree music, plus all your favorite
sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,
and a selection of premium programming. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM channels,
visit siriusxm.com in the United
States, siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

4-24

Satellite Radio reception factors:

SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

To receive the satellite signal, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
satellite radio antenna located on the
roof of your vehicle. The vehicle roof
provides the best location for an
unobstructed, open view of the sky, a
requirement of a satellite radio system. Like AM/FM, there are several
factors that can affect satellite radio
reception performance:
• Antenna obstructions: For optimal
reception performance, keep the
antenna clear of snow and ice
build-up and keep luggage and
other material as far away from the
antenna as possible.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages,
dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your
reception.

SiriusXM is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts music, sports, news and entertainment programming to radio
receivers, which are available for
installation in motor vehicles or factory installed, as well as for the home,
portable and wireless devices, and
through an Internet connection on
personal computer.
Vehicles that are equipped with a
factory installed SiriusXM Satellite
Radio system include:
• Hardware and an introductory trial
subscription term, which begins on
the date of sale or lease of the
vehicle.
• For a small upgrade fee, access to
SiriusXM music channels, and
other select channels over the
Internet using any computer connected to the Internet (U.S. customers only).
For information on extended subscription terms, contact SiriusXM
at 1-888-539-7474.

NOTE:
SiriusXM services require a subscription sold separately, or as a
package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If
you decide to continue service
after your trial, the subscription
plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you will be
charged according to your chosen
payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To
cancel you must call SiriusXM at
1-866-635-2349. See SiriusXM
Customer Agreement for complete terms at www.siriusxm.com.
SiriusXM U.S. satellite and data
services are available only in the
48 contiguous USA, DC and PR
(with
coverage
limitations).
SiriusXM satellite service is also
available in Canada; see www.siriusxm. ca. All fees and programming subject to change. Sirius,
XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc.

4
Multimedia System
4-25

Multimedia System

SiriusXM Radio Mode
Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display
Displays currently operating mode.
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title
information.
3. Preset
Displays currently playing preset
number P1 ~ P6 .
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.

4-26

Using SEEK
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
play the previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

SiriusXM RADIO
Using SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Your HYUNDAI vehicle is equipped
with a 3-month trial subscription to
SiriusXM so you have access to over
140 channels of music, information,
and entertainment programming.

SCAN

In order to extend or reactivate your
Sirius Select subscription, you will
need to contact SiriusXM Customer
Care at 1-800-643-2112. Have your
12-digit RID (Radio Identification
Number) / ESN (Electronic Serial
Number) ready. To retrieve the RID /
ESN, turn on the radio, press the
RADIO key, and tune to channel
zero.
Please note that the vehicle will need
to be turned on, in Sirius mode, and
have an unobstructed view of the sky
in order for the radio to receive the
activation signal.

Press the SCAN key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the SCAN
key again will cancel the scan operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.

Searching Categories
Select the category by using the
CAT
, FOLDER key and press the
TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category
are played.

i Information - Troubleshooting
1. Antenna Error
If this message is displayed, the
antenna or antenna cable is broken
or unplugged. Please consult with
your Hyundai dealership.
2. No Signal
If this message is displayed, it
means that the antenna is covered
and that the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio signal is not available.
Ensure the antenna is uncovered
and has a clear view of the sky.

4-27

4
Multimedia System

Activation

Multimedia System

Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.

Media Mode
Pressing the MEDIA key will change
the operating mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

Title Icon
When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.

Icon

Press the P1 ~ P6 buttons to play
the desired preset.

i Information
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one
of the P1 ~ P6 preset buttons to
save the current channel to the selected preset

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the
TUNE knob to highlight
each of the operating modes. Press
the know to select the desired mode.

i Information
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
4-28

Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
iPod®
USB
AUX

Audio CD Mode

i Information

Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.

Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next track.

i Information
• Pressing the TRACK key after the
track has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current track from the
beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
track has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous track.

button
button to

4-29

4
Multimedia System

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

• Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in
recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-R,
CDs with labels)
• The artist and title information are
displayed on the screen if track
information is included within the
audio CD.

Changing Tracks

Multimedia System

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.

Audio CD Mode Menu

Repeat

Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat
and List features.

Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

List
Press the List button to display the
track list screen.

Once you find the desired track,
press the
TUNE knob to start
playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key to rewind or
SEEK ,
fast-forward the current track.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4-30

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.

Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button to play tracks
in shuffle order.
Press the Shuffle button again to turn
the Shuffle feature off.
• Shuffle : Plays all tracks in shuffle
order.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.

MP3 CD Mode

i Information

Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.

If there are numerous files and folders
within the disc, reading time could
take more than 10 seconds and the list
may not be displayed or song searches
may not operate. Once loading is complete, try again.

Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.
NOTICE

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
4-31

4
Multimedia System

• Pressing the TRACK key after
the file has been playing for 2
seconds will start the current
file from the beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before
the file has been playing for 1
second will start the previous
file.

Multimedia System

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current file.

MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders
Press the
CAT
, FOLDER key to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
4-32

i Information
• When the 'Folder File' option is set
as the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the 'Album Artist Song'
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.

Shuffle

Copying Files

List

Press the Shuffle button to play files
in shuffle order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays all files within
the current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.

Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

i Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select "Yes".

Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat ➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

4-33

Multimedia System

Repeat

Multimedia System

USB Mode

i Information

Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
When a USB device is connected the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing a USB file.

• Loading may require additional
time if there are many files and folders within the USB and result in
faulty list display or file searching.
Normal operations will resume once
loading is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.

Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to
move to the previous or next file.

i Information
While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

• Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous file.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current file.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4-34

Searching Folders
Press the
CAT
, FOLDER key to
select and search folders.

Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

4-35

4
Multimedia System

Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

USB Mode Menu

Multimedia System

Shuffle

Repeat

List

Press the Shuffle button to play files
in shuffle order.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Shuffle
Folder ➟ Shuffle All ➟ Off.
• Shuffle Folder : Plays the files in the
current folder in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all files in shuffle
order.

Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

Copying Files
Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

i Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select "Yes".

4-36

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

Changing Songs

iPod® Mode

Searching Categories
TRACK

Press the SEEK ,
key to
move to the previous or next song.

Using iPod® Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod® song.

button
button to

i Information
iPod®s with unsupported communication protocols may not properly operate in the audio system.

NOTICE

• Pressing the TRACK key after the
song has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current song
from the beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before
the song has been playing for 1
second will start the previous
song.
• Slight time differences may exist
depending your iPod® product.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current song.

4
Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

i Information
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.

4-37

Multimedia System

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.

Multimedia System

Category Menu
Within the iPod® Category menu,
you will have access to the
,
Home, and
features.

1.
: Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root category screen
3.
: Moves to the previous category

4-38

i Information
• If the search mode is accessed while
playing a song, the most recently
searched category is displayed.
• Search steps upon initial connection
may differ depending on the type of
iPod® device.

iPod® Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Shuffle, Repeat and
List features.

Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button to play
songs in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle
order.

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song

AUX Mode

Connecting an External Device

Using AUX Mode

External audio / video players (e.g.
camcorders, in-car DVD players,
etc.) can be played through a dedicated cable.

Press the

MEDIA

key Select [AUX]

List
Press the List button to display the
Category Menu.

4
Multimedia System

An external device can be connected
to play music.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

4-39

Multimedia System

My Music Mode
Using My Music Mode

Changing Files

Selecting from the List

Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

i Information
Playing/Pausing My Music Files

• Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous file.
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

i Information
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the My Music button will be
disabled.

4-40

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key to rewind or
SEEK ,
fast-forward the current file.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Delete and List features.

Shuffle

List

Press the Shuffle button to play files
in shuffle order. Press the button
again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.

4
Deleting Files

Info

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

i Information
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
is recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.

4-41

Multimedia System

Press the Delete button to delete the
current file.

Multimedia System

List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.

1)
: Moves to the previous screen
2) Select All : Selects all files
3) Unselect All : Deselects all selected files
4) Delete : Deletes selected files
After selecting the files you want to
delete, press the Delete button to
delete the selected files.

Press the Select All button or individually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
Unselect All button and Delete buttons
will be enabled.

4-42

i Information
• If there is memory available, up to
6,000 files can be saved.
• Identical files cannot be copied
more than 1,000 times.
• To check memory information, go to
SETUP
[System] [Memory
Information]

i Information - Using the

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

•

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Using Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Audio Mode
Playing/Pausing Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio
Once a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is connected, the
mode will automatically start.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

4-43

4
Multimedia System

•

audio mode
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode can be used only when
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone has been connected.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode will not be available
when connecting mobile phones that
do not support this feature.
While Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is connected, then the music will also stop.
Moving the Track up/down while
playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio mode may result in pop noises
in some mobile phones.
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
streaming audio may not be supported in some mobile phones.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• When returning to Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology Audio mode
after ending a call, the mode may
not automatically restart in some
mobile phones.
• Receiving an incoming call or making an outgoing call while playing
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio may result in audio interference.

Multimedia System

i Information
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.

Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.

i Information
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.

i Information - Pairing through
[PHONE] Setup
• The Bluetooth® and Voice Recognition
Manual is provided in two versions
due to software version differences.
• Before reading the manual, check
the following.
• Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has not been connected, press
the SETUP key [Phone] button to
display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.

4-44

• From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select the vehicle
that matches the name on the audio
screen.

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?

When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2.Press the OK button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.

1) Vehicle Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.

4-45

4
Multimedia System

Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
feature.

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller

Multimedia System

4. After a few seconds, a screen displaying the vehicle 6 digit passkey
is displayed.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

NOTICE

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]
(For USA)

If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices are paired but none are
currently connected, pressing the
PHONE key or the
key on the
steering wheel displays the following screen. Press the [Pair]
button to pair a new device or
press the [Connect] to connect a
previously paired device.

(Except USA)

(❈ the screen can be different by region.)

The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.
4-46

i Information

(Continued)
• After pairing is complete, a contacts
download request is sent once to the
mobile phone. Some mobile phones
may require confirmation upon
receiving a download request,
ensure your mobile phone accepts
the connection. Refer to your
phones user’s manual for additional
information regarding phone pairing and connections.

4
Multimedia System

• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Only Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Handsfree and Bluetooth audio
related features are supported.
• Bluetooth related operations are
possible only within devices that
support Handsfree or audio features, such as a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology mobile phone or a
Bluetooth audio device.
• If a connected Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device becomes disconnected due to being out of communication range, turning the device
OFF, or a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology communication error,
corresponding Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices are automatically searched and reconnected.
• If the system becomes unstable due
to communication errors between
the car Handsfree and the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, reset the device by turning
off and back on again. Upon resetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device, the system will be restored.
(Continued)

4-47

Multimedia System

Connecting a Device
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the Connect button.

Changing Priority
What is Priority?
It is possible to pair up to five
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices with the car audio system.
The "Change Priority" feature is used
to set the connection priority of
paired phones.

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

4-48

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select
the phone you want to switch to the
highest priority, then press the
Change priority button from the Menu.
The selected device will be changed
to the highest priority.

NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

4-49

Multimedia System

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the Disconnect button.

Multimedia System

Deleting a Device
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP

i Information
• When deleting the currently connected device, the device will automatically be disconnected to proceed with the deleting process.
• If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device is deleted, the
device’s call history and contacts
data will also be deleted.
• To re-use a deleted device, you must
pair the device again.

Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the PHONE
key to display the Phone menu
screen.
(For USA)

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the Delete button.
(Except USA)

(❈ the screen can be different by region.)
4-50

i Information
• If you press the [Call History] button but there is no call history data,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download call history data.
• If you press the [Contacts] button
but there is no contacts data stored,
a prompt is displayed which asks to
download contacts data.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones. For more
information on download support,
refer to your mobile phone user’s
manual.

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

PHONE

key Select

i Information
• To save Favorite, contacts should be
downloaded.
• Contact saved in Favorites will not be
automatically updated if the contact
has been updated in the phone. To
update Favorites, delete the Favorite
and create a new Favorite.

4
Multimedia System

1) Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts saved for easy
access
2) Call History : Device the call history list screen
3) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
4) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts

4-51

Multimedia System

Call History
Press the
History]

PHONE

key

Select [Call

• Calls received with hidden caller ID
will not be saved in the call history
list.
• Calling through the call history is
not possible when there is no call
history stored or a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology phone is not
connected.
• Up to 50 received, dialed and missed
calls are stored in Call History.
• Time of received/dialed calls and call
time information are not saved.

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

A list of incoming, outgoing and
missed calls is displayed.
Press the Download button to download the call history.
1) Call History :
- Displays recent calls (call history)
- Connects call upon selection
2) Download : Download Recent Call
History
• Call history may not be saved in the
call history list in some mobile
phones.

4-52

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the Download button to download the call history.

1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries

i Information

Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the
Number]

PHONE

key Select [Dial

4
1) Dial Pad : Use the dial pad to enter
the phone number directly.
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number. If no
number has been entered, switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time

4-53

Multimedia System

• Up to 1,000 contacts saved in your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
phone can be downloaded into the
car contacts. Contacts that have
been downloaded to the car cannot
be edited or deleted on the phone.
• Mobile phone contacts are managed
separately
for
each
paired
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device (max 5 devices x 1,000 contacts each). Previously downloaded
data is maintained even if the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device has been disconnected.
(However, the contacts and call history saved to the phone will be deleted
if a paired phone is deleted.)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• It is possible to download contacts
during Bluetooth streaming audio.
• When downloading contacts, the
icon will be displayed within the status bar.
• It is not possible to begin downloading a contact list when the contact
download feature has been turned
off within the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device. In addition,
some devices may require device
authorization upon attempting to
download contacts. If downloading
does not normally occur, check the
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device settings or the screen state.
• The contacts download feature may
not be supported in some mobile
phones. For more information of
supported Bluetooth® devices and
function support, refer to your
phone’s user manual.

Multimedia System

Answering Calls
Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name when the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Accept : Accepts the incoming call
4) Reject : Rejects the incoming call

i Information

During a Handsfree Call

• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.

1) Caller : Displays the other party’s
name if the incoming caller is
saved within your contacts
2) Incoming Number : Displays the
incoming number
3) Call time : Displays the call time
4) End : Ends call
5) Private : Converts to Private mode
6) Out Vol. : Sets call volume as
heard by the other party
7) Mute : Turns Mic Mute On/Off

i Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4-54

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting
Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.

(For USA)

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.
1)

(Except USA)

This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)

4-55

4
Multimedia System

: Moves to the previous
screen
2) Connect/Disconnect Phone :
Connect/disconnects currently
selected phone
3) Delete : Deletes the currently
selected phone
4) Change Priority : Sets currently
selected phone to highest connection priority

Multimedia System

i Information - Before downloading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Outgoing Volume

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
NOTICE

i Information
• Upon downloading phone contacts,
the previous corresponding data is
deleted.
• This feature may not be supported
in some mobile phones.
• Voice Recognition may not operate
while contacts are being downloaded.

4-56

While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
SEEK ,
TRACK key.

Turning Bluetooth System Off
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Bluetooth System Off]
Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology related features will not be
supported within the audio system.

(For USA)

NOTICE

4
Multimedia System

To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and press “Yes”

(Except USA)

4-57

Multimedia System

Voice Recognition
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel remote controller. Say
a command.

If prompt feedback is in [ON], then
the system will say "Please say a
command after the beep (BEEP)"
• If prompt feedback is in [OFF]
mode, then the system will only
prompt you with a BEEP tone.
• To change Prompt Feedback
[On]/[Off], go to SETUP [System]
[Prompt Feedback]
4-58

NOTICE

For proper recognition, say the
command after the voice instruction and beep tone.
Contact List Best Practices
1) Do not store single-name entries
(e.g., “Bob”, “Mom”, “Kim”, etc.).
Instead, always use full names
(including first and last names) for
all contacts (e.g., use “Jacob
Stevenson” instead of “Dad”).
2) Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use
“Lieutenant” instead of “Lt.” or
“Sergeant” instead of “Sgt.”).
3) Do not use acronyms (i.e., use
“County Finance Department”
instead of “CFD”).
4) Do not use special characters
(e.g., “@”, “hyphen -”, “asterisk *”,
“ampersand &”).
5) If a name is not recognized from
the contact list, change it to a
more descriptive name (e.g., use
“Grandpa Joseph” instead of “Pa
Joe”).

Skipping Prompt Messages
If prompt feedback is ON, you can
bypass the prompt message by
briefly pressing the
key on the
steering wheel controls.
The prompt message is immediately
ended and the beep tone will sound.
After the “beep”, say the voice command.

Re-starting Voice Recognition
While system waits for a command
briefly press the
key on the
steering wheel control.
The command wait state is immediately ended and the beep tone will
sound. After the "beep", say the
voice command.

Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.

Ding~
More Help

• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the

• Ending voice command.
Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.

Ding~
Contacts

Please say the contact name you want to call.

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a...
Cancel

Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds):

(BEEP)
More Help

4-59

Multimedia System

More Help
Here are some examples of mode commands.
You can say a radio type like 'FM', 'AM', or 'Satellite'.
You can also say a media source like 'USB', 'My
Music', or 'iPod'.
Additionally, there are phone commands like
"Contacts', 'Call History', or 'Dial Number".
You can find more detailed commands in the user's
manual.
Please say a command after the beep.

Multimedia System

Voice Command List
• Common Commands : These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call
Call
on Mobile
Call
in Office
Call
at Home
Call
on Other
Phone

Favorites
Call History

4-60

Function
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used anywhere in the system.
Provides guidance on commands that can be
used within the current mode.
Calls saved in Contacts
Ex) Call “John Smith”
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Mobile" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Mobile
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Office" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" in Office
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Home" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" at Home
Calls to the number that is saved as
"Other" in Contacts
Ex) Call "John Smith" on Other
Provides guidance on Phone related commands. After saying this command, say
“Favorites”,“Dial Number”, “Call History” or
“Contacts” execute corresponding functions.
Displays the Favorite screen.
Displays the Call History screen.

Command
Contacts
(Call by Name)

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM

Function
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the last dialed call number.
Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟ FM2➟ AM➟ XM1➟
XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.

Command
FM Preset 1~6

Command
Function
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Mute
Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.

4
Multimedia System

Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM (Satellite)
• When currently listening to the SiriusXM®,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played SiriusXM® screen.
XM (Satellite)1~3 Displays the selected SiriusXM® screen.
XM (Satellite)
Plays the selected SiriusXM® channel.
0~223
Media
Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD
Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB
Plays USB music.
®
iPod
Plays iPod music.
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.

4-61

Multimedia System

• FM/AM radio Commands : available during FM, AM
radio operation
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan

Preset Scan
Information

Function
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Scans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 seconds
each.
Moves to the next preset from the current
present and plays for 10 seconds each.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.(This feature can be used when receiving RBDS broadcasts.)

• Satellite radio Commands : Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~255
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

Function
Plays the selected Satellite Radio channel.
Scans receivable channels from the current
broadcast and plays for 10 seconds each.
Plays the broadcast saved in Preset 1~6.
Displays the information of the current broadcast.

• Audio CD Commands : Commands available during
Audio CD operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30

• MP3 CD / USB Commands : Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Next Folder
Previous Folder

4-62

Function
Plays the currently paused track.
Pauses the current track.
Randomly plays the tracks within the CD.
Cancels random play to play tracks in
sequential order.
Repeats the current track.
Cancels repeat play to play tracks in sequential order.
Plays the desired track number.

Function
Plays the currently paused file.
Pauses the current file.
Randomly plays the files within the current
folder.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Plays the first file in the next folder
Plays the first file in the previous folder

• iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod®
operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off

4
Multimedia System

Repeat
Repeat Off

Function
Plays the currently paused song.
Pauses the current song.
Randomly plays the songs within the current
category.
Cancels random play to play songs in
sequential order.
Repeats the current song.
Cancels repeat play to play songs in sequential order.

• My Music Commands : Commands available during
My Music operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

Function
Plays the currently paused file.
Pauses the current file.
Randomly plays all saved files.
Cancels random play to play files in sequential order.
Repeats the current file.
Cancels repeat play to play files in sequential
order.
Deletes the current file. You will bypass an
additional confirmation process.

4-63

Multimedia System

Setup

Display Settings

Starting Mode

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the SETUP key to display the
Setup screen.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]

You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/
Calendar], [Phone] and [System].

Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
screen brightness or set the
Brightness on Automatic, Day, or
Night mode.
Press the Default button to reset.
1) Automatic : Adjusts the brightness
automatically
2) Day : Always maintains the brightness on high
3) Night : Always maintains the
brightness on low

4-64

Mode Pop up
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
will display the Mode Pop up screen.

i Information
The media Mode Pop up screen can be
displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.

MP3 Information Display
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]

Sound Settings
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

Use the
,
,
,
buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the Default button to reset.

4
Multimedia System

This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder/File : Displays file name
and folder name
2) Album/Artist/Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song

4-65

Multimedia System

SDVC (Speed Dependent
Volume Control)
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]

The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On / Off.

4-66

Voice Recognition Volume

Touch Screen Beep

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen Beep]

Turn the
TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.

This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.

Clock/Calendar Setting

Calendar Settings

Time Format

Clock Settings

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar
Settings]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]

Press the SETUP key Select [Clock
/Calendar] Select [Clock Settings]

4
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Use the
,
buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
NOTICE

Press and hold the CLOCK key
(over 0.8 seconds) to display the
Clock /Calendar screen.

4-67

Multimedia System

Use the
,
buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.

Multimedia System

Clock Display
Press the SETUP key Select [Clock
/Calendar] Select [Clock Display
(Power off)]

System Setting
Memory Information

Prompt Feedback
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]

This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio system is turned off.

This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

4-68

This feature is used to select the
desired prompt feedback option from
ON and OFF.
1) ON : When using voice recognition, provides detailed guidance
prompts
2) OFF : When using voice recognition, omits some guidance
prompts

Rear View Camera

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Language]

• The system has been equipped
with a rear view camera for ease
and convenience by allowing the
driver to view the rear of the vehicle through the A/V display.
• The rear view camera will automatically operate when the ignition key
is turned ON and the shift lever is
set to R (Reverse).
• The rear view camera will automatically stop operating when the gear
shift lever is shifted out of R
(reverse) into a different gear or
into the P (Park) position.

❈ This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition language.
❈ if the language is changed, the
system will restart and apply the
selected language.

CAUTION
The rear view camera has been
equipped with an optical lens to
provide a wider field of view
when viewing the rear of the
vehicle. Objects may appear
distorted when viewed through
the A/V display. Use caution
when backing up your vehicle.
For added safety, directly check
the rear view and left and right
sides by turning your head
when backing up your vehicle.

4-69

4
Multimedia System

Language

Multimedia System

i Information
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc. iPod® mobile digital device
sold separately. The Bluetooth® word
mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by
Hyundai is under license. SiriusXM
services require a subscription sold
separately, or as a package, by Sirius
XM Radio Inc. If you decide to continue service after your trial, the subscription plan you choose will automatically renew thereafter and you
will be charged according to your chosen payment method at then-current
rates. Fees and taxes apply. To cancel
you must call SiriusXM at 1-866-6352349. See SiriusXM Customer
Agreement for complete terms at
www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S.
satellite and data services are available only in the 48 contiguous USA,
DC and PR (with coverage limitations). SiriusXM satellite service is
also available in Canada; see www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and programming
subject to change.
(Continued)
4-70

(Continued)
Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of Sirius XM
Radio Inc. Android™ is a trademark
of Google, Inc. BlackBerry is a registered trademark of Research In
Motion Limited (RIM). All other
marks, channel names and logos are
the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.

System Controllers and Functions
Audio Head Unit
Name
CLOCK

PHONE

SEEK
TRACK

Name

Description
Ejects the disc.

RADIO

• Convert to Radio mode.
• Each time the key is pressed,the mode is
changed in order of FM1, FM2, AM, XM1,
XM2, XM3.

MEDIA

• Convert to Media Mode
• Each time the key is pressed, the mode is
changed in order of CD, USB(iPod®), AUX,
My Music, BT Audio.

Converts to Phone mode
❈ When a phone is not connected, the
connection screen is displayed.
•
•

Power : Press to turn power on/off.
Volume : Turn left/right to control volume.

4-71

Multimedia System

POWER/
VOL knob

Description
• Shortly press the key : display time screen
• Press and hold the key : move to the time
setting mode.

Multimedia System

Name
DISP
SCAN

Turns the monitor display on/off.
• Radio Mode : previews all receivable broad
casts for 5 seconds each
• XM™ Radio Mode: previews all receivable
broadcasts for 10 seconds each
• Media (CD/USB/My Music) modes :
previews each song (file) for 10 seconds
each.

SETUP

Converts to Setup mode.

CAT
FOLDER

• XM™ RADIO : Category Search
• MP3 CD, USB modes : Search Folder

TUNE
knob

4-72

Description

• Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
frquencies.
• XM™ Radio mode : turn to change broadcast
channels
• Media (CD/USB/iPod®/My Music) modes :
turn to search tracks/ channels/files.

Steering-Wheel Mounted Controls
Name

MODE

❈ The actual feature in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.

VOL-

• When pressed shortly (under 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode : searches broadcast frequencies and
channels saved to presets.
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My Music / BT Audio)
modes : changes the track, file or chap ter.
• When pressed and held (over 0.8 seconds)
- Radio mode, automatically searches broadcast frequencies and channels
- Media(CD / USB / iPod® / My Music) modes,
rewinds or fast forwards the track or song(file)
- BT Audio mode may not be supported in some
mobile phones.

4-73

4
Multimedia System

VOL+

Multimedia System

Description

Name

4-74

Radio Mode
Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display
Displays the current operating mode
(FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, etc.)
2. Frequency
Displays the current frequency.
3. Preset
Displays the current preset number
P1 ~ P6 .

4
Multimedia System

4. Preset Display
Displays preset buttons.
5. A.store
Automatically saves frequencies with
superior reception to Preset buttons.
Turn the
TUNE knob to move the
focus. Press the knob to select.

4-75

Multimedia System

Using Radio Mode

Auto Store

Using Seek

Selecting Presets/Saving Presets

Press the A.Store button to automatically save receivable frequencies to
Preset buttons.

Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
play the previous/next frequency.

Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the frequency saved to each button.

Searching Radio Frequencies

i Information
While Auto Store is operating, pressing the [Cancel] button again will cancel Auto Store and restore the previous frequency.

Using TUNE
Turn the
TUNE knob to select the
desired frequency.

Scan

Press the P1 ~ P6 buttons to play
the desired preset.

i Information
While listening to a frequency you
want to save as a preset, press and
hold one of the P1 ~ P6 preset buttons (over 0.8 seconds) to save the current frequency to the selected preset.

4-76

XMTM Radio Mode
Basic Mode Screen

1. Mode Display
Displays the current operating mode
(FM1, FM2, AM, XM1, etc.)
2. Channel Information
Displays the category, channel number, channel name, artist and title
information.

Using SEEK
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
play the previous/next channel.
❈ If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the
current category.

4
Multimedia System

3. Preset
Displays the currently playing preset
station number P1 ~ P6 .
4. Preset Display
Displays saved presets.

4-77

Multimedia System

SCAN

Searching Categories

Press the
key to scan all
channels with superior reception for
5 seconds each.
Once scan is complete, the previously played channel will be restored.
During Scan, pressing the SCAN
key again will cancel the scan operation and restore the previously
played channel.
If the “Category” icon is displayed,
channels are changed within the current category.
SCAN

Select the category by using the
CAT
, FOLDER key and press the
TUNE knob to select.

Channels for the selected category
are played.

Selecting Presets/Saving
Presets
Press the Preset button to display
the broadcast information for the
channel saved to each button.

Press the P1 ~ P6 buttons to play
the desired preset.

i Information
While listening to a channel you want
to save as a preset, press and hold one
of the P1 ~ P6 preset buttons to
save the current channel to the selected preset.

4-78

Media Mode
Pressing the MEDIA key will change
the operating mode in order of CD ➟
USB(iPod®) ➟ AUX ➟ My Music ➟ BT
Audio.

Title Icon
When a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology, iPod®, USB, or AUX
device is connected or a CD is
inserted, the corresponding mode
icon will be displayed.

Icon

Multimedia System

If [Mode Pop up] is turned on within
SETUP [Display], then pressing the
MEDIA key will display the Media
Pop-up Mode screen.
Turn the
tune knob to highlight
each of the operating modes. Press
the know to select the desired mode.

Title
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
CD
iPod®
USB
AUX

i Information
The media mode pop up screen can be
displayed only when there are two or
more media modes turned on.
4-79

Multimedia System

Audio CD Mode

i Information

Using Audio CD Mode
Playing/Pausing CD Tracks
Once an audio CD is inserted, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

4-80

button
button to

Changing Tracks
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next track.

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired track.

Audio CD Mode Menu

Repeat

Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat
and List features.

Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current track. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current track.

List
Press the List button to display the
track list screen.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Tracks
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key to rewind or
SEEK ,
fast-forward the current track.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

Multimedia System

Once you find the desired track,
press the
TUNE knob to start
playing.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current disc.

Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button to play tracks
in shuffle order.
Press the Shuffle button again to turn
the Shuffle feature off.
• Shuffle : Plays all tracks in shuffle
order.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for tracks. Once the desired
track is displayed, press the knob to
select and play.

4-81

Multimedia System

MP3 CD Mode

i Information

Using MP3 CD Mode
Playing/Pausing MP3 Files
Once an MP3 disc is inserted the
mode will automatically start and
being playing.

Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.
NOTICE

Selecting from the List
Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.
While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.
4-82

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current file.

MP3 CD Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

Searching Folders

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.
4-83

4
Multimedia System

Press the
CAT
, FOLDER key to
select and search folders.
Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.

i Information
• When the ‘Folder File’ option is set
as the default display within Display
setup, the album/artist/file information are displayed as detailed file
information.
• When the ‘Album Artist Song’
option is set as the default display,
the folder name/file name are displayed as detailed file information.
• The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information are recorded within the MP3
file ID3 tag.

Multimedia System

Shuffle

Copying Files

List

Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

i Information
Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat ➟
Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current Folder.

4-84

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

USB Mode

i Information

Using USB Mode
Playing/Pausing USB Files
When a USB device is connected the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing a USB file.

• Loading may require additional time
if there are many files and folders
within the USB and result in faulty
list display or file searching. Normal
operations will resume once loading
is complete.
• The device may not support normal
operation when using a USB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type)
USB Memory.

Press the SEEK , TRACK keys to
move to the previous or next file.

i Information
While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

• Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous file.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

4
Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current file.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4-85

Multimedia System

Changing Files

Selecting from the List

Multimedia System

Searching Folders
Press the
CAT
, FOLDER key to
select and search folders.

Once the desired folder is displayed,
press the TUNE knob to select.
The first file within the selected folder will begin playing.

4-86

USB Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Copy and List features.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

Shuffle

Repeat

List

Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current file or folder.
Each time the button is pressed, the
feature changes in order of Repeat
➟ Repeat Folder ➟ Off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current file.
• Repeat Folder : Repeats all files
within the current folder.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

4
Press the Copy button to copy the
current file into My Music.

i Information

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

Selecting another feature during
copying will display a pop-up asking
whether you wish to cancel copying.
To cancel, select “Yes”.

4-87

Multimedia System

Copying Files

Multimedia System

Changing Songs

iPod® Mode

Searching Categories
TRACK

Press the SEEK ,
key to
move to the previous or next song.

Using iPod® Mode
Playing/Pausing iPod® Songs
Once an iPod® is connected, the
mode will automatically start and
begin playing an iPod® song.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

i Information
iPod®s with unsupported communication protocols may not properly operate in the audio system.

4-88

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.

NOTICE

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Songs
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key (over 0.8 secSEEK ,
onds) to rewind or fast-forward the
current song.

Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

i Information
There are eight categories that can be
searched, including Playlists, Artists,
Albums, Genres, Songs, Composers,
Audiobooks and Podcasts.

Category Menu
Within the iPod® Category menu,
you will have access to the
,
Home, and
features.

iPod® Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Shuffle, Repeat and
List features.

Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button to play
songs in shuffle order.
• Shuffle All : Plays all songs in shuffle
order.

4-89

Multimedia System

1.
: Displays the play screen
2. Home : Moves to the iPod® root category screen
3.
: Moves to the previous category

Multimedia System

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.
• Repeat : Repeats the current song

AUX Mode

Connecting an External Device

Using AUX Mode

External audio / video players (e.g.
camcorders, in-car DVD players,
etc.) can be played through a dedicated cable.

Press the

MEDIA

key Select [AUX]

List
Press the List button to display the
Category Menu.

An external device can be connected
to play music.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired category.
Once you find the desired category,
press the
TUNE knob to select
and play.

4-90

My Music Mode
Using My Music Mode

Changing Files

Selecting from the List

Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for the desired file.

i Information
Playing/Pausing My Music Files

• Pressing the TRACK key after the
file has been playing for 2 seconds
will start the current file from the
beginning.
• Pressing the TRACK key before the
file has been playing for 1 second
will start the previous file.

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

i Information
If there are no files saved within My
Music, the My Music button will be
disabled.

Rewinding / Fast-forwarding
Files
While playing, press and hold the
TRACK
key to rewind or
SEEK ,
fast-forward the current file.

Scan
Press the SCAN key to play the first
10 seconds of each file.

4-91

Multimedia System

Once you find the desired file, press
the TUNE knob to start playing.

Multimedia System

My Music Mode Menu
Within this mode, you will have
access to the Info, Shuffle, Repeat,
Delete and List features.

Shuffle

List

Press the Shuffle button to play files
in shuffle order. Press the button
again to turn the Shuffle feature off.

Press the List
file list screen.

button to display the

Repeat
Press the Repeat button to repeat the
current song. Press the button again
to turn the repeat feature off.

Deleting Files
Press the Delete button to delete the
current file.

Info
Press the Info button to display
details about the current file.

i Information
The title, artist and album info are
displayed only when such information
is recorded within the MP3 file ID3
tag.

4-92

Turn the
TUNE knob left/right to
search for files. Once the desired file
is displayed, press the knob to select
and play.

List Menu
From the List screen, it is possible to
delete files you previously saved into
My Music.

4
Multimedia System

Press the Select All button or individually select the files you want to
delete. Once files are selected, the
Unselect All button and Delete buttons
will be enabled.

4-93

Multimedia System

i Information - Using the

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

•

4-94

While playing, press the
to pause and press
play.

button
button to

i Information
The play/pause feature may operate
differently depending on the mobile
phone.

Changing Files
Press the SEEK , TRACK key to
move to the previous or next file.

device has not been connected, press
the SETUP key [Phone] button to
display the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology connection screen.
It is possible to use the pair phone,
connect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone.

4
Multimedia System

Setting Connection
If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology

i Information
• If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
audio is not operating properly,
check whether the feature is turned
off at SETUP [Phone] [Streaming
Audio]. If the feature is off, turn back
on and try again.
• If music is not yet playing from your
mobile device after converting to
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the mode.
Check to see that music is playing
from the Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device after converting
to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
Audio Mode.

• From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select the vehicle
that matches the name on the audio
screen.

4-95

Multimedia System

Pairing a Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Device
What is Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Pairing?
Pairing refers to the process of synchronizing your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology phone or device with the
car audio system for connection.
Pairing is necessary to connect and
use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
feature.

Pairing PHONE Key /
Key
on the Steering Remote
Controller
When No Devices have been
Paired
1.Press the PHONE key or the
key on the steering remote controller. The following screen is displayed.
2.Press the OK button to enter the
Pair Phone screen.

1) Car Name : Name of device as
shown when searching from your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device
2) Passkey : Passkey used to pair the
device
3.From your Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology device (i.e. Mobile
Phone), search and select your car
audio system.

4-96

4. After a few seconds, a screen displaying the vehicle 6 digit passkey
is displayed.
Hear, check the passkey on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device and confirm.

NOTICE

Pairing through [PHONE] Setup
Press the SETUP key
Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

4
(❈ the screen can be different by region.)

The following steps are the same as
those described in the section
"When No Devices have been
Paired" on the previous page.

4-97

Multimedia System

5. Once pairing is complete, the following screen is displayed.

Multimedia System

i Information
• Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the vehicle
are as follows. Some features may
not be supported depending on your
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device.
- Outgoing/Incoming Handsfree calls
- Operations during a call (Switch to
Private, Switch to call waiting,
MIC on/off)
- Downloading Call History
- Downloading Mobile Contacts
- Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device auto connection
- Bluetooth Audio Streaming
• Up to five Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology devices can be paired to
the Car Handsfree system.
• Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device can be connected at a time.
• Other devices cannot be paired while
a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device is connected.
(Continued)

4-98

Connecting a Device
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to connect and
press the Connect button.

4-99

Multimedia System

1) Connected Phone : Device that is
currently connected
2) Paired Phone : Device that is
paired but not connected

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

Multimedia System

NOTICE

Priority icon will be displayed when
the selected phone is set as a priority phone.

Disconnecting a Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

From the paired phone list, select the
currently connected device and
press the Disconnect button.

4-100

Deleting a Device
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]
SETUP

Phone Menu Screen
Phone Menus
With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
device connected, press the PHONE
key to display the Phone menu
screen.

(❈ the screen can be different by region.)

1) Favorites : Up to 20 frequently
used contacts saved for easy
access
2) Dial Number : Displays the dial
screen where numbers can be
dialed to make calls
3) Call History : Device the call history list screen

4-101

Multimedia System

From the paired phone list, select the
device you want to delete and press
the Delete button.

Multimedia System

4) Contacts : Displays the Contacts
list screen
5) Setup : Displays Phone related
settings

Favorites
Press the
[Favorites]

PHONE

key Select

4-102

1) Saved favorite contact : Connects
call upon selection
2) To add favorite : Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite.
3) Delete All : Delete all stored
favorite contacts

Calling by Dialing a Number
Press the
Number]

PHONE

Answering Calls

key Select [Dial

Answering a Call
Answering a call with a Bluetooth®
Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen.

4-103

4
Multimedia System

1) Dial Pad : Use the dial pad to enter
the phome number directly.
2) Call : If a number has been
entered, calls the number. If no
number has been entered, switches to call history screen
3) End : Deletes the entered phone
number
4) Delete : Deletes entered numbers
one digit at a time

i Information
• When an incoming call pop-up is
displayed, most Audio and SETUP
mode features are disabled. Only
the call volume will operate.
• The telephone number may not be
properly displayed in some mobile
phones.
• When a call is answered with the
mobile phone, the call mode will
automatically revert to Private
mode.

Multimedia System

During a Handsfree Call

Call History
Press the
History]

i Information
If the mic is muted, the other party
will not be able to hear your voice.
4-104

PHONE

key

Select [Call

Contacts
Press the
[Contacts]

PHONE

key Select

1) Contacts List :
- Displays downloaded contacts
entries
- Connects call upon selection
2) Sort by : Find a contact in an
alphabetical order.
3) Download : Download contacts
entries

i Information

4-105

4
Multimedia System

The list of saved phone book entries
is displayed. Press the Download button to download the call history.

Multimedia System

Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology Setting

Viewing Paired Phone List
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Paired Phone List]

Pairing a New Device
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Pair Phone]

(❈ the screen can be different by region.)

Bluetooth® Wireless Technology
devices can be paired with the audio
system.
For more information, refer to the
“Pairing through Phone Setup” section within Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology.

4-106

This feature is used to view mobile
phones that have been paired with
the audio system. Upon selecting a
paired phone, the setup menu is displayed.
For more information, refer to the
“Setting
Bluetooth®
Wireless
Technology Connection” section within Bluetooth® Wireless Technology.

i Information - Before down-

Outgoing Volume

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Contacts Download]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Phone] Select [Outgoing Volume]

4
As the contacts are downloaded
from the mobile phone, a download
progress bar is displayed.

Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
outgoing volume level.
NOTICE

While on a call, the volume can be
changed by using the
SEEK ,
TRACK key.

4-107

Multimedia System

loading contacts
• Only contacts within connected
phones can be downloaded. Also
check to see that your mobile phone
supports the download feature.
• To learn more about whether your
mobile phone supports contacts
downloads, refer to your mobile
phone user’s manual.
• The contacts for only the connected
phone can be downloaded.

Downloading Contacts

Multimedia System

4-108

NOTICE

To turn Bluetooth® Wireless
Technology back on, go to SETUP
[Phone] and press “Yes”

Voice Recognition
Using Voice Recognition
Starting Voice Recognition
Shortly press the
key on the
steering wheel remote controller. Say
a command.

4-109

4
Multimedia System

NOTICE

Multimedia System

Illustration on using voice commands
• Starting voice command.
Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.

Ding~
More Help

• Skipping Voice Recognition
Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a...

Shortly pressing the
key (under 0.8 seconds)

• End voice command.
Shortly pressing the

key (under 0.8 seconds) :

Please say a command after
the beep or say "help" for more
information.

Ding~
Contacts

Contacts
Please say the name of the contacts you want
to call (BEEP)
Cancel

(BEEP)
More Help

4-110

Di-Ding~(Cancel Sound)

Voice Command List
• Common Commands : These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be
available during certain operations)
Command
More Help
Help
Call

Call
in Office
Call
at Home
Call
on Other
Phone

Favorites
Call History

Command
Contacts
(Call by Name)

Dial Number

Redial
Tutorial

Radio

FM1(FM One)
FM2(FM Two)
AM

Function
Displays the Contacts screen. After saying
this command, say the name of a contact
saved in the Contacts to automatically connect the call.
Displays the Dial number screen. After saying
this command, you can say the number that
you want to call.
Connects the most recently called number.
Provides guidance on how to use voice
recognition and Bluetooth® connections.
• When listening to the radio, displays the next
radio screen. (FM1➟ FM2➟ AM➟ XM1➟
XM2➟XM3➟FM1)
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played radio screen.
•When currently listening to the FM radio,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
the most recently played FM screen.
Displays the FM1 screen.
Displays the FM2 screen.
Displays the AM screen.

4-111

4
Multimedia System

Call
on Mobile

Multimedia System

Command
FM Preset 1~6

Function
Plays the most recently played broadcast
saved in FM Preset 1~6.
AM Preset 1~6
Plays the broadcast saved in AM Preset 1~6.
FM 87.5~107.9
Plays the FM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
AM 530~1701
Plays the AM broadcast of the corresponding
frequency.
XM™ (Satellite) • When currently listening to the SiriusXMTM,
maintains the current state.
• When listening to a different mode, displays
0~255
the most recently played SiriusXMTM screen.
XM™(Satellite) 1~3 Displays the selected SiriusXMTM screen.
XM™ Channel
Plays the selected SiriusXMTM channel.
Media
Moves to the most recently played media
screen.
CD
Plays the music saved in the CD.
USB
Plays USB music.
iPod®
Plays iPod music.
My Music
Plays the music saved in My Music.

4-112

Command
Function
AUX (Auxiliary)
Plays the connected external device.
Bluetooth® Audio Plays the music saved in connected Bluetooth®
device.
Please repeat
Repeats the most recent comment.
Mute
Mutes the sound
Cancel (Exit)
Ends voice command.

• FM/AM radio Commands : available during FM, AM
radio operation
Command
Preset 1~6
Scan

Preset Scan
Information

• Satellite radio Commands : Commands that can be
used while listening to Satellite Radio.
Command
Channel 0~255
Scan
Preset 1~6
Information

Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Track 1~30

• MP3 CD / USB Commands : Commands available
during USB and MP3 CD operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Next Folder
Previous Folder

4-113

4
Multimedia System

• Audio CD Commands : Commands available during
Audio CD operation

Multimedia System

• iPod® Commands : Commands available during iPod®
operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off

• My Music Commands : Commands available during
My Music operation
Command
Play
Pause
Shuffle
Shuffle Off
Repeat
Repeat Off
Delete

4-114

i Information

4
Multimedia System

SiriusXM™ service requires a subscription, sold separately, after 3month trial included with vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
SiriusXM™ service at the end of your
trial subscription, the plan you choose
will automatically renew and bill at
then-current rates until you call us at
1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See our
Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com. Other
fees and taxes apply. All fees and programming are subject to change.
Sirius satellite service is available only
to those at least 18 and older in the 48
contiguous USA, D.C., and PR (with
coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in AK
and HI. Certain channels are not
available on our Internet radio service
or on mobile devices. SiriusXM™
Traffic available in select markets. See
siriusxm.com/traffic for more information. © 2013 Sirius XM™ Radio
Inc. Sirius, XM™ and all related
marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM™ Radio Inc.
(Continued)

(Continued)
iPod® is a registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
iPod® mobile digital device sold separately. The Bluetooth® word mark and
logos are registered trademarks
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Hyundai is
under license. A Bluetooth® enabled
cell phone is required to use
Bluetooth® wireless technology. All
rights reserved.

4-115

Multimedia System

Setup

Display Settings

Starting Mode

Adjusting the Brightness

Press the SETUP key to display the
Setup screen.

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Brightness]

You can select and control options
related to [Display], [Sound], [Clock/
Calendar], [Phone] and [System].

4-116

Mode Pop up
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Mode Pop up]

This feature is used to display the
Mode Pop up screen when entering
radio and media modes.
When this feature is turned on,
pressing the RADIO or MEDIA key
will display the Mode Pop up screen.

i Information
The media Mode Pop up screen can be
displayed only when two or more
media modes have been connected.

MP3 Information Display
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Display] Select [Media Display]

Sound Settings
Sound Settings
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Sound Setting]

Use the
,
,
,
buttons to
adjust the Fader/Balance settings.
Use the
,
buttons to adjust the
Bass/Middle/Treble settings.
Press the Default button to reset.

4
Multimedia System

This feature is used to change the
information displayed within USB
and MP3 CD modes.
1) Folder/File : Displays file name
and folder name
2) Album/Artist/Song : Displays album
name/artist name/song

4-117

Multimedia System

SDVC (Speed Dependent
Volume Control)
Press the SETUP key Select [Sound]
Select [Speed Dependent Vol.]

The volume level is controlled automatically according to the vehicle
speed. SDVC can be set by selecting
from On / Off.

4-118

Voice Recognition Volume

Touch Screen Beep

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Voice Recognition Vol.]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Sound] Select [Touch Screen Beep]

Turn the
TUNE knob to adjust the
Voice Recognition volume.

This feature is used to turn the touch
screen beep on/off.

Clock/Calendar Setting

Calendar Settings

Time Format

Clock Settings

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Calendar
Settings]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[Clock/Calendar] Select [Time Format]

Press the SETUP key Select [Clock
/Calendar] Select [Clock Settings]

4
This feature is used to change the
clock format between 12hr or 24hr.

Use the
,
buttons to set the
Hour, Minutes and AM/PM setting.
NOTICE

Press and hold the CLOCK key
(over 0.8 seconds) to display the
Clock /Calendar screen.

4-119

Multimedia System

Use the
,
buttons to set the
Day, Month and Year setting.

Multimedia System

Clock Display
Press the SETUP key Select [Clock
/Calendar] Select [Clock Display
(Power off)]

System Setting
Memory Information

Prompt Feedback
SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Prompt Feedback]

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Memory Information]

This feature is used to display a clock
on the screen when the audio system is turned off.

This feature displays information
related to system memory.
1) Using : Displays capacity currently
in use
2) Capacity : Displays total capacity

4-120

Rear View Camera

SETUP
Press the
key Select
[System] Select [Language]

❈ This feature is used to change the
system and voice recognition language.
❈ if the language is changed, the
system will restart and apply the
selected language.

4-121

4
Multimedia System

Language

Driving your vehicle
Before driving.........................................................5-4

All wheel drive (AWD) .........................................5-42

Before Entering the Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Before Starting ..................................................................5-4

AWD operation.................................................................5-43
Emergency precautions.................................................5-47

Ignition switch ........................................................5-6

Drive mode integrated control system .............5-49
Blind spot detection system (BSD) ...................5-51

Key Ignition Switch ...........................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop Button................................................5-9

Transmission .........................................................5-14
Automatic Transmission.................................................5-14
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ...............................5-18
Shift-Lock System ..........................................................5-24
Shift-Lock Release .........................................................5-25
Parking...............................................................................5-25
Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-26

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist).............................................5-52
RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) ..................................5-55

Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ...........5-59
System setting and activation......................................5-59
AEB warning message and system control..............5-61
AEB front radar sensor.................................................5-64
System malfunction........................................................5-65
Limitations of the system .............................................5-67

Lane departure warning system (LDWS) .........5-71
LDWS Operation ..............................................................5-72
Warning Light and Message.........................................5-73
Limitations of the system .............................................5-73

Cruise control .......................................................5-75
Cruise Control operation ...............................................5-75

Vehicle load limit ..................................................5-98
Tire Loading Information Label ...................................5-99

WARNING
Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.
Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.
Do not inhale engine exhaust.
If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause
unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If
you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the
vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle , be sure to do so only in an
open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
Keep the air intakes clear.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield
clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.
If you must drive with the liftgate open:
Close all windows.
Open instrument panel air vents.
Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.
5-3

5
Driving your vehicle

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only
long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Driving your vehicle

BEFORE DRIVING
WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components
including components found in
the interior furnishings in a
vehicle, contain or emit harmful
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects and reproductive
harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of components
contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive
harm.

5-4

Before Entering the Vehicle

Before Starting

• Be sure all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean
and unobstructed.
• Remove frost, snow, or ice.
• Visually check the tires for uneven
wear and damage.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.

• Make sure the hood, the liftgate,
and the doors are securely closed
and locked.
• Adjust the position of the seat and
steering wheel.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Verify all the lights work.
• Fasten your seatbelt. Check that all
passengers have fastened their
seatbelts.
• Check the gauges and indicators in
the instrument panel and the messages on the instrument display
when the ignition switch is in the
ON position.
• Check that any items you are carrying are stored properly or fastened down securely.

WARNING

NEVER drink or take drugs and
drive.
Drinking or taking drugs and driving is dangerous and may result
in an accident and SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH.
Drunk driving is the number
one contributor to the highway
death toll each year. Even a
small amount of alcohol will
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judgment. Just one
drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions
and emergencies and your reaction time gets worse with each
additional drink.
Driving while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous
or more dangerous than driving
under the influence of alcohol.
(Continued)

(Continued)
You are much more likely to have
a serious accident if you drink or
take drugs and drive. If you are
drinking or taking drugs, don't
drive. Do not ride with a driver
who has been drinking or taking
drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a taxi.

5
Driving your vehicle

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.
All passengers must be properly belted whenever the vehicle is moving. For more information, refer to "Seat Belts" in
chapter 2.
• Always drive defensively.
Assume other drivers or pedestrians may be careless and
make mistakes.
• Stay focused on the task of
driving. Driver distraction can
cause accidents.
• Leave plenty of space between
you and the vehicle in front of
you.

WARNING

5-5

Driving your vehicle

IGNITION SWITCH
WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, take the following precautions:
• NEVER allow children or any
person who is unfamiliar with
the vehicle to touch the ignition switch or related parts.
Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can occur.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the ignition
switch, or any other control,
while the vehicle is in motion.
The presence of your hand or
arm in this area may cause a
loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

5-6

Key Ignition Switch

WARNING

OTL055001

Whenever the front door is opened,
the ignition switch will illuminate, provided the ignition switch is not in the
ON position. The light will go off
immediately when the ignition switch
is turned on or go off after about 30
seconds when the door is closed.

NEVER turn the ignition switch
to the LOCK or ACC position
while the vehicle is in motion
except in an emergency. This
will result in the engine turning
off and loss of power assist for
the steering and brake systems.
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking function, which could cause an accident.
Before leaving the driver's seat,
always make sure the shift lever
is in P (Park) position, apply the
parking brake, and turn ignition
switch to the LOCK position.
Unexpected vehicle movement
may occur if these precautions
are not followed.

Key ignition switch positions
Switch
Position

Action

LOCK

To turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, push the
key in slightly at the ACC position and turn the key
towards the LOCK position.
The ignition key can be removed in the LOCK position.
The steering wheel locks to protect the vehicle from theft.
(if equipped)

ACC

START

Electrical accessories are usable.
The steering wheel unlocks.

This is the normal key position when the engine has Do not leave the ignition switch in the ON position when
started.
the engine is not running in order to prevent the battery
from discharging.
All features and accessories are usable.
The warning lights can be checked when you turn the
ignition switch from ACC to ON.
To start the engine, turn the ignition switch to the START The engine will crank until you release the key.
position. The switch returns to the ON position when you
let go of the key.

5-7

Driving your vehicle

Notice

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

WARNING
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as high
heels, ski boots, sandals, flipflops, etc., may interfere with
your ability to use the brake and
accelerator pedals.
1. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
2. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
3. Depress the brake pedal.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the
START position. Hold the key
(maximum of 10 seconds) until the
engine starts and release it.

5-8

i Information
• It is best to maintain a moderate
engine speed until the vehicle engine
comes up to normal operating temperature. Avoid harsh or abrupt
acceleration or deceleration while
the engine is still cold.
• Whether the engine is cold or warm,
always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• Do not hold the ignition key in
the START position for more
than 10 seconds. Wait 5 to 10
seconds before trying again.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.

Engine Start/Stop Button

OTL055002

WARNING
To reduce risk of serious injury
or death, NEVER allow children
or any person who is unfamiliar
with the vehicle to touch the
Engine Start/Stop button or
related parts. Unexpected and
sudden vehicle movement can
occur.

To turn the engine off in an
emergency:
Press and hold the Engine
Start/Stop button for more than
two seconds OR rapidly press
and release the Engine Start/
Stop button three times (within
three seconds).
If the vehicle is still moving, you
can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by
pressing the Engine Start/Stop
button with the shift lever in the
N (Neutral) position.

WARNING
• NEVER press the Engine Start/
Stop button while the vehicle
is in motion except in an emergency. This will result in the
engine turning off and loss of
power assist for the steering
and brake systems.
(Continued)

(Continued)
This may lead to loss of directional control and braking
function, which could cause
an accident.
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, set the parking
brake, press the Engine Start/
Stop button to the OFF position, and take the Smart Key
with you. Unexpected vehicle
movement may occur if these
precautions are not followed.
• NEVER reach through the
steering wheel for the Engine
Start/Stop button or any other
control while the vehicle is in
motion. The presence of your
hand or arm in this area may
cause a loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.

5-9

5
Driving your vehicle

Whenever the front door is opened,
the Engine Start/Stop button will illuminate and will go off 30 seconds
after the door is closed.

WARNING

Driving your vehicle

Engine Stop/Start button positions
Button Position

Action

OFF

To turn off the engine, press the Engine
Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).
When you press the Engine Start/Stop button without the shift lever in P (Park), the
Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the
OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the
button is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal.
Electrical accessories are usable.

5-10

Notice

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the
ACC position for more than one hour, the battery power will turn off automatically to prevent
the battery from discharging.

Button Position
ON

START

Action

Notice

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in
in the ACC position without depressing the the ON position when the engine is not runbrake pedal.
ning to prevent the battery from discharging.
The warning lights can be checked before
the engine is started.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button without depressing the brake pedal, the engine
does not start and the Engine Start/Stop button changes as follows:
OFF → ACC → ON → OFF
However, the engine may start if you depress
the brake pedal within 0.5 second after pressing the Engine Start/Stop button when it is in
the OFF position.

5-11

5
Driving your vehicle

To start the engine, depress the brake pedal
and press the Engine Start/Stop button with
the shift lever in the P (Park) or in the N
(Neutral) position.
For your safety, start the engine with the shift
lever in the P (Park) position.

Driving your vehicle

Starting the engine

WARNING
• Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes, such as
high heels, ski boots, sandals,
flip-flops, etc., may interfere
with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
• Do not start the vehicle with the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle can move and lead
to an accident.
• Wait until the engine rpm is
normal. The vehicle may suddenly move if the brake pedal
is released when the rpm is
high.

5-12

i Information
• The engine will start by pressing the
Engine Start/Stop button, only when
the smart key is in the vehicle.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehicle, if it is far away from the driver,
the engine may not start.
• When the Engine Start/Stop button
is in the ACC or ON position, if any
door is open, the system checks for
the smart key. If the smart key is not
in the vehicle, the "
" indicator
will blink and the warning "Key not
in vehicle" will come on and if all
doors are closed, the chime will also
sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the
smart key in the vehicle when using
the ACC position or if the vehicle
engine is ON.

1. Always carry the smart key with
you.
2. Make sure the parking brake is
applied.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
4. Depress the brake pedal.
5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button.

i Information
• Do not wait for the engine to warm
up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate
engine speeds. (Steep accelerating
and decelerating should be avoided.)
• Always start the vehicle with your
foot on the brake pedal. Do not
depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the
engine while warming it up.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the vehicle:
When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally. Replace the fuse with a new
one. If you are not able to replace
the fuse, you can start the engine
by pressing and holding the
Engine Start/Stop button for 10
seconds with the Engine Start/
Stop button in the ACC position.
Do not press the Engine Start/Stop
button for more than 10 seconds
except when the stop lamp fuse is
blown.
For your safety always depress
the brake pedal before starting the
engine.

OTL055003

i Information
If the smart key battery is weak or the
smart key does not work correctly,
you can start the engine by pressing
the Engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key in the direction of the picture above.

5-13

5
Driving your vehicle

To prevent damage to the vehicle:
• If the engine stalls while you are
in motion, do not attempt to
move the shift lever to the P
(Park) position.
If traffic and road conditions
permit, you may put the shift
lever in the N (Neutral) position
while the vehicle is still moving
and press the Engine Start/Stop
button in an attempt to restart
the engine.
• Do not push or tow your vehicle
to start the engine.

NOTICE

Driving your vehicle

TRANSMISSION
Automatic Transmission
Automatic transmission operation
The automatic transmission has six
forward speeds and one reverse
speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) position.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press ths shift button, and then move shift lever.
Move shift lever.

5-14

OTL055006

WARNING

P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" on
page 5-25.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.

WARNING
• Shifting into P (Park) while the
vehicle is in motion may
cause you to lose control of
the vehicle.
• After the vehicle has stopped,
always make sure the shift
lever is in P (Park), apply the
parking brake, and turn the
engine off.
• Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking
brake.

5
Driving your vehicle

To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death:
• ALWAYS check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for
people, especially children,
before shifting a vehicle into
D (Drive) or R (Reverse).
• Before leaving the driver's
seat, always make sure the
shift lever is in the P (Park)
position, then set the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the LOCK/OFF position. Unexpected and sudden
vehicle movement can occur
if these precautions are not
followed.
• Do not use engine braking
(shifting from a high gear to
lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may
slip causing an accident.

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

5-15

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.

CAUTION
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.

N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged.
Use N (Neutral) if you need to restart
a stalled engine, or if it is necessary
to stop with the engine ON. Shift into
P (Park) if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason.
Always depress the brake pedal
when you are shifting from N
(Neutral) to another gear.

WARNING
Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.

5-16

D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift through a six-gear sequence,
providing the best fuel economy and
power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.
The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.

In Manual Shift Mode, moving the
shift lever backwards and forwards
will allow you to select the desired
range of gears for the current driving
conditions.
+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.

+ (UP)

- ( D OW N )
OTL055007

i Information
• Only the six forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)

5-17

5
Driving your vehicle

Manual shift mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual shift mode is
selected by pushing the shift lever
from the D (Drive) position into the
manual gate. To return to D (Drive)
range operation, push the shift lever
back into the main gate.

(Continued)
• If the driver presses the lever to
+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the
transmission may not make the
requested gear change if the next
gear is outside of the allowable
engine rpm range. The driver must
execute upshifts in accordance with
road conditions, taking care to keep
the engine rpms below the red zone.
• When accelerating from a stop on a
slippery road, push the shift lever
forward into the + (Up) position.
This allows the transmission to shift
into the 2nd gear which is better for
smooth driving on a slippery road.
Push the shift lever to the - (Down)
side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Driving your vehicle

Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission operation
The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission has seven forward speeds and
one reverse speed.
The individual speeds are selected
automatically in the D (Drive) position.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.
Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.
Move shift lever.

5-18

OTL055006

WARNING

As a result, shifts are sometimes
more noticeable, and a light vibration can be felt as the transmission
shaft speed is matched with the
engine shaft speed. This is a normal condition of the Ecoshift dual
clutch transmission.
• The dry-type clutch transfers
torque more directly and provides
a direct-drive feeling which may
feel different from a conventional
automatic transmission. This may
be more noticeable when launching the vehicle from a stop or when
traveling at low, stop-and-go vehicle speeds.
• When rapidly accelerating from a
lower vehicle speed, the engine
rpm may increase dramatically as
a result of clutch slip as the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission
selects the correct gear. This is a
normal condition.
• When accelerating from a stop on
an incline, press the accelerator
smoothly and gradually to avoid
any shudder feeling or jerkiness.

5-19

5
Driving your vehicle

• The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission gives the driving feel of a manual transmission, yet provides the
ease of a fully automatic transmission. Unlike a traditional automatic
transmission, the gear shifting can
sometimes be felt and heard on the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission,
as the actuators engage the clutch
and the gear is selected.
The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission can be thought of as an automatically shifting manual transmission. When D (Drive) is selected,
the transmission will automatically
shift through the gears similar to a
conventional automatic transmission.
• The Ecoshift dual clutch transmission incorporates a dry-type dual
clutch mechanism, which allows for
better acceleration performance
and increased fuel efficiency while
driving. But it differs from a conventional automatic transmission in
that it does not incorporate a
torque converter. Instead, the transition from one gear to the next is
managed by clutch slip, especially
at lower speeds.

Driving your vehicle

• When traveling at a lower vehicle
speed, if you release the accelerator pedal quickly, you may feel
engine braking before the transmission changes gears. This
engine braking feeling is similar to
operating a manual transmission at
low speed.
• When driving downhill, you may
wish to move the gear shift lever to
Manual Shift mode and downshift
to a lower gear in order to control
your speed without using the brake
pedal excessively.
• When you turn the engine on and
off, you may hear clicking sounds
as the system goes through a self
test. This is a normal sound for the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission.

5-20

NOTICE
■ Type A

■ Type B

OTLE055019/OTLE055018

• To hold the vehicle on a hill use
the foot brake or the parking
brake. If the vehicle is held by
applying the accelerator pedal
on a hill the clutch and transmission will be overheated
resulting in damage.
At this time, a warning message
will appear on the LCD display
and you may feel a vibration.

• If the clutch becomes overheated by excessive use of the
clutch to hold on a hill, you may
notice a shudder feeling and a
blinking display on the instrument cluster. When this occurs,
the clutch is disabled until the
clutch cools to normal temperatures. If this occurs, pull over to
a safe location, shift into P
(Park) and apply the foot brake
for a few minutes.
• If the LCD warning is active, the
foot brake must be applied.
• Ignoring the warnings can lead
to damage to the transmission.
• If the display continues to blink,
for your safety, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
have the system checked.

OTLA055141/OTLA055142

• Under certain conditions, such
as repeated stop-and-go launches on steep grades, the transmission clutches may overheat.
When the clutches are overheated, the transmission safe protection mode logic is enabled.

•

When possible, continue to
drive the vehicle smoothly while
trying to avoid frequent upshifting and downshifting.
Gear shifts may be more noticeable than a conventional automatic transmission. This is a
normal characteristic of this
type of Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission.
During the first 1000 miles, you
may feel that the vehicle may not
be smooth when accelerating at
low speed. During this break-in
period, the shift quality and performance of your new vehicle is
continuously optimized.
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive) or
R (Reverse).
Do not put the shift lever in N
(Neutral) while driving.

5-21

5
Driving your vehicle

OTLA055143

If the safe protection mode logic
is enabled, the gear position
indicator on the cluster blinks
with a chime sound. At this time,
a warning message will appear
on the LCD display and driving
may not be smooth. If you ignore
this warning, the driving condition may become worse. If this
occurs, stop the vehicle, apply
the brakes or shift the vehicle to
P (Park), and allow the transmission to cool.
• If the Ecoshift dual clutch transmission starts to become overheated, the gear shift characteristics may change. Gear shifts
may become more abrupt. If
continued operation includes
frequent
and
continuous
upshifts and downshifts, the
overheat warning message on
the cluster LCD display may illuminate. If this occurs, stop the
vehicle, apply the brakes or shift
the vehicle to (P) Park, and allow
the transmission to cool.

Driving your vehicle

The indicator in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position
when the ignition switch is in the ON
position.

P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park).
To shift from P (Park), you must
depress firmly on the brake pedal
and make sure your foot is off the
accelerator pedal.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot shift the lever out of P
(Park), see "Shift-Lock Release" in
this section.
The shift lever must be in P (Park)
before turning the engine off.

5-22

R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.

CAUTION
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may damage the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING

+ (UP)

- ( D OW N )
OTL055007

The DRIVE MODE switch, located
on the shift lever console, allows the
driver to switch from NORMAL mode
to SPORT or ECO mode.
For more information, refer to
"Drive Mode Integrated Control
System" later in this chapter.

5-23

5
Driving your vehicle

Do not shift into gear unless
your foot is firmly on the brake
pedal. Shifting into gear when
the engine is running at high
speed can cause the vehicle to
move very rapidly. You could
lose control of the vehicle and
hit people or objects.

D (Drive)
This is the normal driving position.
The transmission will automatically
shift
through
a
seven-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing another vehicle or driving uphill depress
the accelerator pedal further until
you feel the transmission downshift
to a lower gear.

Driving your vehicle

i Information
• Only the seven forward gears can be
selected. To reverse or park the
vehicle, move the shift lever to the R
(Reverse) or P (Park) position as
required.
• Downshifts are made automatically
when the vehicle slows down. When
the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected.
• When the engine rpm approaches
the red zone the transmission will
upshift automatically.
(Continued)

5-24

Shift-Lock System
For your safety, the automatic transmission has a shift-lock system
which prevents shifting the transmission from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Move the shift lever.

5. Move the shift lever.
6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock override access hole then
install the cap.

Shift-Lock Release

If you need to use the shift-lock
release, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
immediately.

Parking
Always come to a complete stop and
continue to depress the brake pedal.
Move the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, apply the parking brake,
and place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position. Take the Key
with you when exiting the vehicle.

WARNING
OTLA055002

5-25

5
Driving your vehicle

If the shift lever cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)
position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the
brake, and then do the following:
1. Place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Carefully remove the cap (1) covering the shift-lock release access
hole.
4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screwdriver) into the access hole and
press down on the tool.

When you stay in the vehicle
with the engine running, be
careful not to depress the accelerator pedal for a long period of
time. The engine or exhaust
system may overheat and start
a fire.
The exhaust gas and the
exhaust system are very hot.
Keep away from the exhaust
system components.
Do not stop or park over flammable materials, such as dry
grass, paper or leaves. They
may ignite and cause a fire.

Driving your vehicle

Good Driving Practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not move the shift lever to N
(Neutral) when driving. Doing so
may result in an accident because
of a loss of engine braking and the
transmission could be damaged.
• Do not drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
consistent pedal pressure can
result in the brakes overheating,
brake wear and possibly even
brake failure.
• Depressing both accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time can
trigger logic for engine power
reduction to assure vehicle deceleration. Vehicle acceleration will
resume after the brake pedal is
released.
5-26

• When driving in Manual Shift
Mode, slow down before shifting to
a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged if the
engine rpms are outside of the
allowable range.
• Always apply the parking brake
when leaving the vehicle. Do not
depend on placing the transmission in P (Park) to keep the vehicle
from moving.
• Exercise extreme caution when
driving on a slippery surface. Be
especially careful when braking,
accelerating or shifting gears. On a
slippery surface, an abrupt change
in vehicle speed can cause the
drive wheels to lose traction and
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator.

i Information - Kickdown
Mechanism
Use the kickdown mechanism for
maximum acceleration. Depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure
point. The automatic transmission will
shift to a lower gear depending on the
engine speed.

WARNING

5
Driving your vehicle

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.
In a collision, an unbelted
occupant is significantly more
likely to be seriously injured
or killed than a properly belted occupant.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control
of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.
• HYUNDAI recommends you
follow all posted speed limits.

5-27

Driving your vehicle

BRAKING SYSTEM
Power Brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
If the engine is not running or is
turned off while driving, the power
assist for the brakes will not work.
You can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than
with power brakes.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces.

5-28

WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• Do not drive with your foot
resting on the brake pedal.
This will create abnormal high
brake temperatures, excessive brake lining and pad
wear, and increased stopping
distances.
• When descending down a
long or steep hill, move the
gear shift lever to Manual
Shift Mode and manually
downshift to a lower gear in
order to control your speed
without using the brake pedal
excessively. Applying the
brakes continuously will
cause the brakes to overheat
and could result in a temporary loss of braking performance.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Wet brakes may impair the
vehicle's ability to safely slow
down; the vehicle may also
pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Applying
the brakes lightly will indicate
whether they have been
affected in this way. Always
test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep
water. To dry the brakes, lightly tap the brake pedal to heat
up the brakes while maintaining a safe forward speed until
brake performance returns to
normal. Avoid driving at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.

Disc Brakes Wear Indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high pitched warning sound from
your front or rear brakes. You may
hear this sound come and go or it
may occur whenever you depress
the brake pedal.
Note that some driving conditions or
climates may cause a brake squeal
when you first apply (or lightly apply)
the brakes. This is normal and does
not indicate a problem with your
brakes.

To avoid costly brake repairs, do
not continue to drive with worn
brake pads.

WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH, do not operate the parking brake while the
vehicle is moving except in an
emergency situation. It could
damage the brake system and
lead to an accident.

OTL055012

Always set the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. To apply the
parking brake:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down as far as possible.

Driving your vehicle

NOTICE

Parking Brake

i Information
Always replace brake pads as complete front or rear axle sets.

5-29

Driving your vehicle

WARNING
• Whenever leaving the vehicle

OTL055014

To release:
Firmly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the parking brake pedal
down and it will release automatically.
If the parking brake does not release
or does not release all the way, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

5-30

or parking, always come to a
complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into P (Park)
position, then apply the parking brake, and place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF
position.
Vehicles with the parking
brake not fully engaged are at
risk for moving inadvertently
and causing injury to yourself
or others.
• NEVER allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• Only release the parking
brake when you are seated
inside the vehicle with your
foot firmly on the brake pedal.

NOTICE

• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal while the parking brake is
engaged. If you depress the
accelerator pedal with the parking brake engaged, warning will
sound. Damage to the parking
brake may occur.
• Driving with the parking brake
on can overheat the braking system and cause premature wear
or damage to brake parts. Make
sure the parking brake is
released and the Brake Warning
Light is off before driving.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

WARNING
An Anti-Lock Braking System
(ABS) or an Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system will not
prevent accidents due to
improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always
maintain a safe distance
between you and objects ahead
of you. Vehicle speeds should
always be reduced during
extreme road conditions. The
braking distance for cars
equipped with ABS or ESC may
be longer than for those without
these systems in the following
road conditions.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• Drive your vehicle at reduced
speeds during the following
conditions:
• Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
• On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different
surface height.
• Tire chains are installed on
your vehicle.
The safety features of an ABS
or ESC equipped vehicle should
not be tested by high speed
driving or cornering. This could
endanger the safety of yourself
or others.
ABS is an electronic braking system
that helps prevent a braking skid.
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time.

5-31

5
Driving your vehicle

Check the Parking
Brake Warning Light
by placing the ignition
switch to the ON position (do not start the
engine).
This light will be illuminated when the
parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is released and the Brake
Warning Light is OFF.
If the Parking Brake Warning Light
remains on after the parking brake is
released while engine is running,
there may be a malfunction in the
brake system. Immediate attention is
necessary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location.

Driving your vehicle

Using ABS
To obtain the maximum benefit from
your ABS in an emergency situation,
do not attempt to modulate your
brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Depress your
brake pedal as hard as possible.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and it means your ABS is
active.
ABS does not reduce the time or distance it takes to stop the vehicle.
Always maintain a safe distance from
the vehicle in front of you.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from sudden changes in
direction, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather conditions.

5-32

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stability. Always steer moderately when
braking hard. Severe or sharp steering wheel movement can still cause
your vehicle to veer into oncoming
traffic or off the road.
On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping
distance than for vehicles equipped
with a conventional brake system.
The ABS warning light (
) will stay
on for several seconds after the ignition switch is in the ON position.
During that time, the ABS will go
through self-diagnosis and the light
will go off if everything is normal. If
the light stays on, you may have a
problem with your ABS. Contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible

WARNING
If the ABS warning light (
) is
on and stays on, you may have
a problem with the ABS. Your
power brakes will work normally. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death, contact your
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as
possible.

CAUTION

When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the ABS
warning light (
) may turn on at the
same time. This happens because of
the low battery voltage. It does not
mean your ABS is malfunctioning.
Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control
(ESC)

OTL055021

The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system helps to stabilize the
vehicle during cornering maneuvers.
ESC checks where you are steering
and where the vehicle is actually
going. ESC applies braking pressure
to any one of the vehicle’s brakes
and intervenes in the engine management system to assist the driver
with keeping the vehicle on the
intended path. It is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. Always
adjust your speed and driving to the
road conditions.

5-33

5
Driving your vehicle

When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy
road, and apply your brakes
continuously, the ABS will be
active continuously and the
ABS warning light (
) may
illuminate. Pull your car over to
a safe place and turn the engine
off.
Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your
ABS system is normal.
Otherwise, you may have a
problem with your ABS system.
Contact an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.

i Information

Driving your vehicle

WARNING
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when
cornering. The ESC system will
not prevent accidents.
Excessive speed in turns, abrupt
maneuvers, and hydroplaning
on wet surfaces can result in
severe accidents.

5-34

ESC operation
ESC ON condition
When the ignition switch is in the ON
position, the ESC and the ESC OFF
indicator lights illuminate for approximately three seconds. After both
lights go off, the ESC is enabled.

When operating
When the ESC is in operation, the ESC indicator light
blinks:
• When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear sounds from
the brakes, or feel a corresponding
sensation in the brake pedal. This
is normal and it means your ESC is
active.
• When the ESC activates, the
engine may not respond to the
accelerator as it does under routine conditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use
when the ESC activates, the
Cruise Control automatically disengages. The Cruise Control can be
reengaged when the road conditions allow. See "Cruise Control
System" later in this chapter. (if
equipped)
• When moving out of the mud or
driving on a slippery road, the
engine RPM (revolutions per
minute) may not increase even if
you press the accelerator pedal
deeply. This is to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and
does not indicate a problem.

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

Indicator lights
■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

OLF054439N/OLF054101N

ESC OFF condition
To cancel ESC operation :

• State 2
Press the ESC OFF button continuously for more than 3 seconds. The
ESC OFF indicator light and message illuminates and a warning
chime sounds. In this state, both the
traction control function of ESC
(engine management) and the brake
control function of ESC (braking
management) are disabled.
If the ignition switch is placed to the
LOCK/OFF position when ESC is off,
ESC remains off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will automatically turn
on again.

When the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position, the ESC indicator
light illuminates, then goes off if the
ESC system is operating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks whenever the ESC is operating.
If ESC indicator light stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction with
the ESC system. When this warning
light illuminates have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible.

5-35

5
Driving your vehicle

• State 1
Press the ESC OFF button briefly.
The ESC OFF indicator light and
message will illuminate. In this state,
the traction control function of ESC
(engine management) is disabled,
but the brake control function of ESC
(braking management) still operates.

OTLE055030/OTLE055029

Driving your vehicle

The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off.

WARNING
When the ESC is blinking, this
indicates the ESC is active:
Drive slowly and NEVER attempt
to accelerate. NEVER turn the
ESC off while the ESC indicator
light is blinking or you may lose
control of the vehicle resulting in
an accident.
NOTICE

Driving with wheels and tires with
different sizes may cause the ESC
system to malfunction. Before
replacing tires, make sure all four
tires and wheels are the same
size. Never drive the vehicle with
different sized tires and wheels
installed.

5-36

ESC OFF usage
When Driving
The ESC OFF mode should only be
used briefly to help free the vehicle if
stuck in snow or mud by temporarily
stopping operation of the ESC to
maintain wheel torque.
To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving on
a flat road surface.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission:
• Do not allow wheel(s) of one
axle to spin excessively while
the ESC, ABS, and parking brake
warning lights are displayed.
The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Reduce engine power and do
not spin the wheel(s) excessively while these lights are displayed.
• When operating the vehicle on a
dynamometer, make sure the
ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light
illuminated).

i Information
Turning the ESC off does not affect
ABS or standard brake system operation.

Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM)

VSM operation
VSM ON condition

The Vehicle Stability Management
(VSM) is a function of the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system. It
helps ensure the vehicle stays stable
when accelerating or braking suddenly on wet, slippery and rough
roads where traction over the four
tires can suddenly become uneven.

The VSM operates when:
• The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) is on.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve
roads.
• Vehicle speed is approximately
above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the
vehicle is braking on rough roads.

WARNING

The VSM does not operate when:
• Driving on bank road such as
gradient or incline.
• Driving rearward.
• ESC OFF indicator light is on.
• EPS (Electric Power Steering)
warning light ( ) is on.

When operating
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may activate the
ESC, you may hear sounds from the
brakes, or feel a corresponding sensation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your VSM is active.

Driving your vehicle

Take the following precautions
when using the Vehicle Stability
Management (VSM):
• ALWAYS check the speed and
the distance to the vehicle
ahead. The VSM is not a substitute for safe driving practices.
• Never drive too fast for the
road conditions. The VSM system will not prevent accidents. Excessive speed in bad
weather, slippery and uneven
roads can result in severe
accidents.

NOTICE

5-37

Driving your vehicle

VSM OFF condition
To cancel VSM operation, press the
ESC OFF button. ESC OFF indicator
light ( ) will illuminate.
To turn on VSM, press the ESC OFF
button again. The ESC OFF indicator
light will go out.

WARNING
If ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS
warning light ( ) stays on, your
vehicle may have a malfunction
with the VSM system. When the
warning light illuminates, have
your vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as
soon as possible.
Driving with wheels and tires with different sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. Before replacing
tires, make sure all four tires and
wheels are the same size. Never
drive the vehicle with different sized
tires and wheels installed.

5-38

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)
helps prevent the vehicle from rolling
backwards when starting a vehicle
from a stop on a hill. The system
operates the brakes automatically for
approximately 2 seconds and releases the brake after 2 seconds or when
the accelerator pedal is depressed.

WARNING
Always be ready to depress the
accelerator pedal when starting
off on a incline.The HAC activates
only for approximately 2 seconds.

NOTICE

• The HAC does not operate when
the shift lever is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral)
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is off but does not activate when the ESC has malfunctioned.

Downhill Brake Control (DBC)

WARNING
Always turn off the DBC on normal roads. The DBC might activate inadvertently from the standby mode when driving through
speed bumps or making sharp
curves.

NOTICE

• The DBC defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position.
• Noise or vibration may occur
from the brakes when the DBC is
activated.
• The rear stop light comes on
when DBC is activated.

OTLA055119

5
Driving your vehicle

The Downhill Brake Control (DBC)
feature assists the driver to descend
down a steep hill without having to
depress the brake pedal. The system
automatically applies the brakes to
maintain the vehicle speed below 5
mph (8 km/h) and allows the driver to
concentrate on steering the vehicle
down hill.

5-39

Driving your vehicle

DBC operation
Mode

WARNING

Indicator light

Description
Press the DBC button when vehicle speed is under
25 mph (40 km/h). The DBC system will turn ON and
enter the standby mode.

Standby
illuminated

The system does not turn ON if vehicle speed is over
25 mph (40 km/h).
In the standby mode, if vehicle speed is under 22 mph
(35 km/h) while driving down a steep hill, the DBC will
activate automatically.

Activated
blinks

Temporarily
deactivated
illuminated

NOTICE
In the activated mode, the DBC will temporarily deactivate under the following conditions:
• The hill is not steep enough.
• The brake pedal or accelerator pedal is depressed.
If the above conditions are not met, the DBC will automatically activate again.
The DBC will turn OFF under the following conditions:

OFF

• The DBC button is pressed again.
not
illuminated

5-40

If the DBC red indicator light
illuminates, the system may
have overheated or have malfunctioned. When the warning
light illuminates even though
the DBC system has cooled off,
have your vehicle checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
as soon as possible.

• Vehicle speed is over 38 mph (60 km/h).

• The DBC may not deactivate on
steep inclines even though the
brake or accelerator pedal is
depressed.
• The DBC does not operate
when:
- The shift lever is in P (Park).
- The ESC is activated.

Good Braking Practices

WARNING

Keep your foot firmly on the brake
pedal when the vehicle is stopped to
prevent the vehicle from rolling forward.

5
Driving your vehicle

Whenever leaving the vehicle or
parking, always come to a complete stop and continue to
depress the brake pedal. Move
the shift lever into the P (Park)
position, then apply the parking
brake, and place the ignition
switch in the OFF position.
Vehicles parked with the parking brake not applied or not
fully engaged may roll inadvertently and may cause injury to
the driver and others. ALWAYS
apply the parking brake before
exiting the vehicle.

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The
brakes may get wet if the vehicle is
driven through standing water or if it
is washed. Your vehicle will not stop
as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet
brakes may cause the vehicle to pull
to one side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action returns
to normal, taking care to keep the
vehicle under control at all times. If
the braking action does not return to
normal, stop as soon as it is safe to
do so and call an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
DO NOT drive with your foot resting
on the brake pedal. Even light, but
constant pedal pressure can result in
the brakes overheating, brake wear,
and possibly even brake failure.
If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe location.

5-41

Driving your vehicle

ALL WHEEL DRIVE (AWD) (IF EQUIPPED)
The All Wheel Drive (AWD) system
delivers engine torque to both the
front and rear wheels for extra traction. AWD is useful when maximum
traction is required on slippery,
muddy, wet, or snow-covered roads.
Occasional off-road use such as
established unpaved roads and trails
are OK. It is always important that
the driver carefully reduces the
speed to a level that does not exceed
the safe operating speed for those
conditions.

5-42

WARNING
To reduce the risk of SERIOUS
INJURY or DEATH:
• Do not drive in conditions that
exceed the vehicles intended
design such as challenging
off-road conditions.
• Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning.
• Do not make quick steering
wheel movements, such as
sharp lane changes or fast,
sharp turns.
• The risk of a rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway
speeds.
• Loss of control often occurs if
two or more wheels drop off
the roadway and the driver
over steers to reenter the
roadway.
• In the event your vehicle
leaves the roadway, do not
steer sharply. Instead, slow
down before pulling back into
the travel lanes.

NOTICE

• Do not drive in water if the level
is higher than the bottom of the
vehicle.
• Check your brake condition
once you are out of mud or
water. Depress the brake pedal
several times as you move slowly until you feel normal braking
return.
• Shorten your scheduled maintenance interval if you drive in offroad conditions such as sand,
mud or water (see "Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions"
in chapter 7).
• Always wash your vehicle thoroughly after off road use, especially the bottom of the vehicle.
• Be sure to equip the vehicle with
four tires of the same size and
type.
• Make sure that a full time AWD
vehicle is towed by a flat bed
tow truck.

AWD operation
All Wheel Drive (AWD) mode selection
Transfer mode

Selection button

Indicator light

AWD AUTO
(AWD LOCK is
deactivated)
(not illuminated)

(illuminated)

In the AWD AUTO mode, under normal operating conditions,
the vehicle operates similar to conventional 2WD vehicles. If the
system determines there is a need for four wheel drive, the
engine's driving power is distributed to all four wheels automatically.
Use this mode when driving on normal roads.
In the AWD LOCK mode, the system is deactivated when vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30 km/h) and the mode is shifted to
AWD AUTO mode. If the vehicle speed is reduced back down
to 20 mph (30 km/h) the system shifts back into AWD LOCK
mode.
Use this mode when driving up or down sharp inclines, driving
off-road, driving on sandy and muddy roads, etc. to maximize
traction

WARNING
If AWD warning light (
) stays on the instrument cluster, your vehicle may have a malfunction with the
AWD system. When the AWD warning light (
) illuminates have your vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

5-43

5
Driving your vehicle

AWD LOCK

Description

Driving your vehicle

CAUTION
When driving on normal roads,
deactivate the AWD LOCK mode
by pushing the AWD LOCK button (AWD LOCK indicator light
goes off). Driving on normal
roads with the AWD LOCK
mode, especially, when cornering may cause mechanical
noise or vibration. The noise
and vibration will disappear
when the AWD LOCK mode is
deactivated. Prolong driving
with the noise and vibration
may damage some parts of the
power train.
NOTICE

When the AWD LOCK mode is
deactivated, a sensation may be
felt as the driving power is delivered entirely to the front wheels.

5-44

For safe AWD operation
Before driving
• Make sure all passengers are
wearing seat belts.
• Sit upright and closer to the steering wheel than usual. Adjust the
steering wheel to a position comfortable for you to drive.

Driving on snow-covered or icy
roads
• Start off slowly by applying the
accelerator pedal gently.
• Use snow tires or tire chains.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Apply engine braking during deceleration by switching the gear shift
lever to Manual Shift Mode and
manually selecting a lower gear.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent skids.

Driving in sand or mud
• Maintain slow and constant speed.
• Use tire chains driving in mud if
necessary.
• Keep sufficient distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you.
• Reduce vehicle speed and always
check the road condition.
• Avoid speeding, rapid acceleration,
sudden brake applications, and
sharp turns to prevent getting
stuck.

CAUTION
When the vehicle is stuck in
snow, sand or mud, place a nonslip material under the drive
wheels to provide traction OR
Slowly spin the wheels in forward and reverse directions
which causes a rocking motion
that may free the vehicle.
However, avoid running the
engine continuously at high
rpm, doing so may damage the
AWD system.

WARNING
Exercise extreme caution when
driving up or down steep hills.
The vehicle may flip over
depending on the grade, the terrain, and the trail conditions.

OLMB053017

WARNING

Do not drive across the contour
of steep hills. A slight change in
the wheel angle can destabilize
the vehicle, or a stable vehicle
may lose stability if the vehicle
stops its forward motion. Your
vehicle may roll over and lead to
a serious injury or death.

5-45

Driving your vehicle

Driving up or down hills
• Driving uphill
- Before starting off, check if it is
possible to drive uphill.
- Drive as straight as possible.
• Driving downhill
- Do not change gear while driving
downhill. Select gear before driving downhill.
- Drive slowly using engine braking
while driving downhill.
- Drive straight as possible.

OLMB053018

Driving your vehicle

Driving through water
• Try to avoid driving in deep standing water. It may stall your engine
and clog your exhaust system.
• If you need to drive in water, stop
your vehicle, set the vehicle in
AWD LOCK mode and drive under
5 mph (8 km/h).
• Do not change gear while driving in
water.

CAUTION
Always drive slowly in water. If
you drive too fast, water may
get into the engine compartment and wet the ignition system causing your vehicle to
suddenly stop.

5-46

Additional driving conditions
• Become familiar with the off-road
conditions before driving.
• Always pay attention when driving
off-road and avoid dangerous
areas.
• Drive slowly when driving in heavy
wind.
• Reduce vehicle speed when cornering. The center of gravity of
AWD vehicles is higher than conventional 2WD vehicles, making
them more likely to roll over when
you rapidly turn corners.

OTLE055003

• Always hold the steering wheel
firmly when you are driving offroad.

WARNING
Do not grab the inside of the
steering wheel when you are
driving off-road. You may hurt
your arm by a sudden steering
maneuver or from steering wheel
rebound due to an impact with
objects on the ground.You could
lose control of the steering wheel
that may lead to serious injury or
death.

Emergency precautions
Tires

WARNING
Never start or run the engine
while a full-time AWD vehicle is
raised on a jack. The vehicle can
slip or roll off of a jack causing
serious injury or death to you or
those nearby.

AWD vehicles must be towed with a
wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the
ground. For more information, refer
to "Towing" in chapter 6.

Dynamometer testing
A full-time AWD vehicle must be tested on a special four wheel chassis
dynamometer.

Temporary Free Roller
Roll Tester (Speedometer)
OTL055117

A full-time AWD vehicle should not
be tested on a 2WD roll tester. If a
2WD roll tester must be used, perform the following procedure:
1. Check the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
2. Place the front wheels on the roll
tester for a speedometer test as
shown in the illustration.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Place the rear wheels on the temporary free roller as shown in the
illustration.

5-47

5
Driving your vehicle

Do not use a tire and wheel package
with a different size and type from
the one originally installed on your
vehicle. It can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which
could lead to steering failure or
rollover causing serious injury.
When replacing the tires, be sure to
equip all four tires with the tire and
wheel of the same size, type, tread,
brand and load-carrying capacity. If
you equip your vehicle with any
tire/wheel combination not recommended by HYUNDAI for off-road
driving, you should not use these
tires for highway driving.

Towing

Driving your vehicle

CAUTION
• Never engage the parking
brake while performing the
test.
• When the vehicle is lifted up,
do not operate the front and
rear wheel separately. All four
wheels should be operated.

WARNING
Keep away from the front of the
vehicle while the vehicle is in
gear on the dynamometer. The
vehicle can jump forward and
cause serious injury or death.

5-48

DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
The mode changes, as below,
whenever the DRIVE MODE button
is pressed.
NORMAL
SPORT

ECO

When NORMAL mode is selected,
it is not displayed on the instrument
cluster.
OTLA055147

When the Drive Mode is
set to ECO mode, the
engine and transmission
control logic are changed
to maximize fuel efficiency.
• When the ECO mode is selected
by pressing the DRIVE MODE button, the ECO indicator (green
color) will illuminate.
• If the vehicle is set to ECO mode,
when the engine is turned OFF
and restarted the Drive Mode setting will remain in ECO mode.

i Information
Fuel efficiency depends on the driver's
driving habit and road condition.

i Information
If there is a problem with the instrument cluster, the drive mode will be in
NORMAL mode and may not change
to ECO mode or SPORT mode.

5-49

5
Driving your vehicle

The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver's preference
or road condition.
The system resets to be in the NORMAL mode (except for ECO mode),
when the engine is restarted.

ECO mode

Driving your vehicle

When the ECO mode is activated:
• The acceleration response may be
slightly reduced as the accelerator
pedal is depressed moderately.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited.
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transmission or dual clutch transmission may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the ECO mode is
activated to improve fuel efficiency.

Limitation of the ECO mode operation:
If the following conditions occur while
the ECO mode is operating, the system operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indicator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes normal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
engine torque is restricted.
• When driving the vehicle with the
automatic transmission or the dual
clutch transmission gear shift lever
in manual shift mode.
The system will be limited according to the shift location.

SPORT mode
SPORT mode manages
the driving dynamics by
automatically adjusting the
electric power steering
and the engine and transmission
control logic for enhanced driver performance.
• When SPORT mode is selected by
pressing the DRIVE MODE button,
the SPORT indicator (yellow color)
will illuminate.
• Whenever the engine is restarted,
the Drive Mode will revert back to
NORMAL mode. If SPORT mode is
desired, re-select SPORT mode
from the DRIVE MODE button.
• When SPORT mode is activated:
- The engine rpm will tend to
remain raised over a certain
length of time even after releasing the accelerator
- Upshifts are delayed when accelerating

i Information
In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency
may decrease.
5-50

BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)

Blind spot area

Closing at high speed

The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses radar sensors in the rear
bumper to monitor and warn the driver of an approaching vehicle in the
driver's blind spot area.
The system monitors the rear area of
the vehicle and provides information
to the driver with an audible alert and
an indicator on the outside side view
mirrors.

WARNING
• Always be aware of road conditions while driving and be
alert for unexpected situations
even though the Blind Spot
Detection System is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemental system to assist you. Do not
entirely rely on the system.
Always pay attention, while
driving, for your safety.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substitute for proper and safe driving. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the
vehicle.

5-51

5
Driving your vehicle

OLF054067L

(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The blind spot detection range
varies relative to vehicle speed.
Note that if your vehicle is traveling much faster than the vehicles
around you, the warning will not
occur.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
The Lane Change Assist feature
will alert you when a vehicle is
approaching in an adjacent lane
at a high rate of speed. If the driver activates the turn signal when
the system detects an oncoming
vehicle, the system sounds an
audible alert.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature monitors approaching cross
traffic from the left and right side
of the vehicle when your vehicle is
moving in reverse. The feature will
operate when the vehicle is moving in reverse below about 6 mph
(10 km/h). If oncoming cross traffic is detected a warning chime
will sound.

Driving your vehicle

BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions

To cancel:
Press the BSD switch again. The
indicator on the switch will go off.
When the system is not used, turn the
system off by turning off the switch.

i Information

OTL055028

To operate:
Press the BSD switch with the ignition switch in the ON position.
The indicator on the BSD switch will
illuminate. When the vehicle speed
exceeds 20 mph (30 km/h), the system will be activated.

5-52

• If the Engine Start/Stop button is
pressed OFF and then ON again, the
BSD system returns to the previous
state.
• When the system is turned on, the
warning light will illuminate for 3
seconds on the outer side view mirror.

The system will activate when:
1. The system is on.
2. The vehicle speed is above about
20 mph (30 km/h).
3. An oncoming vehicle is detected
in the blind spot area.

■ Left side

■ Right side

OTL055039

OTL055030

Second stage alert
A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:
1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system
(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) AND
2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being
detected).
When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will
also blink.
If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the warning chime will be deactivated.

5-53

5
Driving your vehicle

First stage alert
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outer side
view mirror.
Once the detected vehicle is no
longer within the blind spot area, the
warning will turn off according to the
driving conditions of the vehicle.

OTL055029

Driving your vehicle

Detecting sensor

Warning message

OTL055031

OLF054217N

The sensors are located inside the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the proper operation of the system.

• This warning message may appear
when :
- One or both of the sensors on the
rear bumper is blocked by dirt or
snow or a foreign object
- Driving in rural areas where the
BSD sensor does not detect
another vehicle for an extended
period of time
- When there is inclement weather
such as heavy snow or rain
If any of these conditions occur, the
light on the BSD switch and the system will turn off automatically.

5-54

When the BSD cancelled warning
message is displayed in the cluster,
check to make sure that the rear
bumper is free from any dirt or snow
in the areas where the sensor is
located. Remove any dirt, snow, or
foreign material that could interfere
with the radar sensors.
After any dirt or debris is removed,
the BSD system should operate normally after about 10 minutes of driving the vehicle.
If the system still does not operate
normally have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

■ Type A

■ Type B

RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert feature
monitors approaching cross traffic
from the left and right side of the
vehicle when your vehicle is moving
in reverse.

Operating conditions
■ Type A

■ Type B

OLFH054434L/OTLE055040
OTLA055144/OTLA055145

To operate:
Go to the User Settings Mode
(Driving Assist) and select RCTA
(Rear Cross Traffic Alert) on the LCD
display (For more information,
refer to "LCD Display" in chapter
3.). The system will turn on and
standby to activate. The system will
activate when vehicle speed is below
6 mph (10 km/h) with the shift lever in
R (Reverse).

5-55

5
Driving your vehicle

If there is a problem with the BSD
system, a warning message will
appear and the light on the switch will
turn off. The system will turn off automatically. Have your vehicle inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Driving your vehicle

i Information
The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
detecting range is approximately 1 65 ft (0.5 – 20 m). An approaching
vehicle will be detected if their vehicle
speed is within 2.5 - 22.5 mph (4 - 36
km/h).
Note that the detecting range may
vary under certain conditions. As
always, use caution and pay close
attention to your surroundings when
backing your vehicle.

Warning type
■ Left
• Type A

i Information
• Type B

OTLE055041/OTLE055043
■ Right
• Type A

• Type B

OTLE055042/OTLE055044

If the vehicle detected by the sensors
approaches your vehicle, the warning chime will sound, the warning
light on the outer side view mirror will
blink and a message will appear on
the LCD display.
5-56

• The warning chime will turn off
when the detected vehicle moves out
of the sensing area or if your vehicle
is moved away from the detected
vehicle.
• The system may not operate properly due to other factors or circumstances. Always pay attention to
your surroundings.
• If the sensing area near the rear
bumper is blocked by either a wall
or barrier or by a parked vehicle,
the system sensing area may be
reduced.

WARNING
• The warning light on the outer

Non-operating condition
The BSD indicator on the outer side
view mirror may not illuminate
properly when:
- The outer side view mirror housing
is damaged
- The mirror is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris
- The window is covered with dirt,
snow, or debris
- The window is tinted

NOTICE

Driving your vehicle

side view mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning light
and neglect to see the surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely rely
on the system but check your
surrounding before changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check your surroundings while driving.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving practices. Always drive
safely and use caution when
changing lanes or backing up
your vehicle. The Blind Spot
Detection System (BSD) may
not detect every object alongside the vehicle.

• The system may not work properly when the bumper has been
damaged, or if the rear bumper
has been replaced or repaired.
• The sensing range differs somewhat according to the width of
the road. When the road is narrow, the system may detect
other vehicles in the next lane.
• The system may turn off due to
strong electromagnetic waves.

5-57

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the system
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or
objects in certain circumstances.
- The vehicle drives on a curved road
or through a tollgate.
- The sensor is polluted with rain,
snow, mud, etc.
- The rear bumper where the sensor
is located is covered with a foreign
object such as a bumper sticker, a
bumper guard, a bike stand, etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged, or
the sensor is out of the original
default position.
- The vehicle height gets lower or
higher due to heavy loading in a
trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc.
- The vehicle drives in inclement
weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
- There is a fixed object near the
vehicle, such as a guardrail.
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
5-58

- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to
you and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes at a
very fast speed.
- While changing lanes.
- While going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle approaches
very close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
- When the sensors are blocked by
the other vehicles, walls or parkinglot pillars.
- When the detected vehicle also
moves back, as your vehicle drives
back.
- If there are small objects in the
detecting area such as a shopping
cart or a baby carriage
- If there is a low height vehicle such
as a sports car

- When other vehicles are close to
your vehicle
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from you
OR when the vehicle two lanes
away moves to the next lane from
you.
- When driving through a narrow
road with many trees or bushes.

i Information
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED)
The
Autonomous
Emergency
Braking (AEB) system is designed to
detect and monitor the vehicle ahead
or detect a pedestrian in the roadway
through radar signals and camera
recognition to warn the driver that a
collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.

WARNING
Take the following precautions
when using the Autonomous
Emergency Braking (AEB):

System setting and activation
System setting
■ Type A

■ Type B

• This system is only a supple-

OTLA055076/OTLA055072

The driver can activate the AEB by
placing the ignition switch to the ON
position and by selecting 'User
Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'AEB
(Autonomous Braking System)'. The
AEB deactivates, when the driver
cancels the system setting.

5-59

5
Driving your vehicle

mental system and it is not
intended to, nor does it replace
the need for extreme care and
attention of the driver. The
sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are
limited. Pay attention to the
road conditions at all times.
• NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering.
• Always drive cautiously to
prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. AEB does not stop the
vehicle completely and is not
a collision avoidance system.

Driving your vehicle

The warning light illuminates on the LCD display,
when you cancel the AEB
system. The driver can
monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on
the LCD display. If the warning light
remains ON when the AEB is activated, have the system checked by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

■ Type A

■ Type B

OTLA055077/OTLE055078

OTLA055073/OTLE055074

The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings
in the Driver LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision
Warning include the following:
• EARLY - When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs.
• NORMAL - When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated normally. This setting allows for a nominal amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead before the initial warning occurs.
• LATE - When this condition is selected, the initial Forward Collision
Warning is activated later than normal. This setting reduces the
amount of distance between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead
before the initial warning occurs.

5-60

Prerequisite for activation

WARNING
• The AEB automatically activates upon placing the ignition switch to the ON position.
The driver can deactivate the
AEB by canceling the system
setting on the LCD display.
• The AEB automatically deactivates upon canceling the
ESC. When the ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot be activated on the LCD display.

AEB warning message and
system control
The AEB produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels.
Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels.

5
Driving your vehicle

The AEB gets ready to be activated,
when the AEB is selected on the
LCD display, and when the following
prerequisites are satisfied.
- The ESC is activated.
- To enable the system to detect
pedestrians ahead, the vehicle
driving speed must be between 5 40 mph (8 - 65 km/h).
- To enable the system to detect a
vehicle ahead, the vehicle driving
speed must be between 5 - 110
mph (8 - 180 km/h).
When traveling above 50 mph (80
km/h), the AEB system only initiates
partial braking. This is to prevent
unintended full braking to stop in the
middle of the highway.

5-61

Driving your vehicle

Forward Warning (1st warning)

Collision Warning (2nd warning)

OTLE055047

OTLE055045

This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a warning
chime.
The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User
Settings in the Driver LCD display.
The options for the initial Forward
Collision Warning include EARLY,
NORMAL, or LATE initial warning
time.

• This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
chime.
• Additionally, some vehicle system
intervention occurs by the engine
management system to help decelerate the vehicle.
- If the detected vehicle in front is
driving slower than 50 mph (80
km/h), your vehicle speed may
decelerate sharply to avoid a collision. If the detected vehicle in
front is driving faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h), your vehicle speed
may decelerate moderately.

5-62

- If your vehicle is traveling less
than 40 mph (65 km/h) and a
pedestrian is detected within the
Collision Warning (2nd warning)
stage, your vehicle speed may
decelerate sharply to avoid a collision.

Emergency braking
(3rd warning)

- When your vehicle drives slower
than 40 mph (65 km/h) with a
passer-by in front, the driving
speed may abruptly decrease.
When your vehicle drives faster
than 70 km/h with a pedestrian in
front, the AEB does not operate.

OTLE055046

• In an urgent situation, the braking
system enters into the ready status
for prompt reaction against the driver’s depressing the brake pedal.
• The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking performance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal.
• The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver
sharply depresses the brake pedal,
or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel.
• The braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear.

CAUTION
The driver should always use
extreme caution while operating
the vehicle, whether or not there
is a warning message or alarm
from the AEB system.

5-63

5
Driving your vehicle

• This warning message appears on
the LCD display with a warning
alarm.
• Additionally, automatic emergency
braking of the vehicle is applied in
order to avoid a collision.
- If your vehicle is traveling less
than 40 mph (65 km/h) and a
pedestrian is detected within the
Emergency Braking stage, automatic emergency braking of the
vehicle is applied. In this condition, your vehicle speed will
decelerate sharply to avoid a collision.

Brake operation

Driving your vehicle

WARNING

AEB front radar sensor

Warning message and warning
light
■ Type A

The braking control cannot
completely stop the vehicle nor
avoid all collisions. The driver
should hold the responsibility
to safely drive and control the
vehicle.

■ Type B

WARNING
The AEB system logic operates
within certain parameters, such
as the distance from the vehicle
or pedestrian ahead, the speed
of the vehicle ahead, and the
driver's vehicle speed. Certain
conditions such as inclement
weather and road conditions
may affect the operation of the
AEB system.

5-64

OTLA055088

In order for the AEB system to operate properly, always make sure the
radar sensor lens cover is clean and
free of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt,
snow, or foreign substances on the
lens may adversely affect the sensing performance of the radar.

OTLE055049/OTLE055048

When the sensor lens cover is
blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the
AEB system operation may stop
temporarily. If this occurs, a warning
message will appear on the LCD display. Remove any dirt, snow, or
debris and clean the radar sensor
lens cover before operating the AEB
system.

NOTICE

System malfunction
■ Type A

■ Type B

OTLE055071/OTLE055070

• When the AEB is not working properly, the AEB warning light (
)
will illuminate and the warning
message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light
(
) will illuminate. In this case,
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• The AEB warning message may
appear along with the illumination
of the ESC warning light.

5-65

5
Driving your vehicle

• Do not apply foreign objects
such as a bumper sticker or a
bumper guard near the radar
sensor. Doing so may adversely
affect the sensing performance
of the radar.
• Always keep the radar sensor
and lens cover clean and free of
dirt and debris.
• Use only a soft cloth to wash the
vehicle. Do not spray pressurized water directly on the sensor
or sensor cover.
• Be careful not to apply unnecessary force on the radar sensor or
sensor cover. If the sensor is
forcibly moved out of proper
alignment, the AEB system may
not operate correctly. In this
case, a warning message may
not be displayed. Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• If the front bumper becomes
damaged in the area around the
radar sensor, the AEB system
may not operate properly. Have
the vehicle inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Use only genuine HYUNDAI
parts to repair or replace a damaged sensor or sensor cover.
Do not apply paint to the sensor
cover.

Driving your vehicle

WARNING
• The AEB is only a supplemental system for the driver’s convenience. The driver should
hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do
not solely depend on the AEB
system. Rather, maintain a
safe braking distance, and, if
necessary, depress the brake
pedal to reduce the driving
speed.
• In certain instances and
under certain driving conditions, the AEB system may
activate prematurely. This initial warning message appears
on the LCD display with a
warning chime.
Also, in certain instances the
front radar sensor or camera
recognition system may not
detect the vehicle or pedestrian ahead. The AEB system
may not activate and the
warning message will not be
displayed.
(Continued)
5-66

(Continued)
• If there is a malfunction with
the AEB system, the automatic emergency braking is not
applied even though the braking system is operating normally.
• The AEB system operates
only to detect vehicles or
pedestrians in front of the
vehicle.
The AEB system does not
operate when the vehicle is in
reverse.
The AEB system is not
designed to detect other
objects on the road such as
animals.
The AEB system does not
detect cross traffic vehicles
that are approaching.
The AEB system cannot
detect the driver approaching
the side view of a parked vehicle (for example on a dead
end street.)
(Continued)

(Continued)
In these cases, you must
maintain a safe braking distance, and if necessary,
depress the brake pedal to
reduce the driving speed in
order to maintain a safe distance.

Detecting vehicles

The Autonomous Emergency Braking
(AEB) system is designed to monitor
the vehicle ahead or a pedestrian in
the roadway through radar signals and
camera recognition to warn the driver
that a collision is imminent, and if necessary, apply emergency braking.
In certain situations, the radar sensor or the camera may not be able to
detect the vehicle or pedestrian
ahead. In these cases, the AEB system may not operate normally. The
driver must pay careful attention in
the following situations where the
AEB operation may be limited:v

The sensor may be limited when:
- The radar sensor or camera is
blocked with a foreign object or
debris
- Inclement weather such as heavy
rain or snow obscures the field of
view of the radar sensor or camera
- There is interference by electromagnetic waves
- There is severe irregular reflection
from the radar sensor
- The vehicle in front is too small to
be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a motorcycle or a bicycle, etc.)
- The vehicle in front is an oversize
vehicle or trailer that is too big to
be detected by the camera recognition system (for example a tractor
trailer, etc.)
- The driver's field of view is not well
illuminated (either too dark or too
much reflection or too much backlight that obscures the field of view)

- The vehicle in front does not have
their rear lights properly turned ON
- The outside brightness changes
suddenly, for example when entering or exiting a tunnel
- The vehicle in front is driving erratically

5
Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the system

5-67

Driving your vehicle

Always keep your eyes forward while
driving upward or downward on a
slope, and, if necessary, depress the
brake pedal to reduce your driving
speed in order to maintain distance.

OTL055132

OTL055134

- Driving on a curve
The performance of the AEB system
may be limited when driving on a
curved road.
In certain instances on a curved
road, the AEB system may activate
prematurely.
Also, in certain instances the front
radar sensor or camera recognition
system may not detect the vehicle
traveling on a curved road.
In these cases, the driver must maintain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.

- Driving on a slope
The performance of the AEB
decreases while driving upward or
downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same
lane. It may unnecessarily produce
the warning message and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the
warning message and the warning
alarm at all.
When the AEB suddenly recognizes
the vehicle in front while passing
over a slope, you may experience
sharp deceleration.

5-68

OTL055136

OTL055137

- Changing lanes
When a vehicle changes lanes in
front of you, the AEB system may not
immediately detect the vehicle, especially if the vehicle changes lanes
abruptly. In this case, you must maintain a safe braking distance, and if
necessary, depress the brake pedal
to reduce your driving speed in order
to maintain a safe distance.

When driving in stop-and-go traffic,
and a stopped vehicle in front of you
merges out of the lane, the AEB system may not immediately detect the
new vehicle that is now in front of
you. In this case, you must maintain
a safe braking distance, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain a safe distance.

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you
If the vehicle in front of you has cargo
that extends rearward from the cab,
or when the vehicle in front of you
has higher ground clearance, additional special attention is required.
The AEB system may not be able to
detect the cargo extending from the
vehicle. In these instances, you must
maintain a safe braking distance
from the rearmost object, and if necessary, depress the brake pedal to
reduce your driving speed in order to
maintain distance.

5-69

5
Driving your vehicle

OTL055135

Driving your vehicle

Detecting pedestrians
The sensor may be limited when:
- The pedestrian is not fully detected
by the camera recognition system,
for example, if the pedestrian is
leaning over or is not fully walking
upright
- The pedestrian is moving very
quickly or appears abruptly in the
camera detection area
The pedestrian is wearing clothing
that easily blends into the background, making it difficult to be
detected by the camera recognition system
- The outside lighting is too bright
(e.g. when driving in bright sunlight
or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.
when driving on a dark rural road
at night)
- It is difficult to detect and distinguish the pedestrian from other
objects in the surroundings, for
example, when there is a group of
pedestrians or a large crowd

5-70

WARNING
• Do not use the Autonomous
Emergency Braking system
when towing a vehicle.
Application of the AEB system
while towing may adversely
affect the safety of your vehicle or the towing vehicle
• Use extreme caution when the
vehicle in front of you has
cargo that extends rearward
from the cab, or when the
vehicle in front of you has
higher ground clearance.
• The AEB system is designed
to detect and monitor the vehicle ahead or detect a pedestrian in the roadway through
radar signals and camera
recognition. It is not designed
to detect bicycles, motorcycles, or smaller wheeled
objects such as luggage bags,
shopping carts, or strollers.
• Never try to test the operation
of the AEB system. Doing so
may cause severe injury or
death.

i Information
In some instances, the AEB system
may be cancelled when subjected to
electromagnetic interference.

LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING

OTLA055086

The Lane Departure Warning
(LDWS) System feature is designed
to monitor the vehicle's position relative to the lane in front of you and
detect when the vehicle begins to
move out of its lane.

5-71

5
Driving your vehicle

OTL055033

Take the following precautions
when using the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS):
• ALWAYS check your surroundings and the road conditions before changing lanes.
The LDWS does not control
the vehicle to change lanes or
to stay in the current lane
• Do not make abrupt maneuvers or turn the steering
wheel suddenly if the LDWS
alerts you that the vehicle is
departing from the lane
• If the camera recognition system does not properly detect
the lane, the LDWS may not
notify you if the vehicle
departs from the lane
• The LDWS does not operate
until the vehicle speed reaches approximately 40 mph (64
km/h)
(Continued)

(Continued)
• The LDWS camera recognition system is located in front
of the rear view mirror at the
center of the front windshield.
Do not spray water or any
type of liquid near the camera.
The system may become
damaged.
• Do not attempt to repair the
LDWS camera and do not
remove any parts
• Do not place objects that
reflect light on the dashboard
while driving
• The operation of the LDWS
may be affected by several
factors including environmental conditions that affect the
ability of the camera to detect
the lanes in front of you. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to pay careful attention to the
roadway and to maintain the
vehicle in its intended lane at
all times.

Driving your vehicle

LDWS Operation

■ Lane line detected

• Left

• Right

OTLA055095
■ Lane line undetected

OTLA055096/OTLA055098

1. A visual warning appears on the
cluster LCD display. Either the left
lane line or the right lane line in
the cluster LCD display will blink
depending on which direction the
vehicle is veering.
2. An audible warning sounds to
alert the driver.

OTL055094

To activate the LDWS:
With the ignition switch is in the ON
position, press the LDWS button
located on the instrument panel on
the lower left hand side of the driver.
The indicator in the cluster display
will initially illuminate white. This indicates the LDWS is in the READY but
NOT ENABLED state.
Note that the vehicle speed must be
at least approximately 40 mph (64
km/h) to ENABLE the LDWS. The
indicator in the cluster display will
illuminate green.

5-72

OTLA055097

If your vehicle speed exceeds 40
mph (64 km/h) and the LDWS button
is ON, the system is enabled. If your
vehicle departs from the projected
lane in front of you, the LDWS operates as follows:

Warning Light and Message

The LDWS does not operate when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
to change lanes or operates the
hazard warning flasher.
• The camera recognition system
detects that the vehicle is driving
on the lane lines.

i Information
Always operate the turn signal before
changing lanes.
OTLA055099

Take your vehicle to an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer and have the system checked.

The LDWS may operate prematurely
even if the vehicle does not depart
from the intended lane, OR, the
LDWS may not warn you if the vehicle leaves the intended lane under
the following circumstances:
• The lanes ahead are not visible
due to rain, snow, water on the
road, damaged or stained road
surface, or other factors
• The brightness outside changes
suddenly such as when entering or
exiting a tunnel
• The brightness outside is too low
such as when the headlamps are
not on at night or the vehicle is
going through a tunnel
• It is difficult to distinguish the lane
marking from the road surface or
the lane marking is faded or not
clearly marked
• Driving on a steep grade or over a
hill, or when driving on a curved
road

5-73

5
Driving your vehicle

If there is a malfunction with the
LDWS, the indicator on the cluster
will illuminate yellow. Additionally, a
message that reads, "Check LDWS",
will appear on the cluster LCD display. After the message disappears,
the master warning light (
) will
illuminate.

Limitations of the system

Driving your vehicle

• When light coming from a street
light or an oncoming vehicle is
reflected on a wet road surface
such as a puddle in the road
• The windshield or the LDWS camera lens is blocked with dirt or
debris
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you The lane
markings are not clearly visible
from the road
• The camera recognition system
cannot properly detect the lanes
due to fog, heavy rain, or snow
• The lane width differs from standard (either very wide or very narrow)
• The windshield glass is fogged up;
a clear view of the road is obstructed
• There are markings on the road
surface that look like a lane line
that is inadvertently being detected
by the camera
5-74

• There is a boundary structure in
the roadway such as a concrete
barrier that is inadvertently being
detected by the camera
• There is not enough distance
between you and the vehicle in
front to be able to detect the lane
line or the vehicle ahead is driving
on the lane line
• The vehicle while driving vibrates
excessively due to adverse road
conditions
• The field of view in front is
obstructed by sun glare
• The lanes are incomplete or the
area is in a construction zone
• There are more than two lane lines
on the road in front of you

CRUISE CONTROL
Cruise Control operation

OTL055035

The Cruise Control system allows
you to drive at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h) without depressing the
accelerator pedal.

Take the following precautions:
• If the Cruise Control is left on,
("CRUISE" indicator light in
the instrument cluster is illuminated) the Cruise Control
can be activated unintentionally. Keep the Cruise Control
system off ("CRUISE" indicator light OFF) when the Cruise
Control is not in use, to avoid
inadvertently setting a speed.
• Use the Cruise Control system only when traveling on
open highways in good
weather.
• Do not use the Cruise Control
when it may be unsafe to keep
the vehicle at a constant
speed:
- When driving in heavy traffic
or when traffic conditions
make it difficult to drive at a
constant speed
- When driving on rainy, icy, or
snow-covered roads
(Continued)

(Continued)
- When driving on hilly or
windy roads
- When driving in windy areas

i Information
• During normal cruise control operation, when the SET switch is activated or reactivated after applying the
brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds.
This delay is normal.
• Before activating the cruise control
function, the system will check to
verify that the brake switch is operating normally. Depress the brake
pedal at least once after turning ON
the ignition or starting the engine.

5-75

5
Driving your vehicle

1. CRUISE indicator
2. SET indicator

WARNING

Driving your vehicle

To set Cruise Control speed

To increase Cruise Control
speed

OTL055101/Q
OTL055100

1. Press the CRUISE button on the
steering wheel to turn the system
on. The "CRUISE" indicator will
illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).

5-76

3. Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-), and release it. The SET
indicator light will illuminate.
4. Release the accelerator pedal.

i Information
On a steep slope, the vehicle may
slightly slow down or speed up, while
driving uphill or downhill.

OTL055102/Q

• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and hold it, while monitoring the SET speed on the instrument cluster.
Release the toggle switch when
the desired speed is shown and
the vehicle will accelerate to that
speed.
• Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will increase
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle attains the
desired speed, push the toggle
switch (1) down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control
speed

To temporarily accelerate with
the Cruise Control ON
Depress the accelerator pedal. When
you take your foot off the accelerator,
the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
If you push the toggle switch down
(SET-) at the increased speed, the
Cruise Control will maintain the
increased speed.

OTL055101/Q

Driving your vehicle

• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will
gradually slow down. Release the
toggle switch at the speed you
want to maintain.
• Push the toggle switch (1) down
(SET-) and release it immediately.
The cruising speed will decrease
1.0 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
toggle switch is operated in this
manner.
• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When
the vehicle attains the desired
speed, push the toggle switch (1)
down (SET-).
5-77

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control will be canceled
when:

• The ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) is operating.
• Downshifting to 2nd gear when in
Manual Shift mode.

To resume preset Cruising
speed

i Information

OTL055103

• Depressing the brake pedal.
• Pressing the CANCEL button
located on the steering wheel.
• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both
the CRUISE indicator and the
"SET" indicator will turn OFF.
• Moving the shift lever into N
(Neutral).
• Decreasing the vehicle speed to
less than approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).

5-78

Each of the above actions will cancel
Cruise Control operation (the "SET"
indicator in the instrument cluster will
go off), but only pressing the CRUISE
button will turn the system off. If you
wish to resume Cruise Control operation, push the lever up (RES+) located
on your steering wheel. You will return
to your previously preset speed, unless
the system was turned off using the
CRUISE button.

OTL055101/Q

Push the toggle switch (1) up
(RES+). If the vehicle speed is over
20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle will
resume the preset speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

OTL055100

5
Driving your vehicle

• Press the CRUISE button (the
"CRUISE" indicator light will go
off).
• Turn the vehicle OFF.

5-79

Driving your vehicle

SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Hazardous driving conditions

Rocking the vehicle

When hazardous driving elements
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud and sand, take the
below suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and keep a longer
braking distance.
• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.
• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, use second gear.
Accelerate slowly to avoid unnecessary wheel spin.
• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or
other non-slip materials under the
wheels to provide additional traction while the vehicle becomes
stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear.
Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and
do not race the engine.
To prevent transmission wear, wait
until the wheels stop spinning before
shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal while
the transmission is in gear. Slowly
spinning the wheels in forward and
reverse directions causes a rocking
motion that may free the vehicle.

WARNING
Downshifting with an automatic
transmission while driving on
slippery surfaces can cause an
accident. The sudden change in
tire speed could cause the tires
to skid. Be careful when downshifting on slippery surfaces.

5-80

WARNING
If the vehicle is stuck and
excessive wheel spin occurs,
the temperature in the tires can
increase very quickly. If the tires
become damaged, a tire blow
out or tire explosion can occur.
This condition is dangerous you and others may be injured.
Do not attempt this procedure if
people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle.
If you attempt to free the vehicle,
the vehicle can overheat quickly,
possibly causing an engine
compartment fire or other damage. Try to avoid spinning the
wheels as much as possible to
prevent overheating of either the
tires or the engine. DO NOT
allow the vehicle to spin the
wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).

i Information
The ESC system must be turned OFF
before rocking the vehicle.
NOTICE

If you are still stuck after rocking
the vehicle a few times, have the
vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle
to avoid engine overheating, possible damage to the transmission,
and tire damage. See "Towing" in
chapter 6.

Driving at night

Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration.

Night driving presents more hazards
than driving in the daylight. Here are
some important tips to remember:
• Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's headlamps.
• Keep your headlamps clean and
properly aimed. Dirty or improperly
aimed headlamps will make it
much more difficult to see at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the headlamps of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.

5-81

5
Driving your vehicle

Smooth cornering

Driving your vehicle

Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous. Here are a few things to
consider when driving in the rain or
on slick pavement:
• Slow down and allow extra following distance. A heavy rainfall
makes it harder to see and increases the distance needed to stop
your vehicle.
• Turn OFF your Cruise Control.
• Replace your windshield wiper
blades when they show signs of
streaking or missing areas on the
windshield.
• Be sure your tires have enough
tread. If your tires do not have
enough tread, making a quick stop
on wet pavement can cause a skid
and possibly lead to an accident.
See "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.
• Turn on your headlamps to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large puddles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.

5-82

• If you believe your brakes may be
wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking operation
returns.

Hydroplaning
If the road is wet enough and you are
going fast enough, your vehicle may
have little or no contact with the road
surface and actually ride on the
water. The best advice is SLOW
DOWN when the road is wet.
The risk of hydroplaning increases
as the depth of tire tread decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in chapter 7.

Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
reduced.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.

Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.
Under-inflation may overheat or
damage the tires.
Do not install worn-out or damaged
tires, which may reduce traction or
fail the braking operation.

i Information
Never over-inflate your tires above the
maximum inflation pressure, as specified on your tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
Driving at higher speeds on the highway consumes more fuel and is less
efficient than driving at a slower,
more moderate speed. Maintain a
moderate speed in order to conserve
fuel when driving on the highway.
Be sure to check both the engine
coolant level and the engine oil
before driving.

Drive belt

Your multi-purpose passenger vehicle is defined as a Sports Utility
Vehicle (SUV). SUV's have higher
ground clearance and a narrower
track to make them capable of performing in a wide variety of off-road
applications. The specific design
characteristics give them a higher
center of gravity than ordinary vehicles making them more likely to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Due to this risk, driver and passengers are strongly recommended
to buckle their seat belts. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
There are steps that a driver can
make to reduce the risk of a rollover.
If at all possible, avoid sharp turns or
abrupt maneuvers, do not load your
vehicle with heavy cargo on the roof,
and never modify your vehicle in any
way.

5-83

5
Driving your vehicle

A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.

Reducing the risk of a rollover

Driving your vehicle

WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To prevent rollovers or loss of control:
• Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger vehicle.
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers.
• Do not modify your vehicle in
any way that you would raise
the center of gravity.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Do not carry heavy cargo on
the roof.

5-84

WARNING
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more
likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Make sure all
passengers are wearing their
seat belts.

WINTER DRIVING
The severe weather conditions of
winter quickly wear out tires and
cause other problems. To minimize
winter driving problems, you should
take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions

Tire chains

WARNING
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle’s
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your
vehicle may be adversely affected.
If you mount snow tires on your vehicle, make sure to use radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
The traction provided by snow tires
on dry roads may not be as high as
your vehicle's original equipment
tires. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.

i Information
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and municipal regulations for possible restrictions against their use.

OTL055036

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner than other types of tires, they
may be damaged by mounting some
types of tire chains on them.
Therefore, the use of snow tires is
recommended instead of tire chains.
Do not mount tire chains on vehicles
equipped with aluminum wheels; if
unavoidable use a wire type chain. If
tire chains must be used, use genuine HYUNDAI parts and install the
tire chain after reviewing the instructions provided with the tire chains.
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper tire chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s
warranty.
5-85

5
Driving your vehicle

You need to keep sufficient distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you.
Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,
rapid acceleration, sudden brake
applications, and sharp turns are
potentially very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause the vehicle to skid.
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires.
Always carry emergency equipment.
Some of the items you may want to
carry include tire chains, tow straps
or chains, a flashlight, emergency
flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,
a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

Driving your vehicle

WARNING
The use of tire chains may
adversely affect vehicle handling:
• Drive less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or the chain manufacturer's recommended speed
limit, whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns,
and other road hazards, which
may cause the vehicle to
bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked
wheel braking.

5-86

i Information
• Install tire chains on the front tires.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tires will provide a
greater driving force, but will not
prevent side skids.
• Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and
municipal regulations for possible
restrictions against their use.

Chain installation
When installing tire chains, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly possible. Drive
slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))
with chains installed. If you hear the
chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still
make contact, slow down until the
noise stops. Remove the tire chains
as soon as you begin driving on
cleared roads.
When mounting snow chains, park
the vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning Flasher and place a
triangular emergency warning device
behind the vehicle (if available).
Always place the vehicle in P (Park),
apply the parking brake and turn off
the engine before installing snow
chains.

NOTICE

Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if
necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
chapter 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in chapter 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
service station.

5-87

5
Driving your vehicle

- When using tire chains:
• Wrong size chains or improperly
installed chains can damage
your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body and wheels.
• Use SAE "S" class or wire
chains.
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to prevent
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driving
0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
• Do not use tire chains on vehicles equipped with aluminum
wheels. If unavoidable, use a
wire type chain.
• Use wire chains less than 0.59
inch (15 mm) wide to prevent
damage to the chain’s connection.

Winter Precautions
Use high quality ethylene glycol
coolant

Driving your vehicle

Check spark plugs and ignition
system

Do not let your parking brake
freeze

Inspect your spark plugs as
described in chapter 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.

Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of
snow or ice around or near the rear
brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the gear selector lever in P
and block the rear wheels so the car
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.

Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer and
most auto parts outlets. Do not use
engine coolant or other types of antifreeze as these may damage the
paint finish.

5-88

Do not let ice and snow accumulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.

Don't place foreign objects or
materials in the engine compartment
Placement of foreign object or materials which prevent cooling of the
engine, in the engine compartment,
may cause a failure or combustion.
The manufacturer is not responsible
for the damage caused by such
placement.

To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.

TRAILER TOWING
If you are considering to tow with
your vehicle, you should first check
with your state's Department of
Motor Vehicles to determine legal
requirements. Since laws vary from
state to state the requirements for
towing trailers, vehicles, or other
types of vehicles or apparatus may
differ. Ask an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further details before towing.

WARNING
Take the following precautions:
• If you don't use the correct
towing equipment, or if you
drive improperly while towing,
you can lose control of the
vehicle when pulling a trailer.
For example, if the trailer is
too heavy, the braking performance may be reduced.
You and your passengers
could be seriously or fatally
injured. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the
steps in this section.
• Before towing, make sure the
total trailer weight, GCW
(Gross Combination Weight),
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight),
GAW (Gross Axle Weight ) and
trailer tongue load are all within the limits.

5-89

5
Driving your vehicle

Remember that trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability, and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering requires
correct equipment, and it has to be
used properly. Damage to your vehicle caused by improper trailer towing
is not covered by your vehicle manufacturer’s warranty.
This section contains many timetested, important trailering tips and
safety rules. Many of these are
important for your safety and that of
your passengers. Please read this
section carefully before you pull a
trailer.

Driving your vehicle

If you decide to pull a trailer
Here are some important points if
you decide to pull a trailer:
• Consider using a sway control. You
can ask a trailer hitch dealer about
sway control.
• Do not do any towing with your
vehicle during its first 1,200 miles
(2,000 km) in order to allow the
engine to properly break in. Failure
to heed this caution may result in
serious engine or transmission
damage.
• When towing a trailer, be sure to
consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for further information on
additional requirements such as a
towing kit, etc.
• Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (less than 60 mph
(100 km/h)) or posted towing
speed limit.
• On a long uphill grade, do not
exceed 45 mph (70 km/h) or the
posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Carefully observe the weight and
load limits provided in the following
pages.
5-90

Total trailer weight

Tongue Load

Tongue load

Total Trailer Weight

Gross Axle Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight

OLMB053047

OLMB053048

What is the maximum safe weight of
a trailer? It should never weigh more
than the maximum trailer weight with
trailer brakes. But even that can be
too heavy. It depends on how you
plan to use your trailer. For example,
speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how often your vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all
important. The ideal trailer weight can
also depend on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.

The tongue load is an important
weight to measure because it affects
the total Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) of your vehicle. The trailer
tongue should weigh a maximum of
10% of the total loaded trailer weight,
within the limits of the maximum trailer tongue load permissible.
After you've loaded your trailer,
weigh the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be
able to correct them simply by moving some items around in the trailer.

WARNING

Reference weight when towing a trailer
Gasoline Engine
1.6 T-GDI

Item

2WD

2.0 GDI

4WD

2WD

DCT
Maximum trailer
weight
kg (lbs)

A/T

Without brake
system

454 (1000)

With brake
system

680 (1500)

Maximum permissible static vertical
load on the coupling device

4WD

68 (150)

kg (lbs)

Driving your vehicle

Take the following precautions:
• Never load a trailer with more
weight in the rear than in the
front. The front should be
loaded with approximately
60% of the total trailer load;
the rear should be loaded with
approximately 40% of the total
trailer load.
• Never exceed the maximum
weight limits of the trailer or
trailer towing equipment.
Improper loading can result in
damage to your vehicle and/or
personal injury. Check weights
and loading at a commercial
scale or highway patrol office
equipped with scales.

5-91

Driving your vehicle

Trailer towing equipment
Hitches
It's important to have the correct
hitch equipment. Crosswinds, large
trucks going by, and rough roads are
a few reasons why you’ll need the
right hitch. Here are some rules to
follow:
• Do you have to make any holes in
the body of your vehicle when you
install a trailer hitch? If you do, then
be sure to seal the holes later
when you remove the hitch. If you
don’t seal them, carbon monoxide
(CO) from your exhaust can get
into your vehicle, as well as dirt
and water.
• The bumpers on your vehicle are
not intended for hitches. Do not
attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
• A HYUNDAI trailer hitch accessory
is available at an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

5-92

Safety chains

Trailer brakes

You should always attach chains
between your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the
tongue will not drop to the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may
be provided by the hitch manufacturer or trailer manufacturer. Follow the
manufacturer’s recommendation for
attaching safety chains. Always leave
just enough slack so you can turn
with your trailer. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to
federal and/or local regulations and
that it is properly installed and operating correctly.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer brakes loaded, then it needs its
own brakes and they must be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the
instructions for the trailer brakes so
you’ll be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly. Do not tap
into your vehicle's brake system.
Trailer brakes must be applied separately from your vehicle's brake system.

WARNING
Do not use a trailer with its own
brakes unless you are absolutely certain that you have properly
set up the brake system. Use an
experienced, competent trailer
shop for this work.

Driving with a trailer

Distance

Backing up

Towing a trailer requires a certain
amount of experience. Before setting
out for the open road, you must get
to know your trailer. Acquaint yourself with the feel of handling and
braking with the added weight of the
trailer. And always keep in mind that
the vehicle you are driving is now
longer and not nearly as responsive
as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer
hitch and platform, safety chains,
electrical connector(s), lights, tires
and brakes.
During your trip, occasionally check
to be sure that the load is secure,
and that the lights and trailer brakes
are still working.

Stay at least twice as far behind the
vehicle ahead as you would when
driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations
that require heavy braking and sudden turns.

Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move your hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you.

Passing
Making turns
When you’re turning with a trailer,
make wider turns than normal. Do
this so your trailer won't strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees, or
other objects. Avoid jerky or sudden
maneuvers. Signal well in advance.

5-93

5
Driving your vehicle

You will need more passing distance
up ahead when you’re towing a trailer. And, because of the increased
vehicle length, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before you can return to your
lane.

Driving your vehicle

Turn signals
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle
has to have a different turn signal
flasher and extra wiring. The green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash whenever you signal a turn or
lane change. Properly connected,
the trailer lights will also flash to alert
other drivers you're about to turn,
change lanes, or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green
arrows on your instrument panel will
flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may
think drivers behind you are seeing
your signals when, in fact, they are
not. It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working. You must also check the
lights every time you disconnect and
then reconnect the wires.

5-94

WARNING
Do not connect a trailer lighting
system directly to your vehicle’s lighting system. Use an
approved trailer wiring harness.
Failure to do so could result in
damage to the vehicle electrical
system and/or personal injury.
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer for assistance.

Driving on hills
Reduce speed and shift to a lower
gear before you start down a long or
steep downgrade. If you don't shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that they would get
overheated and may not operate efficiently.
On a long uphill grade, shift down
and reduce your speed to around 45
mph (70 km/h) to reduce the possibility of engine and transmission
overheating.
If your trailer weighs more than the
maximum trailer weight without trailer
brakes, you should drive in D (Drive)
when towing a trailer. Operating your
vehicle in D (Drive) when towing a
trailer will minimize heat build-up and
extend the life of your transmission.

NOTICE

(Continued)
If the Ecoshift dual clutch transmission starts to become overheated, the gear shift characteristics may change. Gear shifts
may become more abrupt. If
continued operation while towing a trailer includes frequent
and continuous upshifts and
downshifts, the overheat warning message on the cluster LCD
display may illuminate. If this
occurs, stop the vehicle, apply
the brakes or shift the vehicle to
(P) Park, and allow the transmission to cool.

5-95

5
Driving your vehicle

To prevent engine and/or transmission overheating:
• When towing a trailer on steep
grades (in excess of 6%) pay
close attention to the engine
coolant temperature gauge to
ensure the engine does not
overheat. If the needle of the
coolant temperature gauge
moves towards "H" (HOT), pull
over and stop as soon as it is
safe to do so, and allow the
engine to idle until it cools
down.You may proceed once the
engine has cooled sufficiently.
• When towing a trailer, your vehicle speed may be much slower
than the general flow of traffic,
especially when climbing an
uphill grade. Use the right hand
lane when towing a trailer on an
uphill grade. Choose your vehicle speed according to the maximum posted speed limit for
vehicles with trailers, the steepness of the grade, and your trailer weight.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• For vehicles equipped with the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission, some extra precaution
should be taken when towing a
trailer. Due to the added load on
the transmission when towing a
trailer, the clutches may get hot
if the vehicle experiences excessive upshifting and downshifting.
Under certain conditions, such
as repeated stop-and-go launches on steep grades, the transmission clutches may become
overheated. When the clutches
start to become overheated, the
transmission safe protection
mode logic is enabled. If the safe
protection mode logic is
enabled, the gear position indicator on the cluster LCD display
blinks, a chime sounds, and a
warning message will appear.
(Continued)

Driving your vehicle

Parking on hills
Generally, if you have a trailer attached
to your vehicle, you should not park
your vehicle on a hill.
However, if you ever have to park your
trailer on a hill, here's how to do it:
1. Pull the vehicle into the parking
area.
Turn the steering wheel in the
direction of the curb (right if headed down hill, left if headed up hill).
2. Shift the vehicle to P (Park).
3. Set the parking brake and shut off
the vehicle.
4. Place wheel chocks under the
trailer wheels on the down hill side
of the wheels.

5-96

5. Start the vehicle, apply the brakes,
shift to neutral, release the parking brake and slowly release the
brakes until the trailer chocks
absorb the load.
6. Reapply the brakes and parking
brakes.
7. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
8. Shut off the vehicle and release
the vehicle brakes but leave the
parking brake set.

WARNING
• Do not get out of the vehicle
without the parking brake
firmly set. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You and
others could be seriously or
fatally injured.
• Do not apply the accelerator
pedal to hold the vehicle on
an uphill.

Driving the vehicle after it has
been parked on a hill
1. With the gear shift lever in P
(Park), apply the brakes and hold
the brake pedal down while performing the following:
• Start your engine;
• Shift into gear; and
• Release the parking brake.
2. Slowly remove your foot from the
brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear
of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.

Maintenance when trailer towing

To prevent vehicle damage:
• Due to higher load during
trailer usage, overheating
might occur on hot days or
during uphill driving. If the
coolant gauge indicates overheating, switch off the air conditioner and stop the vehicle
in a safe area to cool down the
engine.
• When towing check the automatic transmission fluid more
frequently.
(Note: This is not applicable
for vehicles equipped with the
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission.)

5
Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle will need service more
often when you regularly pull a trailer. Important items to pay particular
attention to include engine oil, automatic transmission fluid, axle lubricant and cooling system fluid. Brake
condition is another important item to
frequently check. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these items
before you start your trip. Don't forget
to also maintain your trailer and
hitch. Follow the maintenance schedule that accompanied your trailer and
check it periodically. Preferably,
inspect the vehicle and trailer at the
start of each day's driving. Inspect
the hitch mounting to make sure the
hitch is properly secured to the vehicle. Inspect the trailer electrical
wiring to make sure brake lights, turn
signal lights, running lights, and hazard lights are working properly.

CAUTION

5-97

Driving your vehicle

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
Two labels on your driver's door sill
show how much weight your vehicle
was designed to carry: the Tire and
Loading Information Label and the
Certification Label.
Before loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms
for determining your vehicle’s weight
ratings, from the vehicle's specifications and the Certification Label:

Cargo Weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.

Base Curb Weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the Certification Label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the Certification Label
located on the driver’s door sill.

Vehicle Curb Weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

5-98

Tire Loading Information Label
■ Type A

The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.

Vehicle capacity weight
970 lbs. (440 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.

■ Type B

Seating capacity
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.

Without trailer brakes
454 lbs (1000 kg)
■ Type C

With trailer brakes
680 lbs (1500 kg)
Towing capacity is the maximum
trailer weight including its cargo
weight that your vehicle can tow.

OTLA055146/OTLA055139/OTLA055140

5-99

Driving your vehicle

Towing capacity

Driving your vehicle

Cargo capacity
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct
load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

5-100

4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400
lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

WARNING
Do not overload the vehicle as
there is a limit to the total
weight, or load limit, including
occupants and cargo, the vehicle can carry. Overloading can
shorten the life of the vehicle. If
the GVWR or the GAWR is
exceeded, parts on the vehicle
can break, and it can change the
handling of your vehicle. These
could cause you to lose control
and result in an accident.

Example 1

≥
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)

+
Cargo Weight
(1100 lbs.)
(499 kg)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)
(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)

Example 2

≥

Cargo Weight
(650 lbs.)
(295 kg)

Passenger Weight
(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)
(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)

Driving your vehicle

Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)

Example 3

≥
Maximum Load
(1400 lbs.)
(635 kg)

+
Passenger Weight
(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)
(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)

Cargo Weight
(540 lbs.)
(245 kg)

5-101

Driving your vehicle

Certification label

The total weight of the vehicle,
including all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out
the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Be
sure to spread out your load equally
on both sides of the centerline.
OBH059070

The certification label is located on
the driver’s door sill at the center pillar and shows the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle. This is called the GVWR (Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR
includes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
This label also tells you the maximum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

5-102

WARNING
Overloading

• Never exceed the GVWR for
your vehicle, the GAWR for
either the front or rear axle
and vehicle capacity weight.
Exceeding these ratings can
affect your vehicle’s handling
and braking ability, and cause
an accident.
• Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle’s tires and possible
tire failure, increased stopping distances and poor vehicle handling-all of which may
result in a crash.

NOTICE

Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.

WARNING
If you carry items inside your
vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,
packages, or anything else),
they are moving as fast as the
vehicle. If you have to stop or
turn quickly, or if there is a
crash, the items will keep going
and can cause an injury if they
strike the driver or a passenger.
• Put items in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
• Do not stack items, like suitcases, inside the vehicle
above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured
child restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something
inside the vehicle, secure it.

5
Driving your vehicle
5-103

What to do in an emergency
Hazard warning flasher ........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ..............6-2

If you have a flat tire..........................................6-15
Towing ...................................................................6-23

If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2
If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing ........6-2
If you Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

Towing service .................................................................6-23
Removable towing hook ................................................6-24
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-25
Tie-down hook ................................................................6-26

What to do in an emergency

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
To turn the hazard warning flasher
on or off, press the hazard warning
flasher button. The button is located
in the center fascia panel. Both the
left and right turn signal lights will
flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
OTL065001

The hazard warning flasher serves
as a warning to other drivers to exercise extreme caution when approaching, overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.

6-2

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
WHILE DRIVING
If the Engine Stalls While
Driving
• Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
• Turn on your hazard warning flasher.
• Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or
seek other qualified assistance.

If the Engine Stalls at a
Crossroad or Crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, if safe to do so, move the
shift lever to the N (Neutral) position
and then push the vehicle to a safe
location.

IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If the Engine Doesn't Turn
Over or Turns Over Slowly

If the Engine Turns Over
Normally but Doesn't Start

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
• Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the vehicle slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. When the
vehicle has slowed to such a speed
that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and park
on firm, level ground. If you are on
a divided highway, do not park in
the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
• When the vehicle is stopped, press
the hazard warning flasher button,
move the shift lever into P(Park),
and apply the parking brake, and
place the ignition switch in the
LOCK/OFF position.
• Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle. Be sure they all get out on
the side of the vehicle that is away
from traffic.
• When changing a flat tire, follow
the instructions provided later in
this chapter.

• Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park). The engine
starts only when the shift lever is in
N (Neutral) or P (Park).
• Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
• Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is drained.
Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. This could cause damage to
your vehicle. See instructions for
"Jump Starting" provided in this
chapter.

Check the fuel level and add fuel if
necessary.
If the engine still does not start, have
your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

What to do in an emergency

If you Have a Flat Tire While
Driving

CAUTION
Push or pull starting the vehicle
may cause the catalytic converter to overload which can
lead to damage to the emission
control system.

6-3

What to do in an emergency

JUMP STARTING
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Follow the jump
starting procedure in this section to
avoid serious injury or damage to
your vehicle. If in doubt about how to
properly jump start your vehicle, we
strongly recommend that you have a
service technician or towing service
do it for you.

WARNING
To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions
carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always
present in battery cells,
is highly combustible,
and may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)

6-4

(Continued)
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is highly
corrosive. Do not allow
acid to contact your
eyes, skin or clothing.
If acid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean water for at
least 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention. If acid
gets on your skin, thoroughly
wash the area. If you feel pain or
a burning sensation, get medical attention immediately.
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle if your battery is
frozen.
(Continued)

i Information
Pb

An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulations.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to your vehicle:
• Only use a 12-volt power supply
(battery or jumper system) to
jump start your vehicle.
• Do not attempt to jump start
your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure
1. Position the vehicles close enough
that the jumper cables will reach,
but do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in
the engine compartment at all
times, even when the vehicles are
turned off.
3. Turn off all electrical devices such
as radios, lights, air conditioning,
etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)
and set the parking brakes. Turn
both vehicles OFF.

What to do in an emergency

(Continued)
• NEVER attempt to recharge
the battery when the vehicle’s
battery cables are connected
to the battery.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
NEVER touch these components with the engine running
or when the ignition switch is
in the ON position.

6-5

What to do in an emergency

1VQA4001

4. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the illustration. First connect one jumper
cable to the red, positive (+)
jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).
5. Connect the other end of the
jumper cable to the red, positive
(+) battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
6. Connect the second jumper cable
to the black, negative (-) battery/
chassis ground of the assisting
vehicle (3).

6-6

7. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the black,
negative (-) chassis ground of
your vehicle (4).
Do not allow the jumper cables to
contact anything except the correct battery or jumper terminals or
the correct ground. Do not lean
over the battery when making
connections.
8. Start the engine of the assisting
vehicle and let it run at approximately 2,000 rpm for a few minutes. Then start your vehicle.
If your vehicle will not start after a
few attempts, it probably requires
servicing. In this event please seek
qualified assistance. If the cause of
your battery discharging is not
apparent, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the
exact reverse order you connected
them:
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from
the black, negative (-) chassis
ground of your vehicle (4).
2. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the black, negative (-) battery/chassis ground of
the assisting vehicle (3).
3. Disconnect the second jumper
cable from the red, positive (+)
battery/jumper terminal of the
assisting vehicle (2).
4. Disconnect the other end of the
jumper cable from the red, positive
(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle
(1).

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
WARNING
While the engine is
running, keep hands,
clothing and tools
away from the moving parts such as the
cooling fan and drive
belt to prevent serious injury.

4. Check for coolant leaking from the
radiator, hoses or under the vehicle. (If the air conditioning had
been in use, it is normal for cold
water to be draining from it when
you stop.)
5. If engine coolant is leaking out,
stop the engine immediately and
call the nearest authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

What to do in an emergency

If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine may be overheating. If this happens, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)
and set the parking brake. If the air
conditioning is ON, turn it OFF.
3. If engine coolant is running out
under the vehicle or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the
engine. Do not open the hood until
the coolant has stopped running
or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine
coolant and no steam, leave the
engine running and check to be
sure the engine cooling fan is
operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.

6-7

What to do in an emergency

WARNING
Your
vehicle
is
equipped with a pressurized
coolant
reserve tank. NEVER
remove the coolant
reserve tank cap or the radiator
drain plug while the engine and
radiator are HOT. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when removing the coolant reserve tank
cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag
around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to release
some of the pressure from the
system. Step back while the
pressure is released.
When you are sure all the pressure has been released, continue turning the cap counterclockwise to remove it.

6-8

6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been
lost, carefully add coolant to the
reservoir to bring the fluid level in
the reservoir up to the halfway
mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION
Serious loss of coolant indicates a leak in the cooling system and should be checked as
soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Check Tire Pressure
■ Type A

■ Type B

OTL065003

OTLE065017/OTLE065018

OTL045154L

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(2) Low Tire Pressure /
Tire Pressure Monitor /
TPMS Malfunction Display
(shown on the cluster LCD display)

• You can check the tire pressure in
the Information Mode on the cluster.
Refer to the "User Settings
Mode" section in chapter 3.
• Tire pressure is displayed after a
few minutes of driving after initial
engine start up.
• If tire pressure is not displayed
when the vehicle is stopped, “Drive
to display” message will appear.
After driving, check the tire pressure.

What to do in an emergency

• The displayed tire pressure values
may differ from those measured
with a tire pressure gauge.
• You can change the tire pressure
unit in the User Settings Mode on
the cluster.
- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User
Settings Mode" section in
chapter 3).

6-9

What to do in an emergency

Tire Pressure Monitoring
System

WARNING
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)

6-10

As an added safety feature, your
vehicle is equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) with
LCD display that monitors continuously the individual tire pressures of
each tire and illuminates when one
or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. When the LCD display indicates that one of your tires is
under-inflated, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
LCD display.

Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
that will illuminate when the system
is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure LCD display. When the system detects a malfunction, the indicator lamp will flash
for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long
as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
LCD display after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle
to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

Low tire pressure LCD display
with position indicator

OTL045154L

When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illuminated and the warning message is
displayed on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. The LCD position indicator will indicate which tire
is significantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position
light.

If any of your tire pressures are indicated as being low, immediately
reduce your speed, avoid hard cornering, and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as possible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side center pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
The Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on and the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator may
blink for one minute and then remain
illuminated until you have the low
pressure tire repaired and replaced
on the vehicle.
NOTICE

The spare tire is not equipped with
a tire pressure sensor.

6-11

What to do in an emergency

If any of the below happens, have
the system checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS
Malfunction Indicator does not
illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is placed to
the ON position or engine is
running.
2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 1 minute.
3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD display remains illuminated

Low tire pressure
indicator

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION
During winter or cold weather,
the TPMS indicator may illuminate if the tire pressures were
set when the outside temperature was warm. As the outside
air becomes colder, the pressure in the tires will decrease.
Similarly, if the outside air
becomes warmer, the pressure
in the tires will increase. As you
drive your vehicle, the temperature of the tires will heat up,
therefore the tire pressures will
increase. Check and adjust your
tire pressures regularly before
driving to make sure your vehicle is operating at the correct
pressures as designed.

6-12

TPMS Malfunction
Indicator

WARNING
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.

The TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will illuminate after it blinks
for approximately one minute when
there is a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon
as possible.
NOTICE

If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the individual tire pressures in the cluster LCD display
will not be available. Have the system checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possible.

NOTICE

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and LCD position indicator
will come on. Have the flat tire
repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer as soon as possible or
replace the flat tire with the spare
tire.

CAUTION
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by HYUNDAI
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by HYUNDAI dealer may damage the tire pressure
sensor.

Once the original tire equipped with
a tire pressure monitoring sensor is
reinflated to the recommended pressure and reinstalled on the vehicle,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator and TPMS Malfunction
Indicator will go off within a few minutes of driving.
If the indicators do not disappear
after a few minutes, please visit an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem (except for
the spare tire). You must use TPMS
specific wheels. It is recommended
that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

The spare tire does not come with a
tire pressure monitoring sensor.
When the low pressure tire or the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire,
the Low Tire Pressure LCD position
indicator will remain on. Also, the
TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illuminate after blinking for one minute if
the vehicle is driven at speed above
15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximately 20 minutes.
6-13

What to do in an emergency

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator
may illuminate after blinking for
one minute if the vehicle is near
electric power supply cables or
radio transmitters such as police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports,
transmitting towers, etc.
Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction
Indicator may illuminate if snow
chains are used or electronic
devices such as computers, chargers, remote starters, navigation,
etc. This may interfere with normal
operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

What to do in an emergency

A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3
hour period.
Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.

WARNING
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road
debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.

6-14

WARNING
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)
components may interfere with
the system’s ability to warn the
driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunctions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) components may void
the warranty for that portion of
the vehicle.

IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
WARNING

Jack and tools

CAUTION
OTL065005

Be careful as you use the jack
handle to stay clear of the flat
end. The flat end has sharp
edges that could cause cuts.

OTL065004

➀ Jack handle
② Jack
③ Wheel nut wrench
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment under the luggage box
cover.
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.

Turn the winged hold down bolt
counterclockwise to remove the
spare tire.
Store the spare tire in the same compartment by turning the winged hold
down bolt clockwise.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling,” store them in their
proper location.

6-15

What to do in an emergency

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Follow the instructions in
this section when changing a
tire to reduce the risk of serious
injury or death.

What to do in an emergency

Changing tires

WARNING

OTLE065040

If it is hard to loosen the tire holddown wing bolt by hand, you can
loosen it easily using the jack handle.
1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of
the tire hold-down wing bolt.
2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise with the jack
handle.

6-16

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a
jack causing serious injury or
death to you or those nearby.
Take the following safety precautions:
• Never place any portion of
your body under a vehicle that
is supported by a jack.
• NEVER attempt to change a
tire in the lane of traffic.
ALWAYS move the vehicle
completely off the road on
level, firm ground away from
traffic before trying to change
a tire. If you cannot find a
level, firm place off the road,
call a towing service for assistance.
• Be sure to use the jack provided with the vehicle.
(Continued)

(Continued)
• ALWAYS place the jack on the
designated jacking positions
on the vehicle and NEVER on
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jacking support.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the
jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Keep children away from the
road and the vehicle.

Block

OTL065012

OTL065013

5. Block both the front and rear of the
tire diagonally opposite of the tire
you are changing.

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts counterclockwise one turn each in the
order shown above, but do not
remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off of the ground.

6-17

What to do in an emergency

Follow these steps to change your
vehicle’s tire:
1. Park on a level, firm surface.
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),
apply the parking brake, and place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/
OFF position.
3. Press the hazard warning flasher
button.
4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.

What to do in an emergency

■ Front

■ Rear

OTL065014

OTL065032

7. Place the jack at the designated
jacking position under the frame
closest to the tire you are changing. The jacking positions are
plates welded to the frame with
two notches and two dimples.
Never jack any other position or
part of the vehicle. Doing so may
damage the side seal molding or
other parts of the vehicle.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire clears the
ground. Make sure the vehicle is
stable on the jack.

6-18

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel
lug nut wrench and remove them
with your fingers. Remove the
wheel from the studs and lay it flat
on the ground out of the way.
Remove any dirt or debris from
the studs, mounting surfaces, and
wheel.
10. Install the spare tire onto the
studs of the hub.
11. Tighten the lug nuts with your fingers onto the studs with the
smaller end of the lug nuts closest to the wheel.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.

■ Rear

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Double-check each lug
nut until they are tight. After
changing tires, have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the
lug nuts to their proper torque as
soon as possible. The wheel lug
nut should be tightened to
65~79 lb.ft (9~11 kg.m).

NOTICE

Check the tire pressure as soon
as possible after installing a spare
tire. Adjust it to the recommended
pressure.

CAUTION
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the studs and lug nuts. Make
certain during tire changing
that the same nuts that were
removed are reinstalled. If you
have to replace your lug nuts
make sure they have metric
threads to avoid damaging the
studs and ensure the wheel is
properly secured to the hub.
Consult
an
authorized
HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.
If any of the equipment such as the
jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equipment is damaged or in poor condition, do not attempt to change the
tire and call for assistance.

6-19

What to do in an emergency

OTL065007

If you have a tire gauge, check the
tire pressure (see “Tires and Wheels”
in chapter 8 for tire pressure instructions.). If the pressure is lower or
higher than recommended, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and adjust it to the recommended
pressure. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced,
air may leak from the tire. If you lose
a valve cap, buy another and install it
as soon as possible. After changing
tires, secure the flat tire and return
the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.

What to do in an emergency

Use of compact spare tires
Compact spare tires are designed for
emergency use only. Drive carefully
on the compact spare tire and
always follow the safety precautions.

6-20

WARNING
To prevent compact spare tire
failure and loss of control possibly resulting in an accident:
• Use the compact spare tire
only in an emergency.
• NEVER operate your vehicle
over 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s
maximum load rating or the
load carrying capacity shown
on the sidewall of the compact spare tire.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire continuously. Repair or
replace the original tire as
soon as possible to avoid failure of the compact spare tire.

When driving with the compact spare
tire mounted to your vehicle:
• Check the tire pressure after
installing the compact spare tire.
The compact spare tire should be
inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the compact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn compact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.

NOTICE

CAUTION
To prevent damaging the compact spare tire and your vehicle:
• Drive slowly enough for the
road conditions to avoid all
hazards, such as a potholes
or debris.
• Avoid driving over obstacles.
The compact spare tire diameter is smaller than the diameter of a conventional tire and
reduces the ground clearance
approximately 1 inch (25 mm).
• Do not use tire chains on the
compact spare tire. Because
of the smaller size, a tire chain
will not fit properly.
• Do not use the compact spare
tire on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow
tires, wheel covers or trim
rings be used with the compact spare wheel.

What to do in an emergency

When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on the
vehicle, the lug nut torque must be
set correctly. The correct lug nut
tightening torque is 65-79 lb.ft (911 kg.m).

6-21

What to do in an emergency

Jack label
■ Example

OHYK065011

The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
For more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
1. Model Name
2. Maximum allowable load
3. When using the jack, set your
parking brake.
4. When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5. Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6. The designated locations under
the frame
7. When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
6-22

8. Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P (Park) position on vehicles with automatic
transmission.
9. The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
12. Representative company and
address

TOWING
Towing service

dolly

OTL065028

OTL065026

If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a
commercial
tow-truck
service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.

OTL065027

CAUTION
An AWD vehicle should never
be towed with the wheels on the
ground. This can cause serious
damage to the transaxle or the
AWD system.

CAUTION
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the front wheels on the
ground as this may cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use a wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
6-23

What to do in an emergency

dolly

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the front wheels
off the ground. If any of the loaded
wheels or suspension components
are damaged or the vehicle is being
towed with the front wheels on the
ground, use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the front of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the rear.
If your vehicle is an AWD vehicle, it
must be towed with a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment with all
the wheels off the ground.

What to do in an emergency

WARNING

Removable towing hook

If your vehicle is equipped with
a rollover sensor, place the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF or
ACC position when the vehicle
is being towed. The side impact
and curtain air bag may deploy
if the sensor detects the situation as a rollover.
OTL065021
■ Front

When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies:
1.Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

OTL065022
■ Rear

Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) when being towed
with the front wheels on the
ground can cause internal damage to the transaxle.
OTL065024

6-24

1. Open the tailgate, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2. Remove the hole cover pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front or rear bumper.
3. Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4. Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.

Emergency towing
■ Front

OTL065031

If towing is necessary, we recommend you have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a commercial tow truck service.

Always follow these emergency towing precautions:
• Place the ignition switch in the
ACC position so the steering
wheel is not locked. (if equipped)
• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Depress the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced braking performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steering system will be disabled.
• Use a vehicle heavier than your
own to tow your vehicle.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other frequently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or damaged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.

6-25

What to do in an emergency

OTL065023
■ Rear

If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency towing hook at the front (or rear) of the
vehicle.
Use extreme caution when towing
the vehicle with a cable or chain. A
driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.

What to do in an emergency

CAUTION

OTL065029

• Use a towing cable or chain less
than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a
white or red cloth (about 12 inch
(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the
cable or chain for easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so the towing cable
or chain remains tight during towing.
• Before towing, check the automatic
transaxle for fluid leaks under your
vehicle. If the automatic transaxle
fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or
a towing dolly must be used.

6-26

To avoid damage to your vehicle
and vehicle components when
towing:
• Always pull straight ahead
when using the towing hooks.
Do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle.
• Do not use the towing hooks to
pull a vehicle out of mud, sand
or other conditions from which
the vehicle cannot be driven
out under its own power.
• Limit the vehicle speed to
10 mph (15 km/h) and drive
less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when
towing to avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle.

Tie-down hook

OLMB033091

WARNING
Do not use the tie-down hook(s)
for towing purposes. If the tiedown hook(s) are used for towing, the tie-down hook(s) or
bumper will be damaged and
this could lead to serious injury.

Owner maintenance...............................................7-6
Owner Maintenance Schedule .......................................7-7

Engine coolant......................................................7-32
Brake fluid ............................................................7-36
Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-36

Washer fluid .........................................................7-37
Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-37

Parking brake .......................................................7-37
Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-37

Air cleaner ............................................................7-38
Filter Replacement..........................................................7-38

Climate control air filter .....................................7-40
Filter Inspection...............................................................7-40

Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-42
Blade Replacement .........................................................7-42

Maintenance

Checking the Engine Coolant Level............................7-32
Changing Engine Coolant ..............................................7-35

Wiper blades .........................................................7-42

Fuses......................................................................7-64
Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-65
Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-66
Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-69

Emission control system ...................................7-101

Crankcase Emission Control System ........................7-101
Evaporative Emission Control System Including
Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR) .........7-101
Exhaust Emission Control System ............................7-102

California perchlorate notice ...........................7-105

ENGINE COMPARTMENT
■ Gamma 1.6 T-GDI

1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Maintenance

8. Engine coolant reservoir

OTLE075002

7-3

Maintenance

■ Nu 2.0 GDI

1. Engine oil filler cap
2. Engine oil dipstick
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Positive battery terminal
5. Negative battery terminal
6. Fuse box
7. Air cleaner
8. Engine coolant reservoir
9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
The actual engine compartment in the
vehicle may differ from the illustration.

OTLA075001

7-4

MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection procedures.
We recommend you have your vehicle maintained and repaired by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An
authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets
HYUNDAI’s high service quality
standards and receives technical
support from HYUNDAI in order to
provide you with a high level of service satisfaction.

Maintenance service and record
retention are the owner’s responsibility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this information to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle warranties.

Owner Maintenance
Precautions
Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury. This
chapter provides instructions only for
the maintenance items that are easy
to perform. Several procedures can
be done only by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.
Your vehicle should not be modified
in any way. Such modifications may
adversely affect the performance,
safety or durability of your vehicle
and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in
violation of regulations established
by the U.S. Department of
Transportation and other federal or
state agencies.
NOTICE

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details,
read the separate Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet provided with the vehicle.
If you’re unsure about any service
or maintenance procedure, have it
done by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Maintenance

Owner's Responsibility

Detailed warranty information is provided in your Owner’s Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.

7-5

Maintenance

OWNER MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be dangerous.
If you lack sufficient knowledge
and experience or the proper
tools and equipment to do the
work, have it done by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer. ALWAYS
follow these precautions for
performing maintenance work:
• Park your vehicle on level
ground, move the shift lever
into the P (Park, for automatic
transmission vehicle) position, apply the parking brake,
place the ignition switch in
the LOCK/OFF position.
• Block the tires (front and
back) to prevent the vehicle
from moving.
Remove loose clothing or jewelry that can become entangled in moving parts.
(Continued)

7-6

(Continued)
• If you must run the engine
during maintenance, do so
out doors or in an area with
plenty of ventilation.
• Keep flames, sparks, or smoking materials away from the
battery and fuel-related parts.

The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be performed by the owner or an authorized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehicle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance vehicle
checks are generally not covered by
warranties and you may be charged
for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Owner Maintenance Schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Check for low or under-inflated
tires.

WARNING

• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice if there is any
increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or
change in its straight-ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check the automatic transmission/
ecoshift dual clutch transmission P
(Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).

At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flashers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare for tires
that are worn, show uneven wear,
or are damaged.
• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

Maintenance

Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. This may result in
coolant being blown out of the
opening and cause serious
burns and other injuries.

While operating your vehicle:

7-7

Maintenance

At least twice a year:
(i.e., every Spring and Fall)
• Check radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or damage.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlamp alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the seat belts for wear and
function.

7-8

At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and hood
hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean the battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
SERVICES
Follow
Normal
Maintenance
Schedule if the vehicle is usually
operated where none of the following
conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, you must follow
the Maintenance Under Severe
Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extremely humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy
city traffic during hot weather
above 90°F (32°C).
For additional information or assistance see your authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Normal maintenance schedule
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)

7-9

Maintenance

15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter (if equipped) *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
(Continued)

7-10

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
6

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

7-11

Maintenance

*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.

37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months

52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200miles (10,000km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)

7-12

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of
maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for details.
*4 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust
if necessary. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform the
operation.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles
(5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7-13

Maintenance

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance (for Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) *4
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5

(Continued)

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)

7-14

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

* : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
5

*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

7-15

Maintenance

*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.

82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
(Continued)

(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance
free but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance
schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of
maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for details.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles
(5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or
6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7-16

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Nu 2.0 GDI )
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
(Continued)

7-17

Maintenance

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
(Continued)

112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months

❑ Add fuel additive *
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
1

*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

7-18

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months

(Continued)

❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120
months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your authorized
HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not
mix other additives.
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free
but periodic inspection is recommended for this maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting
problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.
*4 : Inspect for excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust
if necessary. Have an authorized HYUNDAI dealer perform the operation.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is
reduced
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000 miles (5,000
km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

7-19

Maintenance

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect valve clearance (for Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) *4
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5

(Continued)

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months

135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months

❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI)

(Continued)

7-20

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
(Continued)

142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months

❑ Add fuel additive *
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
1

❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

7-21

Maintenance

*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.

Maintenance

Normal maintenance schedule (Cont.)
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Rotating tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect intercooler, in/out hose, air intake hose - Turbo GDI
(Every 6,200 miles (10,000 km))
❑ Inspect ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid (if equipped)
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft (AWD)
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter *2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect rear axle oil (AWD) *3
❑ Inspect transfer case oil (AWD) *3
(Continued)

7-22

(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *5
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter (Nu 2.0 GDI) *6
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace coolant (First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120
months after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additive *1
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
*1 : If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle
of additive is recommended. Additives are available from
your authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on
how to use them. Do not mix other additives.
*2 : Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this
maintenance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are
some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction,
surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, replace
the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance
schedule and consult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for
details.

Normal maintenance schedule
*3 : Transfer case oil and rear axle oil should be changed anytime they have been submerged in water.
*5 : The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur or tension is reduced
*6 : Engine oil (Gamma 1.6 T-GDI) At first, replace at 3,000
miles (5,000 km) or 6 months, after that, every 5,000 miles
(8,000 km) or 6 months.
❈ Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or
replace.

No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transmission fluid

NOTICE

After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals.

Maintenance

7-23

Maintenance

Maintenance under severe usage conditions
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer
to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R: Replace
I: Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or
6 months

Every 3,000 miles (5,000 km) or 6 month

Air cleaner filter

More frequently

C, E

Spark plugs

More frequently

B, H

Automatic transmission fluid

Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)

A, C, E, F, G, I

Ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid

Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

A, C, E, F, G, H, I, J

Front brake disc/pads, calipers

More frequently

C, D, G, H

Rear brake disc/pads

More frequently

C, D, G, H

Parking brake

More frequently

C, D, G, H

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Engine oil and filter

7-24

Nu 2.0
GDI
Gamma
1.6 T-GDI

DRIVING
CONDITION
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

DRIVING
CONDITION

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm
ball joint, upper arm ball joint

More frequently

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Drive shafts and boots

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 6 months

C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

Transfer case oil (AWD)

Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

C, D, E, G, H, I, J

Rear axle oil (AWD)

Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km)

C, D, E, G, H, I, J

Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)

More frequently

C, E

Propeller shaft

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
or 6 months

C, E

Severe driving conditions
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long
distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt-spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather

E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or
vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

7-25

Maintenance

MAINTENANCE
OPERATION

MAINTENANCE ITEM

Maintenance

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine Oil and Filter

Fuel Filter

The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.

A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the
vehicle driving speed, damage the
emission system, and cause the
hard starting. When a considerable
amount of foreign substances are
accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel
filter should be replaced.
Upon installing a new fuel filter, operate the diesel engine for several minutes, and check the connections for
any leakages. Fuel filters should be
installed by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and
adjusted as necessary.

7-26

Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and
Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and damage. Have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.

Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler
Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure a new vapor
hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.

Vacuum crankcase ventilation
hoses (if equipped)

Cooling System

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter
is recommended when the filter is
replaced.

Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.

Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.

Engine Coolant

Valve Clearance (if equipped)

The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.

Inspect for excessive valve noise
and/or engine vibration and adjust if
necessary. Have an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer perform the operation.

Maintenance

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical
damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and
excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be
paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such
as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure
that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp
edges or moving component which
might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are
secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced
immediately if there is any evidence
of deterioration or damage.

Air Cleaner Filter

7-27

Maintenance

Automatic Transmission Fluid
(if equipped)
Automatic transmission fluid should
not be checked under normal usage
conditions. But in severe conditions,
the fluid should be changed at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance to the scheduled maintenance at the beginning of this chapter.
NOTICE

Automatic transmission fluid
color is basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the automatic transmission fluid will begin
to look darker. This is a normal
condition and you should not
judge the need to replace the fluid
based upon the changed color.

7-28

CAUTION
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure. Use
only the specified automatic
transmission fluid (refer to
"Recommended Lubricants and
Capacities" in chapter 8).

Ecoshift dual clutch transmission Fluid (if equipped)
Inspect the Ecoshift dual clutch
transmission fluid according to the
maintenance schedule.

Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.

Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between the MIN and the MAX
marks on the side of the reservoir.
Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.

Suspension Mounting Bolts

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Inspect the parking brake system
including the parking brake pedal
and cables.

Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.

Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and damage.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers
and Rotors

Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.

With the vehicle stopped and the
engine off, check for excessive freeplay in the steering wheel. Check the
linkage for bends or damage. Check
the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.

Maintenance

Parking Brake

Drive Shafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.

7-29

Maintenance

ENGINE OIL
Checking the Engine Oil Level
1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s
precautions.
2. Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground in P (Park) with the parking
brake set and the wheels blocked.
3. Turn the engine on and allow the
engine to reach normal operating
temperature.
4. Turn the engine off and wait about
five minutes for the oil to return to
the oil pan.
5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.

■ 1.6 T-GDI

NOTICE

OTLE075007
■ 2.0 GDI

OTLA075003

6. Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should
be between F and L.
7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil
to bring the level to F.

7-30

To prevent damage to your
engine:
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Add oil in small quantities and
recheck level to ensure engine
is not overfilled.
• Do not spill engine oil when
adding or changing engine oil.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine
components. Wipe off spilled oil
immediately.

■ 1.6 T-GDI

Checking the Engine Oil and
Filter

WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

OTLE075006
■ 2.0 GDI

Maintenance

Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this
chapter.

Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.

OTLA075006

NOTICE

Use only the specified engine oil
(refer
to
"Recommended
Lubricants and Capacities" in
chapter 8).

7-31

Maintenance

ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season
and before traveling to a colder climate.

Checking the Engine Coolant
Level

OTL075070

OTL075008

Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.

7-32

The coolant level should be filled
between the MAX and MIN marks on
the side of the coolant reservoir
when the engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water to bring
the level to the MAX mark, but do not
overfill. If frequent additions are
required, we recommend that you
see an authorized HYUNDAI dealer
for a cooling system inspection.

WARNING

The electric motor for
the cooling fan may
continue to operate
or start up when the
engine is not running
and can cause serious injury.
Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from the rotating fan
blades of the cooling fan.
The electric motor for the cooling fan
is controlled by engine coolant temperature, refrigerant pressure and
vehicle speed. As the engine coolant
temperature decreases, the electric
motor will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition. If your vehicle
is equipped with GDI, the electric
motor for the cooling fan may begin
to operate at any time and continue
to operate until you disconnect the
negative battery cable.

WARNING
Make sure the coolant cap is
properly closed after refilling
coolant. Otherwise the engine
could be overheated while driving.
■ Engine room front view

OTL075062

1. Check if the coolant cap label
is straight In front.
(Continued)

7-33

Maintenance

Never remove the
coolant cap or the
drain plug while the
engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure, causing serious
injury.
Turn the engine off and wait
until the engine cools down.
Use extreme care when removing the coolant cap. Wrap a
thick towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to the
first stop. Step back while the
pressure is released from the
cooling system. When you are
sure all the pressure has been
released, press down on the
cap, using a thick towel, and
continue turning counterclockwise to remove it.

WARNING

Maintenance

Recommended engine coolant

(Continued)
■ Engine room rear view

OTLA075063

2. Make sure that the tiny protrusions inside the coolant
cap should be securely interlocked.

7-34

• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory.
• An improper coolant mixture can
result in severe malfunction or
engine damage.
• The engine in your vehicle has aluminum engine parts and must be
protected by an phosphate-based
ethylene glycol coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
• Do not use alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the specified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.

For mixing percentage, refer to the
following table:
Ambient
Temperature
5°F (-15°C)
-13°F (-25°C)
-31°F (-35°C)
-49°F (-45°C)

Mixture Percentage
(volume)
Antifreeze
35
40
50
60

Water
65
60
50
40

i Information
If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be the
same quantity of each.
It is suitable to use for most temperature ranges of -31°F and higher.

Changing Engine Coolant
Have coolant changed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this chapter.

WARNING

NOTICE

To prevent damage to engine
parts, put a thick towel around the
coolant cap before refilling the
coolant to prevent the coolant
from overflowing into engine
parts, such as the generator.

Maintenance

Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure visibility when sprayed
on the windshield and may
cause loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident.
Engine coolant may also cause
damage to paint and body trim.

7-35

Maintenance

BRAKE FLUID
Checking the Brake Fluid
Level

If the level is low, add the specified
brake fluid to the MAX level. The level
will fall with accumulated mileage.
This is a normal condition associated
with the wear of the brake linings. If
the fluid level is excessively low, have
the brake system checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

OTLA075009

Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination.

7-36

If the brake system requires frequent additions of fluid this
could indicate a leak in the
brake system. Have the vehicle
inspected by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

• Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle’s body paint, as
paint damage will result.
• Brake fluid, which has been
exposed to open air for an
extended time should NEVER be
used as its quality cannot be
guaranteed. It should be disposed of properly.
• Do not use the wrong kind of
brake fluid. A few drops of mineral based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brake system can
damage brake system parts.

i Information

WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to come
in contact with your eyes. If
brake fluid comes in contact
with your eyes, flush your eyes
with clean water for at least 15
minutes and get immediate
medical attention.

Use only the specified brake fluid
(refer to "Recommended Lubricants
and Capacities" in chapter 8).

PARKING BRAKE

WASHER FLUID
Checking the Washer Fluid
Level

To prevent serious injury or
death, take the following safety
precautions when using washer
fluid:
• Do not use engine coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
Engine coolant can severely
obscure
visibility
when
sprayed on the windshield and
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident or
damage to paint and body trim.
• Do not allow sparks or flame to
contact the washer fluid or the
washer fluid reservoir. Washer
fluid may contain alcohol and
can be flammable.
• Do not drink washer fluid and
avoid contact with skin.
Washer fluid is poisonous to
humans and animals.
• Keep washer fluid away from
children and animals.

Checking the Parking Brake
Foot type

OTL055012

Check whether the stroke is within
specification when the parking brake
pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,
196 N) of force. Also, the parking
brake alone should securely hold the
vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the
stroke is more or less than specified,
have the parking brake adjusted by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
Stroke : 3 notch

7-37

Maintenance

OTLA075010

Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing.

WARNING

Maintenance

AIR CLEANER
Filter Replacement

OTL075015
OTLA075013

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned
for inspection using compressed air.
Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,
as water will damage the filter.
If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be
replaced.

7-38

1. Pull down the air cleaner filter
cover.
2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

OTL075016

3. Pull down the lever
UNLOCK position.

the

i Information
If the vehicle is operated in extremely
dusty or sandy areas, replace the element more often than the usual recommended intervals (refer to
"Maintenance Under Severe Usage
Conditions" in this chapter).
NOTICE
OTL075017

4. Replace the air cleaner filter.

OTL075018

7-39

Maintenance

5. Pull up the lever (1) to the LOCK
position.
6. Rise up the cover (2) until the
hooks on the cover are securely
fastened into the latches (3).
7. Check if the cover is firmly
installed.

• Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed. This will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air cleaner
filter, be careful that dust or dirt
does not enter the air intake, or
damage may result.
• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts,
use of non-genuine parts could
damage the air flow sensor.

Maintenance

CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter Inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced according to the
Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle
is operated in severely air-polluted
cities or on dusty rough roads for a
long period, it should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier.
When you replace the climate control
air filter, replace it performing the following procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.

OTLA075019

1. With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.

7-40

OTLA075020

2. Remove the support rod (1).

NOTICE

Install a new climate control air filter in the correct direction with the
arrow symbol (↓) facing downwards. Otherwise, the climate control effects may decrease, possibly with a noise.

OTLE075012

3. Remove the climate control air filter case by pulling out the right
side of the cover.

4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order
of disassembly.

Maintenance

OTLE075011

7-41

Maintenance

WIPER BLADES
Blade Inspection

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, arms or other components, do not:
• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• Attempt to move the wipers
manually.
• Use non-specified wiper blades.
OLMB073019

Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a clean
cloth dampened with washer fluid.

7-42

i Information
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield difficult to clean.

Blade Replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
NOTICE

To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers manually.
NOTICE

The use of a non-specified wiper
blade could result in wiper malfunction and failure.

Front windshield wiper blade

OLMB073021
OLMB073098

■ Type B

OLMB073020

■ Type A
1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly
rotate the wiper blade assembly to
expose the plastic locking clip.

CAUTION

CAUTION
OLMB073022

Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.

2. Press the clip (1) and slide the
blade assembly downward (2).
3. Lift it off the arm.
4. Install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
5. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.
7-43

Maintenance

1. Raise the wiper arm.

Maintenance

Rear windshield wiper blade

OLMB073099
OLMB073024
OLMB073023

1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade (1)
assembly and pull it out.

OLMB073100

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).
Then pull down the blade assembly (2) and remove it.
3. Install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
4. Return the wiper arm on the windshield.

7-44

3. Install the new blade assembly by
inserting the center part into the
slot on the wiper.
4. Make sure the blade assembly is
installed firmly by trying to pull it
slightly.

CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components,
have an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer replace the wiper blade.

BATTERY
WARNING

Maintenance

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH to you or bystanders,
always follow these precautions
when working near or handling
the battery:
Always read and follow
instructions
carefully
when handling a battery.
Wear eye protection
designed to protect the
eyes from acid splashes.
Keep all flames, sparks,
or smoking materials
away from the battery.
Hydrogen is always present in battery cells, is
highly combustible, and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of
reach of children.
(Continued)

7-45

Maintenance

WARNING

For Best Battery Service

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
NOTICE

• When you do not use the vehicle
for a long time in a low temperature area, disconnect the battery
and keep it indoors.
• Always charge the battery fully
to prevent battery case damage
in low temperature areas.

7-46

Battery Recharging

OTL075022

• Keep the battery securely mounted.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled acid from the battery immediately with a solution of
water and baking soda.

Always follow these instructions when recharging your
vehicle’s battery to avoid the
risk of SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH from explosions or acid
burns:
• Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories
and place the ignition switch
to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Keep all flames, sparks, or
smoking materials away from
the battery.
• Always work outdoors or in an
area with plenty of ventilation.
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
a well ventilated area.
(Continued)

By jump starting

Reset features

After a jump start from a good battery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 minutes before it is shutoff. The vehicle
may not restart if you shut it off
before the battery had a chance to
adequately recharge. See "Jump
Starting" in chapter 6 for more information on jump starting procedures.

Some items need to be reset after
the battery has been discharged or
the battery has been disconnected.
See chapter 3 for:
• Power Windows
• Trip Computer
• Climate Control System
• Clock
• Audio System
• Sunroof
• Integrated Memory System

i Information
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to
the environment and human
health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.

Maintenance

(Continued)
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin boiling violently.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected. Disconnect
the battery charger in the following order:
(1) Turn off the battery charger main switch.
(2) Unhook
the
negative
clamp from the negative
battery terminal.
(3) Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery
terminal.
• Always use a genuine
HYUNDAI approved battery
when you replace the battery.

7-47

Maintenance

TIRES AND WHEELS
WARNING
Tire failure may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident. To reduce risk of
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,
take the following precautions:
• Inspect your tires monthly for
proper inflation as well as
wear and damage.
• The recommended cold tire
pressure for your vehicle can
be found in this manual and on
the tire label located on the driver’s side center pillar. Always
use a tire pressure gauge to
measure tire pressure. Tires
with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling.
• Check the pressure of the
spare every time you check
the pressure of the other tires
on your vehicle.
(Continued)

7-48

(Continued)
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause
loss of braking effectiveness,
steering) control, or traction.
• ALWAYS replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehicle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.

Tire Care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.

Recommended Cold Tire
Inflation Pressures

OTLE085006

Recommended pressures must
be maintained for the best ride,
vehicle handling, and minimum
tire wear.
Over-inflation or under-inflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure that
could result in loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Severe under-inflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
resulting in an accident. This
risk is much higher on hot days
and when driving for long periods at high speeds.

7-49

Maintenance

All specifications (sizes and pressures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.

All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Warm tires normally exceed recommended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6
psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air
from warm tires to adjust the pressure or the tires will be under-inflated. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in
chapter 8.

WARNING

Maintenance

CAUTION
• Under-inflation

results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation is also
possible. Keep your tire pressures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Over-inflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.

7-50

Check Tire Inflation Pressure
Check your tires, including the spare
tire, once a month or more.

How to check
Use a good quality tire pressure
gauge to check tire pressure. You
can not tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them.
Radial tires may look properly inflated when they are under-inflated.
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the recommended pressure. Make sure to
put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. Without the valve cap, dirt or
moisture could get into the valve
core and cause air leakage. If a valve
cap is missing, install a new one as
soon as possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. Without the valve
cap, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage.
If a valve cap is missing, install a new
one as soon as possible.

Tire Rotation

i Information

ODH073802

Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Tires that are asymmetrical or directional can only be installed on the
wheel in one direction. The outside
and inside of an asymmetrical tire is
not easily distinguishable. Pay careful
attention to the markings on the sidewalls of the tires, noting the "outside"
marking and also the rotating direction before installing them on the
vehicle.

WARNING
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause
unusual handling characteristics that may cause loss of
vehicle control resulting in an
accident.

7-51

Maintenance

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI
recommends that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness (proper torque is
65-79 lb.ft [9-11 kg.m]).

■ Without a spare tire

Maintenance

Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
NOTICE

Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle’s aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.

7-52

Tire Replacement

WARNING

Tread wear indicator

OLMB073027

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replacing the tire.

To reduce the risk of DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Always replace tires with the
same size as each tire that
was originally supplied with
this vehicle. Using tires and
wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause
unusual handling characteristics, poor vehicle control, or
negatively affect your vehicle’s Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) resulting in a serious
accident.
(Continued)

Compact spare tire replacement

Wheel Replacement

A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mounting a regular size tire.

When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.

WARNING

Tire Traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.

The original tire should be
repaired or replaced as soon as
possible to avoid failure of the
spare and loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident. The
compact spare tire is for emergency use only. Do not operate
your vehicle over 50 mph (80
km/h) when using the compact
spare tire.

Maintenance

(Continued)
• Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, HYUNDAI recommends
that tires be replaced after six
(6) years of normal service.
• Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning may cause sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

7-53

Maintenance

Tire Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.

7-54

1
5,6
7
4

OLMB073028

1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is
shown.

2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replacement tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation
mean.

Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
225/60R17 99H
225 - Tire width in millimeters.
60 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
17 - Rim diameter in inches.
99 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this section
for additional information.

Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The following explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designation mean.
Example wheel size designation:
7.0J X 17

Speed
Rating
Symbol
S
T
H
V
W
Y

Maximum Speed
112
118
130
149
168
186

mph
mph
mph
mph
mph
mph

(180
(190
(210
(240
(270
(300

km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)
km/h)

3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over six years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four numbers indicate week and year manufactured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1615 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2015.

7-55

Maintenance

7.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
17 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the different speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire’s designed maximum safe operating speed.

Maintenance

4. Tire ply composition and
material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D“ means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.

7-56

6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-ahalf times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.

Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction performance.

WARNING

WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, over-inflation,
or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination,
can cause heat build-up and
possible sudden tire failure.
This may cause loss of vehicle
control resulting in an accident.
Maintenance

The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straightahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.

Temperature - A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. Grade C
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

7-57

Maintenance

Tire Terminology and
Definitions
Air Pressure
The amount of air inside the tire
pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight
This means the combined weight of
optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio
The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.

7-58

Belt

Cold Tire Pressure

A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from steel
or other reinforcing materials.

The amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in pounds per square inch
(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire
has built up heat from driving.

Bead

Curb Weight

The tire bead contains steel wires
wrapped by steel cords that hold the
tire onto the rim.

This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional
equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.

Bias Ply Tire
A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of the
tread.

DOT Markings
A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation motor vehicle safety
standards. The DOT code includes
the Tire Identification Number (TIN),
an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufacturer, production plant, brand and date
of production.

GVWR

Load ratings

Normal Occupant Weight

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

The maximum load that a tire is rated
to carry for a given inflation pressure.

The number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).

GAWR FRT
Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Load Index
An assigned number ranging from 1
to 279 that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The maximum air pressure to which
a cold tire may be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.

The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer
as primarily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles.

Maximum Load Rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle
Weight
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.

An asymmetrical tire has a particular
side that faces outward when mounted on a vehicle. The outward facing
sidewall bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.

Maintenance

Maximum Inflation Pressure

Kilopascal (kPa)

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the
Rear axle.

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.

Occupant Distribution

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and
some light duty trucks and multipurpose vehicles.

Ply
A layer of rubber-coated parallel
cords
7-59

Maintenance

Pneumatic tire

Radial Ply Tire

Tread

A mechanical device made of rubber,
chemicals, fabric and steel or other
materials, that, when mounted on an
automotive wheel provides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that
sustains the load.

A pneumatic tire in which the ply
cords that extend to the beads are
laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.

The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.

Pneumatic options weight
The combined weight of installed
regular production options weighing
over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the
standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
special trim.

Recommended Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard.

7-60

Treadwear Indicators

A metal support for a tire and upon
which the tire beads are seated.

Narrow bands, sometimes called
"wear bars", that show across the
tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of
tread remains.

Sidewall

UTQGS

The portion of a tire between the
tread and the bead.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards is a tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.

Rim

Speed Rating
An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at
which a tire can operate.

Traction
The friction between the tire and the
road surface. The amount of grip provided.

Vehicle Capacity Weight
The number of designated seating
positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68
kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage
load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occupant weight and dividing by 2.

A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure.

Snow Tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires
on some models to provide good
performance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.

If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow
tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires
on the tire label on the driver’s side of
the center pillar, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire
sidewall, whichever is less. Do not
drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)
when your vehicle is equipped with
snow tires.

Summer Tires
HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on
some models to provide superior
performance on dry roads. Summer
tire performance is substantially
reduced in snow and ice. Summer
tires do not have the tire traction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
side wall. If you plan to operate your
vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,
HYUNDAI recommends the use of
snow tires or all season tires on all
four wheels.

Maintenance

Vehicle Placard

All Season Tires

7-61

Maintenance

Radial-Ply Tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radial-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended. Any combinations of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias
belted tires when used on the same
vehicle will seriously deteriorate
vehicle handling. The best rule to follow is: Identical pairs of radial-ply
tires should always be used as a set
for the front tires and a set for the
rear tires.

7-62

Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval in this chapter to
achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.

WARNING
Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that
may cause loss of vehicle control resulting in an accident.

Low Aspect Ratio Tires
Low aspect ratio tires, the aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because low aspect ratio tires are
optimized for handling and braking,
their sidewall is a little stiffer than a
standard tire. Also low aspect ratio
tires tend to be wider and consequently have a greater contact patch
with the road surface. In some
instances they may generate more
road noise compared with standard
tires.

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire
damage with your own eyes.
But if there is the slightest
hint of tire damage, have the
tire checked or replaced
because the tire damage may
cause air leakage from the
tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.

Maintenance

Because the sidewall of a low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
a standard tire, the rim of the
wheel and the tire itself is more
easily susceptible to damage.
Use caution when driving and
follow the guidelines below to
help minimize damage to the
wheel and tire:
- When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driving,
inspect tires and wheels.
- When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or curb
stone, drive slowly so that the
tires and wheels are not damaged.
- If the tire is subjected to a
severe impact, have the tire
and wheel inspected by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
- Inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000km).

CAUTION

7-63

Maintenance

FUSES
■ Blade type

Normal

Blown

■ Cartridge type

Normal
■ Multi fuse

Blown

Normal
■ Battery fuse terminal

Normal

Blown
OLF074075

7-64

A vehicle’s electrical system is protected from electrical overload damage by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,
one located in the driver’s side panel
bolster, the other in the engine compartment near the battery.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, accessories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted or broken.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel. Before replacing a blown
fuse, turn the engine and all switches
off, and then disconnect the negative
battery cable. Always replace a
blown fuse with one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

i Information
Four kinds of fuses are used : blade
type For lower amperage rating, cartridge type/Multi fuse/Battery fuse
terminal for higher amperage ratings

WARNING
NEVER replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly
cause a fire.
• Do not install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a temporary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
possibly a fire.

CAUTION
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.

In an emergency, if you do not have
a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same
rating from a circuit you may not
need for operating the vehicle, such
as the cigarette lighter fuse.
If the headlamps or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced with the
same rating.

Instrument Panel Fuse
Replacement

OTL075026

Maintenance

OTL075023

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Open the fuse panel cover.
4. Refer to the label on the inside of
the fuse panel cover to locate the
suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the removal tool provided
in the engine compartment fuses
panel.
6. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the instrument panel fuse
panels (or in the engine compartment fuse panel).
7. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-65

Maintenance

Fuse switch

OTL075025

Always, place the fuse switch to the
ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio system and digital clock must
be reset and the smart key may not
work properly.

7-66

Engine Compartment Panel
Fuse Replacement

i Information

OTLE045199
OTL075024

If the fuse switch is OFF, the above
message will appear.
NOTICE

• Always place the fuse switch in
the ON position while driving the
vehicle.
• Do not move the fuse switch
repeatedly. The fuse switch may
be damaged.

1. Turn the engine off.
2. Turn all other switches OFF.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tap and pulling up.
4. Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
5. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tightly
in the clips. If it fits loosely, consult
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Main fuse

i Information
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

After checking the fuse box in
the
engine
compartment
securely close the fuse box
cover inside the engine compartment, until it clicks.
If the fuse box is not closed
properly, water may leak in side,
possibly causing a malfunction
with the electrical system.
OTLA075027

Maintenance

If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.

7-67

Maintenance

Multi fuse

i Information
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OTL075028

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling it up.
4. Remove the nuts shown in the picture above.
5. Replace the fuse with a new one
of the same rating.
6. Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.

7-68

Fuse/Relay Panel Description
Instrument panel fuse panel

Maintenance

OTL075067

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to
the fuse box label.

7
OTLA075031

7-69

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
A/CON1
WIPER RR
MODULE6
WASHER

Fuse rating
7.5A
15A
10A
15A

MODULE5

7.5A

Crash Pad Switch, Parking Assist Buzzer, BCM, ATM Shift Lever, 4WD ECM, AEB Sensor, Console
Switch, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Lane Departure Warning Control Module, Lane Keeping
Assist Control Module

AIR BAG

15A

SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor

MODULE1

10A

BCM, Smart Key Control Module, AUDIO, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Module, AMP, Power
Outside Mirror Switch, PCB Block (Power Outlet Relay)

START
MODULE7
HEATED STEERING
MODULE8

10A
7.5A
15A
7.5A

ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Relay), Transaxle Range Switch
Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer
BCM
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, Center Facia Switch, Key Solenoid, AEB Sensor

MODULE4

7.5A

Data Link Connector, A/C Control Module, Head Lamp LH/RH, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro
Chromic Mirror, TMU Module, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control
Module, Rear Seat Warmer

A/BAG IND
MODULE3
SMART KEY1
4WD

7.5A
10A
15A
20A

Instrument Cluster, Center Facia Switch
BCM, ATM Shift Lever, IPS Control Module (ON/START Input)
Smart Key Control Module
4WD ECM

7-70

Circuit Protected
A/C Control Module, Cluster Ionizer (Auto A/C), E/R Junction Block (Blower Relay)
ICM Relay Box (Rear Wiper Relay), Rear Wiper Motor
BCM, Smart Key Control Module
Multifunction Switch (Washer Switch)

Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse rating
10A
15A
7.5A
7.5A
7.5A
10A
15A

Circuit Protected
Tail Gate Open Relay
Rear Seat Warmer
MDPS Unit
Smart Key Control Module, Immobilizer Module
Instrument Cluster (IG1 Power), ATM Shift Lever ILL.
Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch, Immobilizer Module
Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU Module

INTERIOR LAMP

10A

Ignition Key Ill. & Door Warning Switch, Luggage Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Overhead Console Lamp,
Front Vanity Lamp LH/RH, Room Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH

DOOR LOCK
SUNROOF2
POWER OUTLET
BRAKE SWITCH

20A
20A
20A
7.5A

Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Two Turn Unlock Relay)
Panorama Sunroof
Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter
Smart Key Control Module, Stop Lamp Switch

MEMORY2

10A

Data Link Connector, BCM, Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Electro
Chromic Mirror, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Folding/Unfolding Relay)

P/SEAT (PASS)
S/HEATER FRT
SUNROOF1
MODULE2
A/CON2
HEATED MIRROR

30A
20A
20A
20A
7.5A
10A

Passenger Seat Manual Switch
Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module
Panorama Sunroof
PCB Block (Fuse - ABS3, ECU6, TCU2, MODULE1, MODULE2)
A/C Control Module
Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror, A/C Control Module, ECM (G4FJ)

Maintenance

Fuse Name
TAILGATE OPEN
S/HEATER RR
MDPS
SMART KEY3
CLUSTER
SMART KEY2
MULTIMEDIA

7-71

Maintenance

Instrument panel fuse panel
Fuse Name
P/SEAT (DRV)
SAFETY P/WINDOW
P/WINDOW RH
P/WINDOW LH
AMP

7-72

Fuse rating
30A
25A
25A
25A
25A

Circuit Protected
Driver Seat Manual Switch
Driver Safety Power Window Module
Power Window Main Switch, Passenger Power Window Switch
Power Window Main Switch
AMP

Engine compartment fuse panel

OTL075029

Maintenance

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you
can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity.

i Information
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this
manual may be applicable to your
vehicle; the information is accurate at
the time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to
the fuse panel label.

7
OTLA075030

7-73

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name

MULTI
FUSE

7-74

Protected Component

80A
60A

MDPS Unit
Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 1, IPS 2, IPS 3, IPS 4, Fuse - AMP)

B+2

60A

Smart Junction Block (ARISU-LT IPS 5, IPS 6, IPS 7, IPS 8, Fuse - SMART KEY1, SMART
KEY2, BRAKE SWITCH)

B+3

50A

Smart Junction Block (Fuse - SUNROOF1, SUNROOF2, S/HEATER FRT, S/HEATER RR,
SAFETY P/WINDOW, Power Window Relay (Fuse - P/WINDOW LH, P/WINDOW RH)

ABS1
ABS2

40A
40A

ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector
ESC Module, Multipurpose Check Connector

IG1

40A

Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), PCB Block (PDM (IG1)/PDM (ACC) Relay - With Smart
Key)

IG2

30A

Start Relay, Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), PCB Block (PDM (IG2) Relay - With Smart
Key)

B+4

50A

Smart Junction Block (Fuse - MODULE8, 4WD, P/SEAT (DRV), P/SEAT (PASS),
TAILGATE OPEN, DOOR LOCK, Leak Current Autocut Device - Fuse Switch, INTERIOR
LAMP, MULTIMEDIA, MEMORY2)

40A
50A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A

[G4NC] Cooling Fan High Relay
[G4FJ] Cooling Fan High Relay
[G4FJ - 7DCT] TCM
[G4FJ - 7DCT] TCM
Blower Relay
Power Tail Gate Module
Rear Defogger Relay

COOLING FAN1

FUSE

Fuse rating

MDPS
B+1

TCU3
TCU4
BLOWER
POWER TAILGATE
REAR HEATED

Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse rating
25A
15A
10A
20A
15A

Circuit Protected
Ignition Switch (W/O Smart Key), PDM (IG2) Relay (With Smart Key)
[G4FJ] TCM (7DCT)
BCM
PCM (G4NC) / ECM (G4FJ)
Horn Relay

BATTERY
MANAGEMENT

10A

Battery Sensor

SENSOR2

10A

[G4NC] Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve,
Variable Intake Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, Fuel Pump Relay
[G4FJ] Oil Control Valve #1/#2, Purge Control Solenoid Valve, Canister Close Valve, Fuel Pump Relay

SENSOR1
ECU2
ECU5
ECU4

15A
20A
15A
15A

[G4NC] PCM, Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down) [G4FJ] ECM, Oxygen Sensor (Up)/(Down)
IGNITION COIL #1/#2/#3/#4, Condenser (G4NC)
PCM (G4NC) / ECM (G4FJ)
PCM (G4NC) / ECM (G4FJ)

SENSOR3

10A

[G4NC] E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan High Relay)
[G4FJ] Brake Vacuum Switch, RCV Control Solenoid Valve, E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan High
Relay)

DEICER
FUEL PUMP1
MODULE1
B/ALARM HORN
ABS3

15A
20A
7.5A
10A
10A

E/R Junction Block (Front Deicer Relay)
Fuel Pump Relay
Adaptive Front Lighting Module
E/R Junction Block (B/Alarm Horn Relay)
ESC Module

Maintenance

Fuse Name
WIPER FRT1
TCU1
WIPER FRT2
ECU3
HORN

7-75

Maintenance

Engine compartment main fuse panel
Fuse Name
MODULE2

Fuse rating
10A

POWER OUTLER
FRT

20A

Front Power Outlet & Cigarette Lighter

ECU6
TCU2

10A
15A

PCM (G4NC) / ECM (G4FJ)
Transaxle Range Switch, TCM (G4FJ - 7DCT)

B/UP LAMP

10A

PCM (G4NC) / TCM (G4FJ), Transaxle Range Switch, Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Electro
Chromic Mirror, Rear Combination Lamp (IN) LH/RH

POWER OUTLER
REAR

20A

Rear Power Outlet

ECU1

30A

Engine Control Relay

7-76

Circuit Protected
[G4FJ] Vacuum Pump

LIGHT BULBS
Consult an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer to replace most vehicle light
bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle
light bulbs because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed before you
can get to the bulb. This is especially
true for removing the headlamp
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the headlamp
assembly can result in damage to
the vehicle.

i Information

WARNING
• Prior to replacing a lamp,
depress the foot brake, move
the shift lever into P (Park)
apply the parking brake, place
the igntion switch to the
LOCK/OFF position, and take
the key with you when leaving
the vehicle to avoid sudden
movement of the vehicle and
to prevent possible electric
shock.
• Be aware the bulbs may be
hot and may burn your fingers.

Maintenance

After heavy driving, rain or washing,
headlamp and trunk lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is caused
by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and the outside temperature. This is similar to the
condensation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and doesn’t indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp
bulb circuitry, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

7-77

Maintenance

Headlamp, Parking lamp, Turn
signal lamp, side marker and
front fog lamp bulb replacement
Type A – Halogen Headlamps
(Low/High beam)

OLMB073042L

Headlamp (Halogen bulb)

WARNING
• Handle halogen bulbs with
OTLA075064

(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Parking lamp
(5) Side marker lamp
(6) Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(7) Fog lamp

7-78

care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before handling it.

• Always handle them carefully, and
avoid scratches and abrasions. If
the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with
liquids.
• Never touch the glass with bare
hands. Residual oil may cause the
bulb to overheat and burst when lit.
• A bulb should be operated only
when installed in a headlamp.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediately
and carefully dispose of it.

■ High/Low beam

8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.

i Information
High

Low

The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OTLE075019

1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb
socket-connector.
5. Unsnap the headlamp bulb retaining wire by pressing the end and
pushing it upward.
6. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly.
7. Install a new headlamp bulb and
snap the headlamp bulb retaining
wire into position by aligning the
wire with the groove on the bulb.

Turn signal lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.

7-79

Maintenance

OTLE075013

Maintenance

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
6. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
7. Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.

7-80

OTLA075070

OTL075068L

Side marker lamp
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable.
3. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pulling out the bulb.
5. Insert a new bulb.

Front fog lamp
1. Remove the front bumper under
cover.
2. Reach your hand into the back of
the front bumper.
3. Disconnect the power connector
from the socket.
4. Remove the bulb-socket from the
housing by turning the socket
counter clockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the housing.

Parking lamp/Daytime running
lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Type B – HID Headlamp
(Low beam)

Headlamp (Low, HID type)

WARNING
HID Headlamp low beam
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock danger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI Dealer.
Maintenance

OTLA075064

(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Parking lamp
(5) Side marker lamp
(6) Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(7) Fog lamp

7-81

Maintenance

i Information
If your vehicle is equipped with High
Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,
these headlamps contain mercury. So
if you need to have your vehicle disposed, you should remove the HID
Headlamps before disposal. The
removed HID headlamps should be
recycled, re-used or disposed as hazardous waste.
If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-82

i Information
HID lamps have superior performance vs. halogen bulbs.
HID lamps are estimated by the manufacturer to last twice as long or
longer than halogen bulbs depending
on their frequency of use. They will
probably require replacement at some
point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling
the headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the same
manner as halogen incandescent
lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a
period of operation but will immediately relight when the headlamp
switch is cycled it is likely the HID
lamp needs to be replaced. HID lighting components are more complex
than conventional halogen bulbs thus
have higher replacement cost.

OLMB073042L

Headlamp (High, Halogen type)

WARNING
• Handle halogen bulbs with
care. Halogen bulbs contain
pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass
that could cause injuries if
broken.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before handling it.

8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.

i Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OTLE075014

Maintenance

7-83

Maintenance

OTLE075019

OTL075068L

7-84

Parking lamp/Side marker lamp/
Daytime running lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Type C – LED Headlamp
(Low beam)

OLMB073042L

Headlamp (High, Halogen type)

7-85

Maintenance

OTLA075032

(1) Headlamp (Low)
(2) Headlamp (High)
(3) Turn signal lamp
(4) Parking lamp
(5) Side marker lamp
(6) Daytime running lamp (DRL)
(7) Fog lamp

Maintenance

7-86

■ High beam

8. Connect the headlamp bulb socket-connector.
9. Install the headlamp bulb cover by
turning it clockwise.

i Information
The headlamp aiming should be
adjusted after an accident or after the
headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
OTLE075014

OTL075068L

7-87

Maintenance

OTLE075019

Maintenance

Headlamp (Low)/Parking lamp/
Side marker lamp/Daytime running
lamp (LED type)
Your vehicle is equipped with LED
lamps. LED lamps do not have
replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp
does not operate, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized HYUNDAI
dealer.

Side repeater lamp replacement

Rear combination light bulb
replacement
■ Type A

OTL075034
OTL075066

■ Type B

If the light bulb does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OTL075034

(1) Stop/tail lamp
(2) Tail lamp
(3) Rear turn signal lamp
(4) Back-up lamp
(5) Side marker
7-88

Outside lamp

3. Loosen the lamp assembly retaining screws with a cross-tip screwdriver.
4. Remove the rear combination
lamp assembly from the body of
the vehicle.

Stop/tail lamp

Turn Signal lamp

OTL075037

OTL075035
Side marker

Maintenance
OTLA075071
OTL075036

Stop/tail Lamp, Turn signal Lamp
and Side marker lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the liftgate.

5. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.

7-89

Maintenance

6. Remove the bulb from the socket
by pressing it in and rotating it
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the bulb align with the slots in the
socket. Pull the bulb out of the
socket.
7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it
into the socket and rotating it until
it locks into place.
8. Install the socket in the assembly
by aligning the tabs on the socket
with the slots in the assembly.
Push the socket into the assembly
and turn the socket clockwise.
9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.

Stop/tail lamp and Side marker
lamp (LED type)
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-90

Inside lamp

OTL075039
OTLE075016

Tail lamp/Back-up lamp
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the liftgate.
3. Remove the service cover using a
flat-blade screwdriver.

4. Remove the socket from the
assembly by turning the socket
counterclockwise until the tabs on
the socket align with the slots on
the assembly.
5. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
6. Insert a new bulb into the socket.
7. Install the socket into the assembly by aligning the tabs on the
socket with the slots on the
assembly and turning the socket
clockwise.
8. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the
body of the vehicle.

Stop and tail lamp (LED type)
If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High mounted stop lamp
replacement

License plate light bulb
replacement

OTL075041

1. Loosen the lens retaining screws
with a screwdriver.
2. Remove the lens.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
4. Install a new bulb.
5. Reinstall the lens securely with the
lens retaining screws.

7-91

Maintenance

OTL075040

1. Open the liftgate.
2. Gently remove the center cover of
the rear tailgate trim.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Remove the plug.
5. Loosen the retaining nuts and
remove the spoiler.
6. Remove the high mounted stop
light assembly after loosening the
nuts and washer nozzle.
7. Reinstall a new light assembly in
the reverse order of removal.

Maintenance

Interior light bulb replacement
Map lamp and Room lamp

Map lamp, Room lamp, Vanity mirror lamp, Tailgate room lamp and
glove box lmap
■ Map lamp - without sunroof

■ Map lamp - with sunroof

■ Room lamp - without sunroof

OTL075044

If the LED lamp does not operate,
have the vehicle checked by an
authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
7-92

OTL075043

OTLE075018

OTLE075017
■ Room lamp - with sunroof

■ Vanity mirror lamp

■ Tailgate room lamp

OLFH074029

OTL075045

■ Glove box lamp

NOTICE

Use care not to dirty or damage
lenses, lens tabs, and plastic
housings.

OTL075046

Maintenance

1. Using a flat-head screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior light housing.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3. Install a new bulb in the socket.
4. Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap
the lens into place.
If the lamps do not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
HYUNDAI dealer.

7-93

Maintenance

APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior Care
Exterior general caution

Protecting your vehicle’s finish
Washing

It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.

To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, should be
used.

High-pressure washing
• When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient distance from the vehicle.
Insufficient clearance or excessive
pressure can lead to component
damage or water penetration.
• Do not spray the camera, sensors
or its surrounding area directly with
a high pressure washer. Shock
applied from high pressure water
may cause the device to not operate normally.
• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to
boots (rubber or plastic covers)or
connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with
high pressure water.

7-94

After washing, rinse the vehicle thoroughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the finish.

WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water before getting on the
road. If braking performance is
impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.

CAUTION
• Do not use strong soap,

OLMB073082

CAUTION
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing may
cause the failure of electrical
circuits located in the engine
compartment.
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.

7-95

Maintenance

chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the interior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts, do not clean
with chemical solvents or
strong detergents.

Waxing
A good coat of wax provides a barrier between your paint and environmental contamination.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need waxing.

Maintenance

CAUTION
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, or strong detergents containing highly alkaline or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the protective coating and cause discoloration or paint deterioration.

Repairing your vehicle’s finish

Bright-metal maintenance

Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.

• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preservative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.

NOTICE

If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body
shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or
replaced.

Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.

7-96

Aluminum wheel maintenance
The aluminum wheels are coated
with a clear protective finish.

CAUTION
• Do not use abrasive cleaner,

•
•

WARNING
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.

•
•

polishing compound, solvent,
or wire brushes on aluminum
wheels.
Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent, and rinse thoroughly with water. Also, clean
the wheels after driving on
salted roads.
Do not wash the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
Do not use any cleaners containing acid or alkaline detergents.

Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, HYUNDAI produces cars
of the highest quality. However, this is
only part of the job. To achieve the
long-term corrosion resistance your
vehicle can deliver, the owner’s
cooperation and assistance is also
required.

Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on your vehicle are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the vehicle.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.

7-97

Maintenance

Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rusting.

Maintenance

High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.

7-98

Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to
keep your vehicle clean and free of
mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your vehicle clean and free
of corrosive materials. Attention to
the underside of the vehicle is particularly important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your vehicle at least
once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when
winter is over.

Keep your garage dry
Don’t park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your vehicle in the garage or drive it
into the garage when it is still wet or
covered with snow, ice or mud. Even
a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated
so moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good condition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings are highly corrosive
and may damage painted surfaces in
just a few hours. Always remove bird
droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care
Interior general precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as
perfume and cosmetic oil, from contacting the interior parts because
they may cause damage or discoloration. If they do contact the interior
parts, wipe them off immediately.
See the instructions for the proper
way to clean vinyl.

CAUTION
• Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic components inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats
etc.), use neutral detergents
or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high alcohol
content solutions or acid/
alkaline detergents, the color
of the leather may fade or the
surface may get stripped off.

7-99

Maintenance

• When cleaning underneath the
vehicle, pay particular attention to
the components under the fenders
and other areas that are hidden
from view. Do a thorough job; just
dampening the accumulated mud
rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than
prevent it. Water under high pressure and steam are particularly
effective in removing accumulated
mud and corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and
interior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.

Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not properly maintained.

CAUTION
Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric’s
appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
7-100

Cleaning the seat belt webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken
the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.

CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the Owner’s
Handbook & Warranty Information
booklet in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.

In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
vehicle inspected and maintained by
an authorized HYUNDAI dealer in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in this manual.

For
the
Inspection
and
Maintenance
Test
(With
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from
misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC
switch (ESC OFF light illuminated).
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system back on by pressing the
ESC switch again.

1. Crankcase Emission Control
System
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative Emission Control
System Including Onboard
Refueling Vapor Recovery
(ORVR)
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmosphere. The ORVR system is
designed to allow the vapors from
the fuel tank to be loaded into a canister while refueling at the gas station, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.

7-101

Maintenance

(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system

CAUTION

Maintenance

Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the surge
tank through the purge control solenoid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.

7-102

3. Exhaust Emission Control
System

Engine exhaust (carbon monoxide) precautions

The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle performance.
When the engine starts or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to the
emission system.

• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes. If you
smell exhaust fumes of any kind in
your vehicle, drive with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle
checked and repaired immediately.

Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance
problems resulting from any modification may not be covered under
warranty.
• If you use unauthorized electronic
devices, it may cause the vehicle to
operate abnormally, wire damage,
battery discharge and fire. For your
safety, do not use unauthorized
electronic devices.

WARNING
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.

WARNING
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING

Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped)

WARNING
The exhaust system and catalytic converter are very hot
during and immediately after
the engine has been running. To
avoid SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• Do not park, idle, or drive the
vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass,
vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.
A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle.
• Keep away from the exhaust
system and catalytic converter or you may get burned.
Also, Do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle, and do not coat
the vehicle for corrosion control. It may present a fire risk
under certain conditions.

7-103

Maintenance

Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components
and parts, including components found in the interior furnishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.

• Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.

Maintenance

Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control
device.
To prevent damage to the catalytic
converter and to your vehicle, take
the following precautions:

CAUTION
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL
for gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle
when there are signs of
engine malfunction, such as
misfire or a noticeable loss of
performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse
are coasting with the engine
off and descending steep
grades in gear with the engine
off.
• Do not operate the engine at
high idle speed for extended
periods (5 minutes or more).
(Continued)

7-104

(Continued)
• Do not modify or tamper with
any part of the engine or
emission control system. All
inspections and adjustments
must be made by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.
• Avoid driving with extremely
low fuel level. If you run out of
gasoline, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in
excessive loading of the catalytic converter.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,
must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

Maintenance

7-105

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Engine ......................................................................8-2
Dimensions ..............................................................8-2
Gross vehicle weight .............................................8-3
Luggage volume .....................................................8-3
Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-4
Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-6
Air Conditioning System........................................8-6
Recommended Lubricants and Capacities ..........8-7
Recommended SAE Viscosity Number .........................8-9

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

DIMENSIONS
Items

in (mm)

Overall length

176.18 (4,475)

Overall width

72.83 (1,850)

Overall height

64.76 (1,645) / 66.34 (1,650) *1

Front tread
Rear tread

225/60 R17

63.31 (1,608)

245/45 R19

63.15 (1,604)

225/60 R17

63.78 (1,620)

245/45 R19

63.58 (1,615)

Wheelbase

105.12 (2,670)

*1 : with roof rack

ENGINE
Items
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
Firing order
No. of cylinders

8-2

Gamma 1.6 T-GDI

Nu 2.0 GDI

97.09 (1,591)

121.99 (1,999)

3.03X3.36 (77X85.4)

3.19X3.81 (81X97)

1-3-4-2

4, In-line

lbs (kg)
Gamma 1.6 T-GDI
Item

2WD

Nu 2.0 GDI

AWD

2WD

Dual clutch transmission
5-passenger

4,652 (2,110)

AWD

Automatic transmission

4,784 (2,170)

4,586 (2,080)

4,740 (2,150)

LUGGAGE VOLUME
5-passenger
When the rear cargo adjustable
shelf is installed in the upper
position:

When the rear cargo adjustable
shelf is installed in the lower
position:

Front row

57 cu ft (1,614 l)

61.94 cu ft (1,754 l)

Second row

28.11 cu ft (796 l)

30.97 cu ft (877 l)

Item

SAE*

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT

* : Society of Automotive Engineers

8-3

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb

Headlamp

Front

Low

Type A
Type B
Type C
High

Turn signal lamp
Parking Lamp
Type A
Type B, C

Side Marker Lamp
Fog lamp*
Daytime running lamp (DRL)*
Side Repeater lamp (Outside mirror)

Type A
Rear combination lamp
Rear
Type B

High mounted stop lamp
License plate lamp
* If equipped

8-4

Stop/Tail
Tail
Turn signal
Back up
Side marker
Stop/Tail
Turn signal
Back up
Side marker

Bulb type
H7L
D3S
LED
H7L
PY28/8W
LED
W5W
LED
H8L
LED
LED
P28/8W
P21/5W
PY27W
W16W
W5W
LED
PY27W
W16W
LED
LED
W5W

Wattage
55
48
LED
55
28
LED
5
LED
35
LED
LED
28/8
10
27
16
5
LED
27
16
LED
LED
5

(Continued)

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

(Continued)
Light Bulb
Map lamp

Interior

ETC

Room lamp
Vanity mirror lamp
Tailgate room lamp
Globe box lamp
Puddle lamp

with sunroof*
without sunroof
with sunroof*
without sunroof

Bulb type
LED
WEDGE
LED
FESTOON
FESTOON
FESTOON
W5W
LED

Wattage
LED
10
LED
10
5
10
5
LED

* If equipped

8-5

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TIRES AND WHEELS
Inflation pressure
kPa (psi)
Items

Tire Size

Full size tire
Compact spare tire

Wheel Size

225/60 R17

7.0J X 17

245/45 R19

7.5J X 19

T155/90 D16

4.0T X 16

Normal Load

Wheel lug nut
torque kg.m
(lb.ft, N.m)

Maximum Load

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

240 (35)

240 (35)
9~11
(65~79, 88~107)

420 (60)

CAUTION
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Items
Refrigerant
oz. (g)
Compressor lubricant
oz. (cc)

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.
8-6

Weight of Volume

Classification

19.4±0.88 (550±25)

R-134a

4.23±0.35 (120±10)

PAG 30

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
Lubricant
Engine oil * * (drain and refill)
1

Volume

Classification

Gamma 1.6

4.76 US qt (4.5 l)

ACEA A5*3 (or above)

Nu 2.0

4.23 US qt. (4.0 l)

API SM*4 & ILSAC GF-4 (or above)
ACEA A5*3 (or above)

7.71 US qt. (7.3 l)

MICHANG ATF SP-IV,
SK ATF SP-IV,
NOCA ATF SP-IV,
HYUNDAI genuine ATF SP-IV

2.01 US qt. (1.9 l)

HK MTF 70W (SK)
SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W (H.K.SHELL)
GS MTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)
(API GL-4, SAE 70W)

Recommends

Automatic transmission fluid

Ecoshift dual clutch transmission fluid

Gamma 1.6

7.93 US qt. (7.5 l)

Nu 2.0

8.35 US qt. (7.9 l)

Coolant

Brake fluid

0.74~0.85 US qt.
(0.7~0.8 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for aluminum
radiator)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

8-7

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Lubricant

Volume

Classification

0.56~0.67 US qt.
(0.53~0.63 l)

Rear differential oil (AWD)
Gamma 1.6

0.51~0.55 US qt.
(0.48~0.52 l)

Nu 2.0

0.36~0.38 US qt.
(0.34~0.36 l)

HYPOID GEAR OIL API GL-5, SAE75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W90 or equivalent)

Transfer case oil (AWD)

Fuel

65.51 US qt. (62 l)

Refer to "Fuel requirements" in foreword section

*1 : Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*2 : Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure
in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*3 : If the ACEA A5 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ILSAC GF-3 (or above) or ACEA A3 (or above).
*4 : If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

8-8

CAUTION
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain
plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant.
This is especially important in
dusty or sandy areas and when
the vehicle is used on unpaved
roads. Cleaning the plug and
dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the
engine and other mechanisms
that could be damaged.

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity
engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,
however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication
in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended
could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of
temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change.
Proceed to select the recommended oil viscosity from the chart.

Temperature

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
°C -30
-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
(°F)
-10
0
20
40
60
80
100

50
120

20W-50

Gamma1.6 *1

15W-40
10W-30
5W-30, 5W-40

Nu 2.0 *2

10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30

*1 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade 5W-30 (ACEA A5 or above). However, if the
engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper
engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE viscosity
number

*2 : For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil
of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API SM / ILSAC GF-4 / ACEA
A5 or above). However, if the engine oil is not available in your
country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
8-9

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
■ Frame number

VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

■ VIN label (if equipped)

OTL085001

OTL085005

The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the passenger seat. To check
the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.

8-10

OTL085002

The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver’s side center pillar gives
the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).

ENGINE NUMBER

REFRIGERANT LABEL
(IF EQUIPPED)

■ 1.6 T-GDI

OTLE085008
■ 2.0 GDI

OTLE085006

OTLE085009

The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver’s
side center pillar gives the tire pressures recommended for your car.

The refrigerant label provides information such as refrigerant type and
amount.
The label is located on the underside
of the hood.
OTLA085003

The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL

8-11

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

CONSUMER INFORMATION
This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you
may have as you read this information.
HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the
information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest
HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:
Eastern Region:
Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine,
Massachusetts,
New
Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,
Pennsylvania,
Rhode
Island,
Vermont.
Eastern Region
1122 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
Southern Region:
Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North
Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,
West Virginia.
Southern Region
3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway
Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066
(800) 633-5151
8-12

South Central Region:
Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,
Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,
Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region:
Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,
Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,
Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive Aurora, Illinois
60506
(800) 633-5151

Western Region:
Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,
Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,
Oregon,
Utah,
Washington,
Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box
20850 Fountain Valley, California
92728-0850
(800) 633-5151

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI
MOTOR AMERICA.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov;
or write to: Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,
West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

8-13

Index

A
Air bag warning labels....................................................2-71
Air bags...........................................................................2-48
Additional safety precautions.....................................2-70
Air bag warning labels ...............................................2-71
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat..........................................................2-63
How does the air bags system operate? .....................2-53
Occupant Classification System (OCS) .....................2-58
SRS Care ....................................................................2-69
What to expect after an air bag inflates .....................2-58
Where are the air bags?..............................................2-50
Why didn’t my air bag go off in a collision ..............2-64
Air cleaner.......................................................................7-38
Air conditioner compressor label....................................8-11
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system............................3-137
Manual climate control system ................................3-127
Airventilation seat...........................................................2-19
All wheel drive (AWD) ..................................................5-42
Antenna .............................................................................4-2
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .......................................5-31
Audio...............................................................................4-17
Auto light position ........................................................3-107

I-2

Automatic climate control system ................................3-137
Air conditioning .......................................................3-145
Automatic heating and air conditioning...................3-138
Climate control air filter...........................................3-147
Manual heating and air conditioning .......................3-139
Automatic transmission ..................................................5-14
Shift lock system ........................................................5-24
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ........................5-59
AUX, USB and iPod port .................................................4-2

B
Battery.............................................................................7-45
Before driving ...................................................................5-4
Blind spot detection system ............................................5-51
Blind zone mirror............................................................3-36
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free ..................4-4
Brake system...................................................................5-28
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...................................5-31
Downhill brake control (DBC) ..................................5-39
Electronic stability control (ESC) ..............................5-33
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ...................................5-38
Parking brake (Manual)..............................................5-29
Power brakes ..............................................................5-28
Vehicle stability management ....................................5-37
Brakes/clutch fluid..........................................................7-36
Bulb replacement ............................................................7-77
Bulb wattage .....................................................................8-4
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button..................5-9

D
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-64
Dashboard, see instrument cluster ..................................3-63
Day/night rearview mirror ..............................................3-23
Daytime running light ...................................................3-112
Defogging (Windshield) ...............................................3-149
Defroster (Rear window) ..............................................3-126
Defrosting (Windshield) ...............................................3-149
Dimensions .......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel
illumination..................................................................3-64
Displays, see instrument cluster .....................................3-63
Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger seat ..............................................................2-63
Door locks.......................................................................3-14
Central door lock switch ............................................3-16
Child-protector rear door lock....................................3-18
Downhill brake control (DBC) .......................................5-39
Drinks holders, see cup holders....................................3-155
Drive mode integrated control system............................5-49

I-3

Index

California perchlorate notice ........................................7-105
Capacities (Lubricants) .....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care ...............................................................7-94
Interior care ................................................................7-99
Tire care......................................................................7-48
Cargo security screen....................................................3-161
Center console storage ..................................................3-153
Central door lock switch.................................................3-16
Certification label ...........................................................8-10
Chains
Tire chains ..................................................................5-85
Checking tire inflation pressure......................................7-50
Child restraint system (CRS) ..........................................2-37
Children always in the rear ........................................2-37
Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) ................2-40
Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS).................2-38
Child-protector rear door lock ........................................3-18
Climate control air filter......................................3-135, 7-40
Clock .............................................................................3-157
Clothes hanger ..............................................................3-159
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ................3-63
Compact spare tire ..........................................................6-20
Compass with Electric chromic mirror...........................3-28
Consumer information ....................................................8-12

Coolant............................................................................7-32
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ...................................7-32
Crankcase emission control system ..............................7-101
Cruise control system .....................................................5-75
Cup holder.....................................................................3-155

Index
Driver assist system ......................................................3-121
Rear parking assist system .......................................3-122
Rear view camera .....................................................3-121
Driving at night...............................................................5-81
Driving in flooded areas .................................................5-82
Driving in the rain...........................................................5-82

E
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ...................................5-18
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with homelink..............3-24
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with homelink and
compass .......................................................................3-28
Electric power steering ...................................................3-20
Electronic stability control (ESC)...................................5-33
Emergency towing ..........................................................6-25
Emission control system ...............................................7-101
Crankcase emission control system .........................7-101
Evaporative emission control System ......................7-101
Exhaust emission control system .............................7-102
Engine ...............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment..................................................1-6, 7-3
Engine coolant ................................................................7-32
Engine Coolant Temperature gauge................................3-65
Engine number ................................................................8-11
Engine oil........................................................................7-30
Engine start/stop button ....................................................5-9
Evaporative emission control System...........................7-101

I-4

Exhaust emission control system..................................7-102
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items.................7-26
Exterior care....................................................................7-94
Exterior features ..................................................3-46, 3-165
Fuel filler door............................................................3-48
Hood ...........................................................................3-46
Roof rack ..................................................................3-165
Exterior lights ...............................................................3-107
Exterior overview .............................................................1-2

F
Flat tire (with spare tire) .................................................6-15
Changing tires ............................................................6-15
Compact spare tire......................................................6-20
Jack and tools .............................................................6-15
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-15
Floor mat anchor(s).......................................................3-160
Fluid
Brakes/clutch fluid .....................................................7-36
Washer fluid ...............................................................7-37
Fog lamp (front)............................................................3-110
Folding the outside rearview mirror ...............................3-37
Front fog lamp replacement.........................7-80, 7-84, 7-87
Front lamps (interior)....................................................3-114
Front seat...........................................................................2-6
Fuel Economy .................................................................3-91

Fuel filler door ................................................................3-48
Fuel Gauge......................................................................3-66
Fuel requirements .............................................................F-7
Fuse switch .....................................................................7-66
Fuses ...............................................................................7-64
Fuse switch .................................................................7-66
Fuse/relay panel description.......................................7-69
Instrument panel fuse .................................................7-65
Main fuse....................................................................7-67
Multi fuse ...................................................................7-68

G
Gauges.............................................................................3-65
Glove box......................................................................3-153
Glove box lamp.............................................................3-117
Gross vehicle weight.........................................................8-3

H
Hazard warnig flasher.......................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions .........................................5-80
Head restraint..................................................................2-15
Headlamp replacement.................................7-78, 7-81, 7-85
Heated steering wheel.....................................................3-21
Heater
Automatic climate control system............................3-137
Manual climate control system ................................3-127
Highbeam operation......................................................3-109
High mounted stop lamp replacement ............................7-91
Hill-start assist control (HAC)........................................5-38
Hood................................................................................3-46
Horn ................................................................................3-22
How to use this manual ....................................................F-6
How vehicle audio works .................................................4-5

Index

I-5

Index

I
If the engine overheats......................................................6-7
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing...................6-2
If the engine stalls while driving ......................................6-2
If the engine will not start.................................................6-3
If you have a flat tire ......................................................6-15
If you have a flat tire while driving..................................6-3
Ignition switch ..................................................................5-6
Engine Start/Stop button ..............................................5-9
Key ignition switch ......................................................5-6
Immobilizer System........................................................3-12
Important safety precautions.............................................2-2
Air bag hazards ............................................................2-2
Always wear your seat belt ..........................................2-2
Control your speed .......................................................2-3
Driver distraction..........................................................2-2
Keep your vehicle in safe condition.............................2-3
Restrain all children .....................................................2-2
In case of emergency while driving..................................6-2
Indicator light..................................................................3-94
Information Mode ...........................................................3-73
Inside rearview mirror ....................................................3-23
Instrument cluster ...........................................................3-63
Gauges ........................................................................3-65
Instrument panel illumination ....................................3-64
LCD Display Control .................................................3-64
Transmission Shift Indicator ......................................3-68
I-6

Instrument panel fuse......................................................7-65
Instrument panel overview ...............................................1-5
Interior care.....................................................................7-99
Interior features.............................................................3-155
Cargo security screen ...............................................3-161
Clock ........................................................................3-157
Clothes hanger..........................................................3-159
Cup holder ................................................................3-155
Floor mat anchor(s) ..................................................3-160
Luggage net (holder) ................................................3-161
Luggage tray.............................................................3-164
Plastic bag hook .......................................................3-160
Power outlet..............................................................3-156
Sunvisor....................................................................3-156
Interior lamp AUTO cut................................................3-114
Interior light ..................................................................3-114
Front lamps...............................................................3-114
Glove box lamp ........................................................3-117
Interior lamp AUTO cut ...........................................3-114
Room lamp ...............................................................3-114
Tailgate room lamp...................................................3-116
Vanity mirror lamp ...................................................3-117
Interior light bulb replacement .......................................7-92
Interior overview...............................................................1-4

J
Jack and tools..................................................................6-15
Jack label.........................................................................6-22
Jump starting.....................................................................6-4

K
Keys ..................................................................................3-4

M
Main fuse ........................................................................7-67
Maintenance
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ............7-26
Maintenance services ...................................................7-5
Owner maintenance......................................................7-6
Scheduled maintenance service....................................7-8
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-54
Maintenance schedule.......................................................7-8
Maintenance services ........................................................7-5

I-7

Index

Label
Air conditioner compressor label ...............................8-11
Refrigerant label .........................................................8-11
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-54
Tire specification and pressure label ..........................8-11
Vehicle certification label...........................................8-10
Lane Change Assist.........................................................5-52
Lane departure warning system(LDWS) ........................5-71
LCD display....................................................................3-70
Information Mode ......................................................3-73
LCD modes ................................................................3-70
User Settings Mode ....................................................3-75
Warning Messages......................................................3-81
LCD Display Control......................................................3-64
LCD modes .....................................................................3-70
License plate light bulb replacement ..............................7-91

Lighting.........................................................................3-107
Auto light position....................................................3-107
Daytime running light ..............................................3-112
Exterior lights ...........................................................3-107
Front fog lamp ..........................................................3-110
Highbeam operation .................................................3-109
Interior lights ............................................................3-114
Turn signals ..............................................................3-110
Welcome system .......................................................3-113
Low tire pressure telltale.................................................6-11
Lubricants and capacities..................................................8-7
Luggage net (holder).....................................................3-161
Luggage tray .................................................................3-164
Luggage volume ...............................................................8-3

Index
Manual climate control system.....................................3-127
Air conditioning .......................................................3-132
Climate control air filter...........................................3-135
Heating and air conditioning....................................3-128
Mirrors ............................................................................3-23
Blind zone mirror .......................................................3-36
Day/night rearview mirror..........................................3-23
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with homelink .........3-24
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) with homelink and
compass ...................................................................3-28
Folding the outside rearview mirror...........................3-37
Inside rearview mirror................................................3-23
Outside rearview mirror .............................................3-35
Outside rearview mirror control.................................3-37
Moonroof, see panorama sunroof ...................................3-42
Multi fuse........................................................................7-68
Multimedia system............................................................4-2
Antenna ........................................................................4-2
AUX, USB and iPod port.............................................4-2
Steering wheel audio control........................................4-3

N
Non-powered tailgate (liftgate).......................................3-51

I-8

O
Odometer.........................................................................3-67
Oil (Engine) ....................................................................7-30
Outside rearview mirror..................................................3-35
Outside rearview mirror control .....................................3-37
Owner maintenance ..........................................................7-6

P
Panorama sunroof ...........................................................3-42
Parking brake ..................................................................7-37
Parking brake (Manual) ..................................................5-29
Plastic bag hook ............................................................3-160
Power brakes...................................................................5-28
Power outlet ..................................................................3-156
Power tailgate (liftgate) ..................................................3-53
Power window lock button .............................................3-41

R
Rear combination light bulb replacement.......................7-88
Rear parking assist system............................................3-122
Rear seat..........................................................................2-12
Rear view camera .........................................................3-121
Rear window wiper and washer ...................................3-120
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...................7-49
Recommended lubricants and capacities ..........................8-7
Recommended SAE viscosity number.........................8-9
Reducing the risk of a rollover .......................................5-83
Refrigerant label .............................................................8-12
Remote key .......................................................................3-4
Reporting safety defects .................................................8-13
Rocking the vehicle ........................................................5-80
Roof rack.......................................................................3-165
Room lamp....................................................................3-114
Rotation (Tire) ................................................................7-51

I-9

Index

Scheduled maintenance service ........................................7-8
Seat belts .........................................................................2-23
Additional seat belt safety precautions ......................2-33
Care of seat belts ........................................................2-36
Seat belt restraint system............................................2-26
Seat belt safety precautions........................................2-23
Seat belt warning light ...............................................2-24

Seat warmers...................................................................2-19
Seats ..................................................................................2-4
Airventilation seat ......................................................2-19
Front seat ......................................................................2-6
Head restraint .............................................................2-15
Rear seat .....................................................................2-12
Safety precautions ........................................................2-5
Seat warmers ..............................................................2-19
Shift lock system.............................................................5-25
Side marker replacement..............................7-80, 7-85, 7-88
Side repeater lamp replacement......................................7-88
Smart key ..........................................................................3-8
Smart tailgate (liftgate) ...................................................3-59
Smooth cornering............................................................5-81
Spare tire
Changing tires ............................................................6-15
Compact spare tire......................................................6-20
Removing and storing the spare tire ..........................6-15
Special driving conditions ..............................................5-80
Driving at night ..........................................................5-81
Driving in flooded areas.............................................5-82
Driving in the rain ......................................................5-82
Hazardous driving conditions ....................................5-80
Reducing the risk of a rollover...................................5-83
Rocking the vehicle....................................................5-80
Smooth cornering .......................................................5-81
Speedometer....................................................................3-65

Index
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ...................6-3
Steering wheel.................................................................3-20
Electric power steering...............................................3-20
Heated steering wheel ................................................3-21
Horn............................................................................3-22
Tilt steering/Telescope steering..................................3-21
Steering wheel audio control ............................................4-3
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Hands-Free..............4-4
Storage compartment ....................................................3-153
Center console storage .............................................3-153
Glove box .................................................................3-153
Sunglass holder ........................................................3-154
Sunglass holder .............................................................3-154
Sunroof, see panorama sunroof ......................................3-42
Sunvisor ........................................................................3-156

I-10

T
Tachometer......................................................................3-65
Tailgate (Liftgate)
Non-powered tailgate (liftgate) ..................................3-51
Power tailgate (liftgate)..............................................3-53
Smart tailgate(liftgate)................................................3-59
Tailgate room lamp .......................................................3-116
Theft-alarm system .........................................................3-19
Tilt steering/Telescope steering ......................................3-21
Tire chains.......................................................................5-85
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ........................6-9
Low tire pressure telltale ............................................6-11
Tire rotation ....................................................................7-51
Tire specification and pressure label ..............................8-11
Tires and wheels .............................................................7-48
Checking tire inflation pressure .................................7-50
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ...............7-49
Tire care......................................................................7-48
Tire maintenance ........................................................7-54
Tire replacement.........................................................7-52
Tire rotation ................................................................7-51
Tire sidewall labeling .................................................7-54
Tire traction ................................................................7-53
Wheel alignment and tire balance..............................7-52
Tire replacement.........................................................7-52
Wheel Replacement....................................................7-53
Tires and wheels specification..........................................8-6

Towing ............................................................................6-23
Trailer towing..................................................................5-89
Transmission
Automatic transmission..............................................5-14
Ecoshift dual clutch transmission ..............................5-18
Transmission Shift Indicator...........................................3-68
Trip A/B ..........................................................................3-90
Trip computer..................................................................3-89
Fuel Economy ............................................................3-91
Trip A/B......................................................................3-90
Turn signal lamp/position lamp
replacement...............................................7-79, 7-84, 7-87
Turn signals...................................................................3-110

U
User Settings Mode.........................................................3-75

Warning light ..................................................................3-94
Warning Messages - LCD display ..................................3-81
Washer fluid ....................................................................7-37
Welcome system ...........................................................3-113
Wheel alignment and tire balance ..................................7-52
Wheel replacement .........................................................7-53
Windows .........................................................................3-38
Power window lock button ........................................3-41
Windshield defrosting and defogging...........................3-149
Windshield washers (Front) ..........................................3-118
Windshield wipers (Front) ............................................3-118
Winter driving .................................................................5-85
Tire chains ..................................................................5-85
Wiper blades ...................................................................7-42
Wipers and washers ......................................................3-118
Rear window wiper and washer ...............................3-120
Windshield washers (Front) .....................................3-118
Windshield wipers (Front)........................................3-118

Index

Vanity mirror lamp........................................................3-117
Vehicle break-in process...................................................F-9
Vehicle certification label ...............................................8-10
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ...........F-10
Vehicle identification number (VIN) ..............................8-10
Vehicle load limit ............................................................5-98
Vehicle stability management .........................................5-37

I-11

251.boo 2016 Tucson

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation